Home

VPR100 VRX100 VRX150 User Manual

1. TEMP7 19415 DEGF legs Y 200 TEMP7 20615 DEG AL Aso m e e e SSS S vaLUE2 4 NALUE2 aM 111 VALUE p 4 VALUE 164 STILE Tacs Ru A d TAGS VALUES VALUES 19 wi LIC vatues po 1500 0 VALUES ALARM 1 AJALARM 1 HIGH A ALARM1HIGH Vertical Trend Vertical Trend Digital Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend Digital V TREND VTRNDDIG H TREND HTRNDDIG TEMP3 TEMP8 TEMP5 TEMP7 Ts PRESSURE 3 TE 2500 00 2500 00 2500 00 2261 50 DEGF i A PRESS 3 Sada 7 7 1500 00 7 1500 00 1500 00 3 0 g 0 0 LE 2261 50 1982 50 2261 50 I DEGF DEGF DEGF PS A ALARM THIGH A TEMP 1 HIGH Horizontal Trend Bar 3 Point Vertical Bar Graph 6 Point Vertical Bar Graph Panel Display HTRNDBAR V 3 BAR V 6 BAR PANEL 11 15 UNIT DATA 12 15 ZONE1 ZONE2 ZONE3 TAG4567 2345 67 1 23 45 1 23 45 1 23 45 TAG4567 2345 67 DEGF pear DEGC DEG F hacaser xe ZONE4 ZONES ZONEG 4567 284567 123 45 123 45 123 45 facae 294567 DEGF xot xee zen EP REO TAG4567 2345 67 DEGF 1 23 45 1 23 45 1 23 45 TAG4567 123456789 TAG4567 123456789 DEGF ZONEA ZONEB ZONEC 123 45 123 45 123 45 Unit Data Panel Meter UNIT DATA PANMETER Figure 4 19 Displays Accessible by the Display Bu
2. eterne tent tente tren trennen eter ener 138 Table4 45 1 Point Block Average Prompts entree tei tr e Desa at rte ee re ore Ee e drea 139 Table 4 46 Rolling Average Prompts eei ne dee Rei ep ce e ete ee npe ts 140 Table 4 47 Multiple Average Prompts eeeescecsseceesseceseceeseeceseeeesaeceseeeesaeceneeeaaeceseeecsaecseeessaeeeneecaeeceeneeesaeeae 141 Table 4 48 CEMS Block Average 142 Table 4 49 CEMS Rolling Average 143 Table 4 50 Alarm Prompts ee nivea oreet Do eae Use me Sedans m Pe S 144 Table 4 54 7Totalizer Prompts ene tte Ie pec dete eI eroe i 147 Table 4 52 Constant Prompts uec eene ep eee ede elei 149 Table4 53 Copy Block Prompts teeeciet n oen e e ERN ER ORI TR DEREN 151 Table 4 54 Display Setup Procedures n eee ete eer t tton ee re debe prs 155 Table 4 55 Set Up Trend 1 Prompts eoin ete petri t p ER UR tete intanto 155 Table 4 56 Paper Chart Speed Equivalents to Time Base Selections sse 157 Table 4 57 VRX 100 Live Trend Buffer Sizes sirieus apneic reee 157 Table4 58 VRX 150 Live Trend Buffer Size 2 en eee teet tette Ue ee e USO iter e e EUR reir n 158 Table 4 59 Set Up Bar
3. Points of screen Time base time width per screen widths 5 min 15 30min 1 hr 2 hrs 4 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 1 241 20 hrs 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 20d 1h 40d 2h 80d 4h 240d 17h 2 160 13 4 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 26 17h 53d 10h 160d 8h 3 120 10 hrs 1d 6h 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 20d 1h 40d 2h 120d 6h 4 96 8 hrs 24 hrs 2 days 4 days 8 days 16 days 32d 1h 96d 4h 5 80 6 7hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 26 17h 80d 4h 6 69 5 7hrs 17 hrs 1d 10h 2d 20h 5d 16h 1id10h 22d21h 68d 17h 7 60 5 hrs 15 hrs 1d 6h 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 20 1h 8 53 4 5hrs 13 hrs 1d 2h 2d 3h 4d 10h 8d 21h 17d 19h 53d 10h 9 48 4 hrs 12 hrs 24 hrs 2 days 4d 8 days 16 days 48d 2h 10 44 3 6hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 20h 3d 15h 7d 6h 14d 13h 43d 17h 11 40 3 3 hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 40d 2h 12 37 3 1 hrs 9hrs 18 hrs 1d 13h 3d 2h 6d 4h 12d 8h 37 days 2 Trend Groups Enabled Points of screen Time base time width per screen widths 5 min 15min 30min hr 2 hrs 4 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 1 120 10 hrs 1d 6h 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 20d 1h 40d 2h 120d 6h 2 80 6 7 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 26d 17h 80d 4h 3 60 5 hrs 15 hrs 1d6h 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 20d 1h 60d 3h 4 48 4 hrs 12 hrs 24 hrs 2 days 4 days 8 days 16 days 48d 2h 5 40 3 3hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 40d 2h 6 34 2 9hrs 8 6 hrs 17 hrs 1d 10h 2d 20h 5d 17h 11d 10h 34d 8h 7 30
4. ANALOG POINTS SUMMARY DISCRETE POINTS SUMMARY TEMP 7 2261 50 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 Ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 POINT 1 os ON POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 2 os OFF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 05 OFF POINT 3 os OFF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 05 ON POINT 4 os ON POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 POINT 1 os OPEN POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 CLOSED POINT 2 os CLOSED POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 os HIGH POINT 3 05 HIGH POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 05 Low POINT 4 os Low POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 ON POINT 1 os ON POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 2 05 OFF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 05 POINT 3 os OFF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 05 ON POINT 4 os ON POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 POINT 1 os OPEN POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 CLOSED POINT 2 os CLOSED POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 05 HIGH POINT 3 os HIGH POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 os Low POINT 4 os Low POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 ON POINT 1 05 ON POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 2 os OFF POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POIN
5. AO1 TX j mi TX 1 L2 N COM brem 24V RX 24V 00 1 DO 100 AO2 AO2 AO3 AO3 4 4 EEEEEEEEEEEEEEER oooooocooo0c000000000 8 DOODODDDDODDDDDDDDDDODD g z vs TB3B only TB3A and TB3B See Table 2 5 For 24VDC Input Power L1 L2 N gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Figure 2 5 Terminal Connections amp TB3B Table 2 6 Optional 12 PT Al Card Terminal Boards TB3A amp TB3B Contents of 12 pt Al Card TB3A TB3B 011 Ali 012 DI3 Al2 014 Al2 DI5 Al3 DI6 017 Al4 DI8 Al4 COM RJ COM RJO COM RJ COM RJ DO1 Al5 DO2 15 DOS Al6 DO4 16 DO5 Al7 DO6 AI7 DO7 Al8 DO8 AI8 VPR amp VRX User Manual 23 Installation General Wiring Recommendations In general use stranded copper wire for non thermocouple electrical connections Keep in mind that the maximum load resistance for many process instruments includes the interconnecting wire Separation of low level and high level wiring is recommended Twisted signal pairs and shielded cable will improve noise immunity if wire routing is suspect Observe all national and local electrical codes when making power
6. B 3 Prevention Methods Introduction There are three ways to prevent electrical noise from interfering with the operation of the electronic digital equipment e Built in noise rejection e Separation of signal and power lines e Noise suppression at source Built in noise rejection The first method is to design the digital equipment with a high degree of noise rejection built in This includes housing the equipment in a case that will provide shielding liberal use of noise rejection filters and opto isolators and the use of noise suppressors on potential noise sources within the equipment itself This of course is the responsibility of the manufacturer who usually performs extensive laboratory and field testing of newly designed digital equipment to insure the adequacy of its immunity to noise As a minimum requirement the equipment should be able to pass the tests outlined in the IEEE Standard 472 1974 Surge Withstand Capacity Tests Signal and power line separation The second method is to prevent noise from getting on the signal and power lines that are connected to the equipment This is achieved by proper separation and shielding of those lines In some cases separate power lines or special power line regulation or filtering may be required for satisfactory electronic digital equipment operation It is the responsibility of the installer to follow good wiring practices Suppression at the source The third prev
7. sees eene nennen enne en rennen tren 303 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual xvi VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction 1 Introduction 1 1 Three manuals in one This manual describes the VPR100 Video Programmer Recorder the VRX100 Video Recorder and the VRX150 Video Recorder All instruments are alike with a few exceptions These exceptions are noted throughout the manual Unless indicated otherwise any feature described herein applies to all three instruments 1 2 VPR100 Overview The Honeywell VPR100 Video Programmer Recorder Figure 1 1 is part of the family of multi point multi function video products The instrument can process display and record analog and discrete data that is controlled by one or more control loops each of which can each run its own setpoint profile The instrument features a high resolution LCD 139 7 mm 5 5 display capable of displaying up to 16 different colors simultaneously The front panel is hinged to allow access to a 1 44MB or optional 120MB or Zip disk drive and a connector for a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader for easy labeling of parameters Twelve panel keys control all functions of the instrument including configuration The instrument will accept thermocouple RTD pyrometer milliamp millivolt and volt inputs Up to eight analog outputs are available for retransmission or control of which up to four are current adjusting or voltage adjusting
8. Maximum height of screw after mounting M3x8 or 12 mm Ig pan head screw lt q 7 6mm 0 300 Maximum height of screw after mounting M3x8 or 12 mm Ig pan head screw SS SEEN NS NIS ICM Figure 2 1 VPR100 amp VRX100 Mounting 18 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation 4 1 52 312 7 06 500 138 Panel 5 43 Rear of box Panel Cutout Mounting Bar slots Y top amp bottom 19 7 0 77 19 7 0 7 Recommended minimum 254 mm 10 cutout spacing Front view 88 on sides and top for U 19 1887 access to screws on sides and top of P 342 4 13 48 VRX150 294 6 11 60 gt 304 8 12 00 Min gt NOTE Dimensions in mm inches Side view gt lt q 7 6mm 0 300 Maximum height of Notched end of bar screw after mounting towards thin panel Mounting Bar M3x8 12 mm Ig Thin panel mounting P pan head screw install bottom bar the same as top bar 4 7 6mm 0 300 Notched end of bar Maximum height of away from thick Panel screw after mounting pan head screw Thick panel mounting 4 install bottom bar L fo KEEN dt the same as top bar _ a4 r1 M3x8 or 12 mm Ig Figure 2 2 VRX150 Mounting ATTENTION To cover cutouts left by previous instruments order panel mounting adapter plates see Ta
9. esee nennen rennen nete teen 54 Example Number Selection Procedure Using Front Panel Buttons sse 56 Example Programming Discrete Input Parameter with a 56 Example Function Block Parameter Selection Procedure sse 57 Function Block Configuration Procedure eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen rennen nenne enne 57 Example Configuration Procedure uiii etre tieu epp iet isdem ect leiten 58 Data Storage File Extensions etico ie ete e oe ete eet E Ente UE EE tav 74 Configuration and Calibration Filename Extensions esses eene 76 Program Mode te eite eerie ET RR eire eere he D D 79 Frequently Used Programming 80 Labels for Function Blocks ee tene dette e tvs subs eter tee 83 Other te te chek a ete eect Se eee 84 Analog Input Algorithm Selection neben eee ie tette DRE eH e etie 85 Standard Algorithm Prompts ssns nnee ner apei e d ei ripe e dite i ee He eee 85 Custom Algorithm EEO ESOTO ESEETO NEE E ED 88 Loop Characteristics crece Ra HE E MIR EE ne ds He ERR Me tU PISA Met 89 Control Loop Type Menu Selections etie erheben tre eate b rt
10. PYROMETRY ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes all the Rayotube and Spectray ranges from the list of types on the Program Analog Input menu Al VALUE ADJUST ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the ANALOG INPUT ADJUST from the Online Data Entry menu which disables the ability to apply adjust or emissivity corrections DI DO FORCING ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the FORCE DI DO POINTS from the Online Data Entry menu which removes the ability to force any DI DO on or off ALARMS ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes access to the entire alarm system Any alarms already programmed will still operate giving message stripes and operating relays There will be no alarm summary or related displays CONSTANTS LABELING REVIEW PROGRAM DISK REPLAY ZOOM POINT DETAIL TIMEBASE SELECT CUSTOM INPUT 12 00 ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE removes the Constant entry display thus removing the ability to set or adjust CN values CNs previously programmed will continue to exist DISABLE removes the labeling prompts from the individual parameter programming submenus Labeling can still be entered from the ENTER LABELS item on the main Program menu DISABLE removes the REVIEW PROGRAMMING function from the main Online menu DISABLE removes the menu items which allow
11. 150 only e load a profiler from floppy disk e start a profiler e hold a profiler e reset a profiler e advance a profiler e shut down a profiler view profiler events e view profiler details profiler elapsed time segment time remaining profiler length in seconds PV 2 value edit profile segments view various profiler displays All these tasks can be done using the front panel buttons shown in Figure 5 15 The procedures are explained in the next several pages Honeywell Display Menu Start Enter Holdf Reset Left Down Arrow Arrow Display 1 Up Arrow Auto Manual Tab Figure 5 15 VPR Buttons 208 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler ATTENTION The following procedures assume the instrument has been programmed to display the Setpoint Profiler as a trend To program displays see section 4 18 Program Displays How to load programs from memory using Online menu In the VPR100 and VRX150 only programs can be saved to internal memory and can be retrieved Programs stored in memory are identified by number 1 96 depending on instrument model number Each program stored in memory contains one to four profiles depending on your instrument See Table 5 7 For example on an instrument with 3 profiles you can stored Program 1 which contains Profiles 1 2 and 3 Table 5 7 How Profiles Are Stored In Memory VPR100 VRX150 only 1 programmer instrument 1 Profile pe
12. Intended Instrument Locations 12 Rack or panel mounting in control room or industrial environments operator accessibility front of panel only Installation Category II with grounded mains supply from isolation transformer or ground fault interrupter Pollution Degree 2 with rear of panel enclosed in industrial environment VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction 1 7 Model Number In the nameplate on the outside of the case the Model Number identifies the content and configuration of your instrument Refer to the Model Selection Guide for product restrictions and ordering an instrument VPR Model Number Table Table II Table Ill J Table IV Table V TT H Key Number Number of Number Programmers VPR101 1 VPR102 2 VPR103 3 VPR104 4 Additional Analog Inputs None 1 input per Programmer 1 Discrete Inputs Outputs None 6 DC Solid State Relays 6 AC Solid State Relays gt O WrPrOONouRwWNhd O UJ C 6 Mechanical Relays Input Card E 4 DC Solid State Relays 3 Event Inputs 0 Standard F 4AC Solid State Relays 3 Event Inputs APERI 10 Ohm Cu RTD G 4 Mechanical Relays 3 Event Inputs H_ 8 Discrete Inputs 8 Open Collector Outputs Documentation J 16 Discrete Inputs 16 Open Collector Outputs E____ Standard English K_ 8 Discrete Inputs 24 Open Collector Out
13. 7 Press Enter to select Program Number prompt 8 Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to select the Program number is displayed desired program number to be loaded 9 Press Enter to select Program number is selected Action If instrument is not in online mode press the Display button to change to online mode Access the Setpoint Profile Trend display Press the Display button until the Setpoint Profile Trend display is shown Or Press the Display button until a Setpoint Bar Graph display is shown Press the Tab button to move the cursor to the TREND text under the desired profile at the bottom of the display Press Enter to display the Setpoint Profile Trend display for that profile menu Program is loaded from memory to the instrument Result Notes An online display is shown Setpoint Profile Trend display is shown Profiler menu is shown Cursor moves down to LOAD menu item LOAD menu is displayed Cursor moves to the right Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to select the desired program number to be loaded Program number is displayed Press Enter Press Down Arrow to highlight LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY Press Enter to select it VPR amp VRX User Manual Program number is selected Cursor is on LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY Specified Program is loaded from the internal memory to the specified Profiler 12 00 Setpoint Profiler How programs
14. INPUT A INPUT H OFF analog parameter Enter the parameters or numbers to be used in the number equation RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 Resets the function block Use only when the equation 1 result is the input to itself integrating that is when the equation contains the letter O 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 115 Programming Function Blocks and Features 116 Table 4 24 Free Form Math Functions For this function or value Type this in the equation n constant n Negation n NEG n Value of Input A A Value of Input B B Value of Input C Value of Input D D Value of Input E E Value of Input F Value of Input G G Value of Input H H Add m Subtract Multiply Divide Constant number n for example 123 45 Absolute value of n ABS n Square root of n SQRT n y n e where x n EX n Log base 10 of n LOG n Natural log of n LN n Integration Result of equation as of last machine cycle Letter O not zero 0 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Logic The input or inputs are processed by a logic operator Call the result of this logic operation Result Result is a pulse that goes ON 1 when the logic is true and OFF 0 whe
15. Prompt Range Selections Definition POINT 1 POINT 12 Analog or discrete parameters Select up to 12 analog or discrete points These points will be displayed as a list 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 159 Programming Function Blocks and Features Set Up Profile 1 Table 4 62 describes the prompt for setting up a Profile display Affects the Setpoint Profiler Trend displays only Table 4 62 Set Up Profile Display Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition DISPLAY TIME Number Enter the time width of the profile trend display in the time units of the profile The higher this number the more of a profile will fit on the screen at a time A value of zero means the entire profile will be displayed if the profile has no infinite segment loops no infinite auto cycling and no external ramp type Set Up Profile 2 Set Up Profile 3 Set Up Profile 4 See Table 4 62 for prompt description for setting up displays for Profiles 2 4 160 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Assign Displays to Keys All instruments have a Display key anda Display 1 key 1 The VRX 100 can have an optional Display 2 key 2 You can assign a total of 10 displays to these keys Pressing the Display 1 key accesses the format you assign to Display 1 see table below The optional Display 2 key accesses Display 2 The Display key accesses Displays 3 10 or if your instrum
16. esee eene nennen en rennen 55 Figure 3 14 Example Configuration esee ener enne tene teetnne tere tere trente entren reete enne 58 Figure 3 15 Control Of Furnace Zone Temperature With 4 20 mA CAT Control Signal 59 Figure 3 16 Basic Function Blocks Required For Control Configuration Of Figure 3 15 sss 60 Figure 3 17 Labeling Each Function Block s Name And Major Inputs And Outputs esee 61 Figure 3 18 Labels For Internal Function Block Parameters eese eren ene 62 Figure 3 19 Interconnections Between Function Blocks nennen nnne 62 Figure 3 20 Complete Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 15 sess eene 63 Figure 3 21 Control Of Wastewater pH Using A Time Proportioning DAT Control Signal 64 Figure 3 22 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 21 enne nennen treten trenes 64 Figure 3 23 Temperature Control Of Water Using Split Output Or Duplex Control esse 65 Figure 3 24 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 23 sse eee nennen eene nennen nenne 66 Figure 3 25 Temperature Control Of An Oil Heated Chemical Reaction Chamber esee 67 Figure 3 26 Function Block Diagram Of The Cascade Control Strategy sese 68 Figure 3 27 Example Set Point Profile eee ede tre cepe Pe
17. B 7 Ferrite Clamp Installation Procedure Purpose This procedure ensures that unwanted radio frequency noise is filtered which is required for CE compliance Parts needed Part Quantity Description 047260 2 Ferrite cable clamps 089037 4 Nylon cable ties Procedure Snap the clamp closed making sure to not pinch the wires 6 7 Secure the wires by affixing a cable tie around the wires near each end of the clamp 8 3 4 to 1 AO wires Figure Appendix B 5 Ferrite Clamp Installation 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 303 304 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Index Action State 104 105 advancing profile 215 Alarm acknowledging 241 Action 144 Compare Point deviation 144 Deviation 144 edit setpoints 244 High 144 High Rate 144 history 241 Hysteresis 145 Low 144 Low Rate 144 program 144 summary 240 what happens during 241 Alarm History 241 Analog Input Adjust 244 Analog Input Connections 25 analog inputs changing to expanded range 266 program 85 Analog output adjusting 245 Analog Output Connections 26 analog outputs program 100 analog point values displaying 242 Analog Switch 108 Approach High and Low 93 Assign Displays to Keys 161 Auto Manual Select 93 B Back Calculation 136 Back Calculation Value 94 Back Calculation 89 Batch Control 179 buffer capacity 178 Bumpless Transfer
18. SDA SCF Primary Displays Support Displays Table 1 1 Specifications continued Performance Capacities continued Up to 10 displays may be assigned from the following formats Vertical Trend Vertical Trend Digital Horizontal Trend Horizontal Trend Digital Horizontal Trend Bar 3pt Vertical Bar Graph 6pt Vertical Bar Graph Panel Display Unit Data Panel Meter Alarm Summary Storage Status Totalizer Loop w Bar Graph Loop w 2 Bar Graphs Loop w 3 Bar Graphs Loop w 4 Bar Graphs Setpoint Profiler w 2 Bar Graphs Setpoint Profiler w 3 Bar Graphs Setpoint Profiler Trend The VRX150 has these additional formats Panel Display w 4 Large Fonts instead of Panel Display Setpoint Profiler w 4 Bar Graphs Vertical Trend Digital 4 pt Vertical Bar Graph instead of 3 pt Vertical Trend Bar 4 pt Horizontal Bar Graph instead of 3 pt 6 pt Horizontal Bar Graph Process Summary 13 menu access Type RS 422 485 Honeywell Binary Modbus RTU protocol Connection 2 twisted pairs with shield 5 wires Distance 600 meters 2000 feet Number of links Up to 30 Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 76 8K Parity Selectable odd even none Optional Software Accessories Data Analysis Software Configuration Software Table 1 2 Analog Input Accuracy Linear types Input Range Accuracy at Calibration Temperature Temperature Effects 25 to 25 mV 0 02 0 01 0 003 mV per C 75 to
19. VPR amp VRX User Manual 85 Programming Function Blocks and Features RANGE HIGH Table 4 6 Standard Algorithm Prompts continued __ Range Selections The value must be within the limits specified for the input type see Table 1 3 Be sure to use the correct value for the temperature units used F C K R To enter the full range for the temperature units selected see TEMPERATURE UNITS select TYPE again and press Enter without changing the range type Definition High end of the input range TEMPERATURE UNIT DIRECT INDIRECT CIRCUIT LOW CIRCUIT HIGH ELECTRICAL UNITS LAG 86 Select C for Degrees Celsius F for Degrees Fahrenheit K for Kelvin R for Rankine or NONE Select DIRECT for thermocouple pyrometer or RTD inputs Select INDIR Indirect for volt or millivolt signal inputs from linear or non linear transmitters Select SQRT Square Root for extracting flow measurements from a voltage input representing differential pressure measurements If SQRT is chosen the RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH must be adjusted to specify the upper and lower limits of the flow units span OFF or number OFF or number Select whether the CIRCUIT LOW or CIRCUIT HIGH values specified are in units of VOLTS MV millivolts or OHMS 2 0 seconds or OFF VPR amp VRX User Manual Specifies the temperature units used for thermocouple pyrometer and RTD input
20. Acts as a master enable disable switch for all data storage Select this item from the DATA STORAGE menu Set to ENABLE to allow storage of the current schedule If this is set to DISABLE online data storage cannot take place even if storage for individual files is enabled with EXTERNAL ENABLE Acts as a enable high disable low switch for each storage file type trends alarms events diagnostics unit data Any storage file whose external enable is configured with a discrete will start and stop according to the state of that discrete This works independently of batch storage Acts as a start stop switch for each storage file type The ENABLE STORAGE and EXTERNAL ENABLE both must be enabled for BATCH STATE to function Accessed under DATA STORAGE menu If batch storage mode is configured for any storage file and if BATCH CONTROL has not been configured with a discrete then you can manually start stop the batches using this selection The instrument will automatically assign a number internally to identify the batch for storage For example data stored between the first start and stop is marked as Batch 1 When the next batch starts the instrument will increment the batch number These numbers identify the batches for later retrieval BATCH CONTROL Accessed under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES If this item is configured with a discrete it will start and stop storage for all storage files configured with batch storage mode The ENAB
21. Condition Type Extend Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is Then CVn OS is 3 sec extend Time e 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 111 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 20 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts continued Condition type Application If this is true PULSE Used for interfacing with slower Result switches ON 1 for lt circuits CONDITION TIME then On rising edge of Result OFF 0 creates pulse length CONDITION TIME and ignores additional rising edges of Result within that CONDITION TIME then CVn OS is ON 1 for CONDITION TIME then OFF 0 During CONDITION TIME any additional OFF 0 to ONs of Result are ignored Condition Type Pulse Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is Then CVn OS is Guarantees that CVn OS will be Result switches ON 1 multiple most recent rising edge of expires Result Condition type Application If this is true then CVn OS is RT PULSE Used for slower circuits Result switches ON 1 for ON 1 for CONDITION Re triggerable pulse CONDITION TIME then TIME then OFF 0 OFF 0 ON 1 when Result first ON for CONDITION TIME after times before CONDITION TIME switches ON 1 and remains ON 1 until Result has not switched ON 1 for CONDITION TIME Result switches ON 1 for gt CONDITION TIME then OFF 0 Conditio
22. Placer ikke udstyret i n rheden af brandbare v sker eller dampe Temperatur Rumtemperatur 0 til 50 C Opbevaring 20 til 70 C Fugtighed 10 til 90 RH ikke kondenserende 40 C Vibration 5 til 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 to 150 Hz acceleration 0 5 g UDSTYRS INSTALLATION Skriveren skal monteres i en tavle for at forhindre adgang til bagterminaler VEILIGHEIDSVEREISTEN DU2I 6047 Ter vermindering van het gevaar van elektrische schokken die lichamelijk letsel kunnen veroorzaken dient u alle veiligheidsaanwijzingen in dit dokument te volgen Dit symbool waarschuwt de gebruiker voor een potentieel schokgevaar wanneer toegang bestaat tot onderdelen die onder gevaarlijke spanning staan Beschermende aarde aansluiting Bestemd voor aansluiting van de aardingsdraad van de voeding OAS e Indien de apparatuur wordt gebruikt anders dan door de fabrikant gespecificeerd kan de bescherming die de apparatuur biedt ongedaan worden gemaakt e Alleen die onderdelen mogen worden vervangen die door de fabrikant als uitwisselbaar zijn aangemerkt e Alle bedrading moet in overeenstemming zijn met de lokale elektriciteiseisen en moet aangelegd worden door geauthoriseerd ervaren personeel e De aardingsdraad moet worden aangesloten v rdat alle andere bedrading wordt aangesloten en als laatste worden verbroken e Het verdient aanbeveling een netschakelaar aan te brengen vlakbij het instrument APPARATUUR VOORWAARDEN Voedingssp
23. Select SET UP NEW SCHEDULES to specify storage data mode and other settings See page 171 4 Select STORAGE ALLOCATION to specify storage rates See page 177 5 Select WARNING LEVEL to specify the capacity warning level See page 179 If using a 120MB Zip disk preinitialize the disk using DSU software This will reduce intialization time step 7 dramatically from hours to minutes Select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk with the settings you created in steps 3 and 4 See page 181 Enable storage Set to Enable to turn on storage If Disabled no storage will occur regardless of any other settings 170 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Set Up New Schedules This item contains setup menus for all data sets Select it to specify what data to store and how to store it If a type of data storage is not scheduled no disk file will be created for it ATTENTION If you make any changes to any item under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES you must initialize using new schedules to activate those changes The following items appear under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES and are described under the following headings e Trend Data 1 e Trend Data 2 e Trend Data 3 e Alarms e Events e Diagnostics e Unit Data e Storage Allocation e Batch Control Trend Data 1 At the top of the display the message SETUP IS CURRENT indicates that current setu
24. Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition cus 206 TIME MULTIPLIER Number Time Multiplier determines the speed at which the profiler will run when in Fast Forward mode It is used for testing the profiler s execution See Fast Forward When FAST FORWARD is ON 1 the profiler will run at a speed determined by the TIME MULTIPLIER parameter Example The instrument is running at a 500msec scan rate The TIME MULTIPLIER is set to 60 Therefore the profiler will run in 500msec x 60 or 30 second increments Running a profiler in FAST FORWARD is a way to check for proper functioning of the profiler s events and outputs without having to wait for the profiler to execute at its normal speed See Figure 5 12 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Editing Segments Use the following prompts to map out each segment s value time and events Up to 63 segments are programmable per profile Table 5 6 Edit Segments Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition NEXT SEGMENT Select this to edit the next segment PREVIOUS SEGMENT Select this to edit the previous segment VALUE OFF or number This prompt is active for soak segments and value duration ramp types Enter the value of the segment AUX VALUE TIME OFF or number This value is an auxiliary soak output of the profile The output is
25. Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution continued Parameter name Definition by present Triggered Conditions Result Startup Segments Batch Segments Shutdown Segments END batch END shutdown BATCH LAST SEGMENT 1 BATCH FIRST SEGMENT BATCH LAST SEGMENT Figure 5 13 Shutdown RAMP See External Ramp Type on page 190 Rising Profiler is in Profiler INCREMENT edge Run mode amp increments RAMP TYPE by amount of profiler is specified by External the segment s TIME GUARANTEED See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 Level ON Excessive Profiler is SOAK deviation put on Hold between profiler and PV 1 or PV 2 amp the segment s GUAR SOAK 1 or GUAR SOAK 2 is enabled HOLD LEVEL EDGE 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 199 Setpoint Profiler 5 4 How to set up a profiler Up to 4 profilers can be programmed depending on the options on your instrument There are two menus for programming a profiler PROGRAM PROFILERS in the Program menu and SETPOINT PROFILES in the Online menu Both must be accessed to program a profiler Both menus are described in this section Program Profilers menu in Program mode 200 This menu lets you define various parameters for controlling the profiler s execution To access the Program Profilers menu 1 2 3 4 Press the Menu button until a main menu is displayed Select Set Mode and ch
26. n Pos 1 POS 3 TB1 1 L TA TB2 17 4 9 Kit 1 TB2 22 74 Kit 3 i x 61 Kit 3 64 Kit 3 72 Kit 3 TB1 8 TB1 9 10 Kit 1 or 27 8 Kit 1 or 3 72 Kit 3 81 Kit 30 E or Se 83 Kit 32 Tee 85 Kit 27 Kit 27 78 Kit 1 Se 17 59 Kit s 1 or 3 9 Kit 1 79 Kit 30 Figure 11 8 Components of case rear in units with 12 Al or 16 32 DI DO point capability 288 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Parts POSITION 4 ANALOG INPUT BOARD Figure 11 9 Module for Two Additional Analog Inputs 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 289 Parts 290 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Appendix Appendix A 1 Security Bypass Procedure Overview Your instrument has a security bypass code that allows you to enter secured areas of the product Use this bypass code if you have forgotten or lost the master and or operator security code Bypass procedure Table Appendix A 1 Security Bypass Procedure Step Action buttons to select the bypass code 783 When you are prompted for the master or operator security code use the Increment and Decrement 2 Press the Display button to display the forgotten master or operator code To return to the previous menu without entering the secured area press the Menu button To enter the secured area press Enter ATTENTION Remove this page for security
27. op EAT 0 5 mfd 1000V Relay 9 varistor i 2 f 220 E 3 solenoid ohms H 1 supply L 1 20780 Figure Appendix B 2 Transient Suppression in Inductive Coils Additional protection may be provided by adding an RC circuit in parallel with the MOV This consists of a 220 ohm resistor in series with a 0 5 microfarad 1000V capacitor The power rating of the resistor will depend on the voltage rating of the coil see Table Appendix B 3 Table Appendix B 3 Coil Voltage vs Resistor Voltage Rating Coil Voltage Resistor Voltage Rating 115V 1 4 Watt 230V 1 Watt 460V 3 Watt 550V 5 Watt Continued on next page 300 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Contacts When a contact interrupts an inductive load a certain amount of energy is stored in the load An MOV or RC circuit in parallel with the load provides a place where this energy may be dissipated However if there is no MOV or RC circuit the energy may create a visible electrical arc across the open contacts This in turn results in electrical noise as well as damage to the contacts One way to eliminate this arc is to connect a resistor and capacitor across the contacts see Figure Appendix B 3 A combination of 47 ohms and 0 1 microfarads 1000 Vdc is recommended for circuits up to 3 amps and 300 Vac For voltages above 2000 Vac an MOV across the contact
28. soak is used to describe a segment when the process value is made to stay constant In Figure 3 27 segments 1 3 and 5 are ramps while segments 2 and 4 are soaks PROCESS VALUE IN ENGINEERING UNITS Figure 3 27 Example Set Point Profile To force a process value to vary linearly with time at various rates within successive time intervals is the job of a set point profiler another class of function blocks available within the instrument Be advised that use of set point profilers is typically observed in thermal or heat treat applications For example being able to vary temperature in accordance with a set point profile is vital in the tempering of metal or ceramic parts Refer to the application of Figure 3 15 discussed at the beginning of this section This application dealt with controlling a furnace zone s temperature by means of a 4 to 20 mA gas valve actuator If the furnace zone temperature were to be manipulated so that it followed the ramps and soaks of a set point profile the first step would be to implement the function block diagram established in Figure 3 20 In general the control configuration that holds a process value to a local set point must be programmed and on line before allowing the process value to be characterized by a profile With regard to the application at hand a set point profiler function block programmed with a user defined set point profile may be brought into the configuration once the furnace zon
29. 1 When ON 1 no samples are taken and the output is 142 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features CEMS Rolling Average CEM Rolling Avg Outputs a rolling mean average CVn OV over the specified Average Period Average is updated every Frame Period thereafter Samples are taken at every scan cycle of the instrument except when Calibrate Hold is ON 1 Input Time between samples 1 machine scan cycle i INN lM Frame Period i lt gt Average Period lt First average oed vege s second average i avera 7 5 Third average Figure 4 17 CEMS Rolling Average Table 4 49 describes the CEMS Rolling Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 49 CEMS Rolling Average Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input to be averaged number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 ON discrete i 5 ON 1 average is reset to zero when 1 to OFF 0 average restarts TIME UNITS Seconds minutes hours or Time units of the averaging period days AVERAGE PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units per average period FRAME PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units per Frame Period Must divide evenly into
30. 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 291 Appendix 292 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Appendix BHow to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments B 1 Overview Guideline overview Products that incorporate digital technology provide recognized performance advantages over conventional analog instrumentation used for process control These advantages can result in better product uniformity and greater overall efficiency when used correctly There are however certain guidelines regarding installation and wiring which must be carefully followed in order to achieve this performance In addition to the traditional precaution of the separation of signal and power wiring in separate conduits other measures must be taken to minimize the effects of e EMI and r RFI on the operation of the equipment Otherwise if high level short duration noise spikes are permitted to enter the digital equipment the noise can be transferred into the system s logic networks and can be misinterpreted as signal data resulting in erroneous system operation and other unpredictable responses What s in this appendix 12 00 This appendix contains the following information Topic See Page Overview 293 Potential Noise Sources 294 Prevention Methods 295 Recommended Wiring Practices 296 Power Source Considerations 298 Noise Suppression at the Source 299 Ferrite
31. Loops are reset when Auto Cycle is reset and when the profile is reset Loops can contain other loops but cannot overlap Segment 1 gt gt Loop 1 Repeated segments From Segment 2 To Segment 3 Repeat Count 1 Segment 5 Figure 5 9 Example Of A Segment Loop Examples of valid loops Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Example of invalid overlapping loops Loop 1 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 1 LOOP TO SEGMENT 9 Loop 2 LOOP FROM SEGMENT 2 LOOP TO SEGMENT 10 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 193 Setpoint Profiler 5 3 Parameters that control a profile s execution Coordinating operation of multiple profilers In a multi profiler instrument the profiles in a program can be totally unrelated to each other that is you can give them different times and settings If you want the profilers to be coordinated you must configure each profiler that way For example if you want all your profilers to be started by the same signal you must configure each profiler with the same START parameter The Copy Block function in the Program menu lets you copy parameters from one profiler to another Holding mul
32. When unlike signal levels must cross either in trays or conduits they should cross at a 90 degree angle and at a maximum spacing Where it is not possible to provide spacing a grounded steel barrier or grid should be placed between the unlike levels at the crossover points Trays containing low level wiring should have solid bottoms and sides Tray covers must be used for complete shielding Tray cover contact with side rails must be positive and continuous to avoid high reluctance air gaps which impair shielding Trays for low level cables should be metal and solidly grounded Wires containing low level signals should not be routed near any of the following Contactors Motors Generators Radio transmitters and Wires carrying high current that is being switched on and off Use a 12 gage or heavier insulated stranded wire for the ground connection Attach it firmly to a proven good earth ground such as a metal stake driven into the ground All shields should be grounded at one end only preferably the instrument end VPR amp VRX User Manual 297 B 5 Power Source Considerations Operate within limits The AC power for the digital electronic equipment must be within the voltage and frequency limits specified for that equipment Attempts to operate outside the specified limits will result in no performance For those installations where the supply voltage will not stay within
33. e Todo el cableado debe realizarse de acuerdo con las normas el ctricas locales y debe ser realizado por personal experimentado e terminal de tierra debe ser conectado antes que cualquier otro cable y desconectado el ltimo e Se recomienda la instalaci n de un interruptor de la alimentaci n principal cerca del equipo DATOS ELECTRICOS DEL EQUIPO Tensi n de alimentaci n 85 a 265 V AC DC Frecuencia 50 60 Hz Potencia corriente 45 VA Fusible 2 A 250 AC DC CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES No operar con el instrumento en presencia de liquidos o gases inflamables La operaci n de cualquier equipo el ctrico en tal ambiente constituye un riesgo contra la seguridad Temperatura Ambiente 0 a 50 Almacenamiento 20 a 70 Humedad 10 a 90 RH sin condensados a 40 Vibraci n 5 15 Hz amplitud 1 mm 15 a 150 Hz acceleraci n 0 5 g INSTALACION DEL EQUIPO Este equipo debe ser montado en un panel para limitar al operador el acceso a los terminales traseros SAKERHETSFORESKRIFTER SW21 6047 For att reducera riskerna av elektriska chocker som kan orsaka personskador f lj alla s kerhetsf reskrifter i denna dokumentation Denna symbol varnar anv ndaren f r risk for elchock vid tillf llig tkomst av sp nningsf rande del Anslutning av skyddsjord Avsedd f r anslutning av elsysternets skyddsjordsledare S e Om utrustningen anv nds ett s dant s tt att det inte innefattas av tillverkarens
34. values por 1500 0 A ALARM 1 HIG A ALARM 1 HIGH Vertical Trend Vertical Trend Digital Horizontal Trend V TREND VTRNDDIG H TREND r ani LO T 1215 250000 T1 TEMP 7 2261 50 DEGF Ce A irs MK c TAG2 A ETZXEI wm VALUE3 WM D TAG4 Lj ws NM VALUES I 1 4 TAG6 pau VALUE6 L A ALARM1HIGH A ALARM THIGH A 1 HIGH Horizontal Trend Digital Horizontal Trend Bar Vertical Trend w 4 Bar HTRNDDIG HTRNDBAR VTRNDBAR ITAG1 VALUE1 DEGF 1115 1145 1215 2500 00 Eu EX Note Large case instruments contain 4 bars smaller instruments have 3 bars L L4 1 A ALARM 1 HIGH Horizontal Trend Bar HTRNDBAR Figure 6 3 Horizontal and Vertical Trend Displays 222 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts Prompt Definition SCROLL Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons to scroll the trend forward or backward in time Press Tab key to change to the next point on a multi point trend Press the Menu button to restore the Point Detail menu The trend display will remain at the time determined by the SCROLL Press the Display button to restore the original primary display and cancel the SCROLL SET HOLD Causes one point to remain displayed in the scoreboard Available for live trend only REL HOLD Before selecting SET HOLD press Point Detail to change the scoreboard to the desired
35. 0 8 0 4 0 002 0 003 18890 0073 800to 1800__ 427to 982 0 1 typical 1 0 0 5 10 002 0 003 18890 0074 1100 to 2300 594 to 1260 0 1 typical 1 2 0 6 0 002 0 003 18890 0035 1200to 2600 64910 1426 0 1 typical 1 4 0 7 0 002 0 003 18890 0412 1375 to 3000 747 to 1648 0 1 typical 1 6 0 9 0 002 0 003 18890 0075 1500 to 3300 816 to 1815 0 1 typical 1 8 1 0 0 002 0 003 18890 1729 1650 to 3600 899 to 1982 0 1 typical 0 9 1 0 0 002 0 003 18890 00643 1850to 4000 1010 to 2204 0 1 typical 2 2 1 2 0 002 0 003 18890 0216 2110to 4600 1155 to 2537 0 1 typical 3 5 1 4 0 002 0 003 18890 5423 2210to 5000 _ 121010 2760 0 1 typical 3 8 1 5 0 002 0 003 18890 0163 200to 1000 941 537 0 1 typical 0 8 4 0 002 0 003 18899 8814 34010 1800 17210 982 0 1 typical 1 4 81 0 002 0 003 18894 9014 752 to 2552 400 to 1400 0 1 typical 1 7 1 0 0 002 0 003 18894 0579 75210 2552 400to 1400 0 1 typical 1 7 1 0 0 002 0 003 Spectray 18885 1832 to 3452 1000 to 1900 0 1 typical 1 6 0 9 0 005 0 009 Spectray 18885 1 1292 to 2912 700 to 1600 0 1 typical 1 6 0 9 0 005 0 009 Spectray 18885 2 806 to 1400 430 to 760 0 1 typical 0 6 0 3 0 005 0 009 Spectray 18886 1833 to 3452 1001 to 1900 0 1 typical 1 6 0 9 0 005 0 009 Spectray 18886 1 1292 to 2912 700 to 1600 0 1 typical 1 6 0 9 0 021 0 037 18874 0578 75210 2552 400to 1400 0 1 typical 1 7 1 0 0 083 0 150 18875 0579 75210 2552 400to 14
36. 15 150 Hz Emitadxuvon 0 5 y ELKATAXTAXH EZOT IAIZMOY pov a auth 1 p ca oe TrAa oto va TreplopiZeTal rj Trp opaor rou xprjorr TOW DI SICUREZZA IT21 6047 Per ridurre i rischi di scariche elettriche che potrebbero causare alle persone seguire tutte le precauzioni circa la sicurezza indicate in questa documentazione Questo simbolo avverte del pericolo di scossa elettrica nelle aree in cui sono accessibili conduttori sotto tensione Terminale di protezione verso terra Previsto per il collegamento del conduttore di protezione verso terra del sistema di alimentazione OAS e Se lo strumento viene utilizzato in modo diverso dalla specifica del costruttore la protezione fornita dallo strumento pu essere diversa e Non sostituire alcun componente parte non specificato esplicitamente come ricambio dal vostro fornitore e Tutti i cablaggi devono essere in accordo con i regolamenti locali e devono essere eseguiti da personale esperto ed autorizzato e terminale di massa deve essere collegato prima di ogni altro filo e scollegato per ultimo e che sia presente un interruttore nell alimentazione principale accanto all apparecchio ALIMENTAZIONE APPARECCHIATURA Tensione di alimentazione Da 85 a 265 Vca cc Frequenza 50 60 Hz Potenza o corrente 45 VA Fusibile 2 A 250 CONDIZIONI AMBIENTALI Non far fu
37. 17 35 W x 318 26 12 53 H Covers 402 59 15 85 W x 280 16 11 03 H Used to cover existing instrument cutouts for Honeywell Class 112 SpeedoMax 250 2500 SpeedoMax W L 282 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Parts 1 Kit 28 2 Kit 28 2 Kit 4 57 Kit s 3 30 or 32 7 je gn pe Kit 1 Figure 11 2 cage removed from case along with sub bezel 3 and seal gasket 5 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 283 Parts SEE WIRING DIAGRAM 92 Kit 2 937 Kit 2 GREEN amp YELLOW WIRE BLACK WIRE RED WIRE 97 Kit 2 gt 98 Kit 2 96 Kit 2 PEE 95 Kit amp 2 2 Kit amp 2 94 Kit amp 2 WIRING DIAGRAM FOR REAR COVER ASSEMBLY Figure 11 3 Components of portable case 284 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Parts 2 ge gat 26 Kit 23 1 25 Kit 23 39 Kit s 21 13 Kit 23 9 Kit 23 31 Kit 23 14 Kit 23 9 Kit 22 9 Kit 23 PART OF DETAIL 6 ES Kit 23 Figure 11 4 Exploded view of VPR VRX100 display 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 285 Parts Figure 11 5 Exploded View of VRX150 Display 286 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Parts MODULE BOARD 63 Kit s 13 14 45 16 17 or 19 LARGE END MAIN BOARD d 2
38. 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 are sampled The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total in Trends 1 3 Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 HIGH RATE Seconds 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points ROLLOVER 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 ON OFF are sampled The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total in Trends 1 3 Select ON to continue gathering and storing data after the file becomes full The new data will replace the oldest data on the disk as it is collected No warning will be given Select OFF to stop storage of this data type when the disk space for it becomes full A DISK FULL message will then appear Data is buffered until a new disk is inserted and initialized SET DISPLAY LIMITS 172 OFF or number VPR amp VRX User Manual Enter upper and lower limit values for the trend display for each point If NONE then the trend will use the programmed limits for each point 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 71 Prompts For Storage Setup Of Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics continued HIGH RATE SELECTOR This discrete triggers the high storage rate when ON 1 SELECTORS and the low storage rate when OFF CHANGE WITH KEY This option enables disables storage rate changes from the Trend display Point Trend menu If YES storage Trend s high
39. AO e Drive control element s e Retransmit to another instrument e PV s e Remote setpoint s e Auxiliary input s to be recorded DI e Trigger events like remote operation e Remote selection of parameters DO e Alarm outputs e Eventoutputs e Control outputs ATTENTION Refer to Section B 4 for more details and recommended wiring practices VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation ATTENTION For CE Instruments The connection between protective earth ground TB1 Pin1 and Earth Ground for the Communications connection TB2 Pin 6 is essential for CE compliance with Communications This wire is installed at the factory be sure not to remove it 1 2 TB2 TB4 TB4 TB3A TX Se PO Alt A Li TX 8 DO an c d z L2 N DO cov 8 DO Al1 2 B DOI S S A 1241 RX 8 8 24N S S D Al3 A 1 S DO C 1 1 AI3 4 D AO24 9 Al4 A AO2 9 9 00 O Al5 c 4 TB3B only or D pi e B d TB3A and TB3B A04 See Table 2 5 D H 00 Al6 C For 24VDC Input Power L1 L2 N Figur
40. As new diagnostics occur beyond 50 the oldest will be dropped from the list Diagnostic messages are not automatically removed from the summary if the error condition is corrected The list must be deleted from the screen periodically by the operator as described under Delete Diagnostics Acknowledging Diagnostic Messages When a diagnostic occurs it must be acknowledged by the operator to stop its indicator from flashing See Table 7 7 Acknowledging a diagnostic only stops its indicator from flashing it does not correct the cause of the diagnostic You are not required to acknowledge a diagnostic The flashing can also be stopped if all diagnostics are erased using the DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS menu selection Table 7 7 Diagnostic Acknowledgment Procedure Step Action 1 Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from the main online menu Select DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS to display a list of diagnostics Unacknowledged diagnostics will be flashing Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button and a cursor will appear on the display Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to position the cursor on a flashing diagnostic and press Enter to acknowledge the diagnostic The flashing will stop and the cursor will disappear If you do not press any button for a period of 5 seconds the cursor will disappear This is a safety feature because while the cursor is visible on the display the display is temporarily disabled and a new diagnostic will not be shown
41. E 4DCSolid State Relays 3 Event Inputs F 4AC Solid State Relays 3 Event Inputs G 4Mechanical Relays 3 Event Inputs H 8Discrete Inputs 8 Open Collector Outputs J_ 16 Discrete Inputs 16 Open Collector Outputs X 8Discrete Inputs 24 Open Collector Outputs Analog Outputs 0 None 1 1 Analog Output 2 2Analog Outputs 3 SAnalog Outputs 4 4Analog Outputs Control Loops None 1 Control Loop 2 Control Loops 3 Control Loops 4 Control Loops 1 Control Loop 1 Setpoint Profiler 2 Control Loops 2 Setpoint Profilers 3 Control Loops 3 Setpoint Profilers 2 Control Loops 1 Setpoint Profiler 4 Control Loops 4 Setpoint Profilers 3 Control Loops 1 Setpoint Profiler 4 Control Loops 1 Setpoint Profiler _ 4 Control Loops 2 Setpoint Profilers _ B C oR Standard 8 CVs Advanced Math Package 32 CVs N Totalizers __0 None __3 3 Totalizers __6 6 Totalizers C 12 Totalizers Data Storage 0 _E English F French G German S Spanish Taggin 0 None L Linen __S____ Stainless Steel __B___ Certificate of Conformance F3391 __C___ Custom Calibration Test Report M Linen Tag amp Certificate of Conformance N Linen Tag amp Calibration Test Report __T___ 5 5 Tag amp Certificate of Conformance __U____ S S Tag amp Calibration Test Report Approvals 0 CSA Approval NRT c
42. EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME ALARM SAMPLES See Table 4 71 and Table 4 74 for descriptions Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first alarm occurs or when the first alarm occurs after a batch start Event storage consists of a complete log of events including the event title time of occurrence the status or value after the change and the batch identification number if present When event storage is running loop and instrument mode events are always stored discrete input and output events are stored only if first enabled under those items program menus see Sections 4 10 and 4 11 Table 4 72 Stored Events Event title Event status value Setpoint choice SP1 SP2 Control action Forward Reverse Tuning Set Set 1 Set 2 Instrument Mode Online Program Maint Control Mode Auto Manual RMan Setpoint 1 SP1 s value Setpoint 2 SP2 s value Control Output Loop s output value Discrete Input On Off Discrete Output On Off Event storage setup is done with the following parameters STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME EVENT SAMPLES See Table 4 71 and Table 4 74 for parameter descriptions Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first event occurs or when the first event occurs after a batch start Barcode data is also stored in the event file VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Fea
43. Enter up to 8 inputs to be averaged number 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 141 Programming Function Blocks and Features CEMS Block Average Outputs a block mean average CVn OV over the specified Average Period The average is calculated from input samples taken at equally spaced Sample Periods All samples are discarded at the end of the Average Period and the Average Period begins again Samples are ignored when Calibrate Hold is ON 1 After the Average Period the new average is calculated using only the samples taken before and after the Hold If no valid samples are taken the output maintains its previous value Table 4 48 describes the CEMS Block Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 48 CEMS Block Average Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input to be averaged number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 When discrete is ON 1 average is reset to zero when 1 ON 1 to OFF 0 average restarts TIME UNITS SECONDS MINUTES Time units of the averaging period HOURS or DAYS AVERAGE PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units per average period SAMPLE PERIOD OFF or number Number of time units between samples Must divide evenly into Average Period held CALIBRATE HOLD OFF discrete parameter 0
44. Events middle of ramp segment 192 exponential notation how to display 80 Feedback 136 First Good 108 First Time Start 261 floppy disk initializing 235 installing 234 remove or install 46 Floppy drive VRX150 access 47 Force DI DO Points 244 Format Disk 179 Frequency 260 Frequently used programming parameters 80 Front access 46 function block interconnecting 54 parameter code format 55 programming a function block parameter 57 programming input parameters 54 Function block components 50 defined 48 Function block parameter 51 Input parameter 50 Parameter code 51 Parameter code designators 52 G General Wiring Recommendations 24 306 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Index Hold 87 88 holding profile 214 How data is stored 235 How To Program Function Blocks and Features 77 I Impulse Time 101 Initialization errors 236 Initializing Disk 181 Initializing disk for data storage 235 Installation 15 Interacting With Primary Displays 221 K keyboard how to connect 46 Keyboard connector VRX150 access 47 labels 82 Lag Time Constant 88 language select 169 load program 212 Location 16 logarithmic display 156 loop changing between Auto amp Manual modes 227 changing output 228 changing setpoint value 228 changing tuning parameters 228 Loop Characteristics 89 Loop displays interacting with 227 Loop error indicators 275 Loop Menu Items 93 Main
45. HONEYWELL S p A Via P Gobetti 2 b 20063 Cernusco Sul Naviglio ITALY Tel 39 02 92146 1 MEXICO HONEYWELL S A DE CV AV CONSTITUYENTES 900 COL LOMAS ALTAS 11950 MEXICO CITY MEXICO Tel 52 5 259 1966 THE NETHERLANDS HONEYWELL BV Laaderhoogtweg 18 1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO THE NETHERLANDS Tel 31 20 56 56 911 HSM8 HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS NORWAY HONEYWELL A S Askerveien 61 PO Box 263 N 1371 ASKER NORWAY Tel 47 66 76 20 00 POLAND HONEYWELL Sp z o o UI Domainewksa 41 02 672 WARSAW POLAND Tel 48 22 606 09 00 PORTUGAL HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA Edificio Suecia II Av do Forte nr 3 Piso 3 2795 CARNAXIDE PORTUGAL Tel 351 1 424 50 00 REPUBLIC OF IRELAND HONEYWELL Unit 1 Robinhood Business Park Robinhood Road DUBLIN 22 Republic of Ireland Tel 353 1 4565944 REP OF SINGAPORE HONEYWELL PTE LTD BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD 06 01 CHAI CHEE IND PARK 1646 SINGAPORE REP OF SINGAPORE Tel 65 2490 100 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA HONEYWELL Southern Africa PO BOX 138 Milnerton 7435 REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA Tel 27 11 805 12 01 ROMANIA HONEYWELL Office Bucharest 147 Aurel Vlaicu Str Sc Z Apt 61 62 R 72921 Bucharest ROMANIA Tel 40 1 211 00 76 211 79 43 RUSSIA HONEYWELL INC 4 Floor Administrative Builiding of AO Luzhniki Management 24 Luzhniki 119048 Moscow RUSSIA Tel 7 095 796 98 00 01 SLOVAKIA HONEYWELL
46. See Initializing Disk below 180 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Initializing Disk Initialization activates storage and creates a file for each data set Trends 1 3 alarms events unit data diagnostics Filename extensions are as follows Table 4 78 Filename Extensions Of Data Storage Types Bh Trend 1 data LNT Trend 2 data LNT Alarms LNA Events LNE Unit Data LNU Diagnostics LND Insert the disk If you are using a 120MB Zip disk it is recommended you first preinitialize the disk with DSU Select INITIALIZE DISK from DATA STORAGE Select USE NEW SCHEDULES to store the new storage schedules If you choose USE CURRENT SCHEDULES the disk is initialized using the current setup the setup from the previous initialization not the new setup Typically the operator will choose USE CURRENT SCHEDULES to continue storing the same setup onto a new disk IMPORTANT Initialization deletes any data already on the disk therefore you are prompted to press Enter to proceed or to press Menu to abort When the INITIALIZING DISK message disappears initialization has completed If initialization fails see Table 6 8 for message descriptions 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 181 Programming Function Blocks and Features 182 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler 5 Setpoint Profiler W
47. The following lists Honeywell s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers Honeywell Organization WWW Address URL Corporate http www honeywell com Sensing and Control http www honeywell com sensing International http www honeywell com Business global asp Telephone Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below Organization Phone Number United States and Canada Honeywell 1 800 423 9883 Tech Support 1 888 423 9883 Q amp A Faxback TACFACS 1 800 525 7439 Service Asia Pacific Honeywell Asia Pacific 852 2829 8298 Hong Kong Europe Honeywell PACE Brussels Belgium 32 2 728 2111 Latin America Honeywell Sunrise Florida U S A 854 845 2600 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual Symbol Definitions The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions Symbol Definition This DANGER symbol indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if DANGER not avoided will result in death or serious injury This WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if WARNING avoided could result in death or serious injury This CAUTION symbol may be present on Control Product instrumentation CAUTION and literature If present on a product the user must consult the appropriate part of the accompanying product literature for more information This CAUTION symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation
48. The instrument will not store data to disk if its front bezel is open A BEZEL OPEN message will appear on all displays and process and diagnostic data meant for disk storage will be kept in the instrument s memory buffer Data corruption and loss are therefore not issues if someone walks up to the instrument and simply removes the Data Storage disk Note that when performing Data Storage the instrument writes to the disk only once a minute This ensures that the latest data is always on disk In the event of a power failure at most one minute of data would be lost 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 75 Programming and Operating Concepts Performing Configuration and Calibration Storage Configuration and calibration storage is performed through a Program mode MAIN MENU prompt LOAD STORE CONFIG Here a file containing the instrument s programming and configuration is created by executing a routine called STORE CONFIG TO DISK Similarly creation of an instrument calibration file is performed via a STORE CALIB TO DISK menu choice Configuration and calibration files will be distinguished by eight character names that you will specify The applicable file extensions for both file types are shown in Table 3 13 Table 3 13 Configuration and Calibration Filename Extensions Configuration LNC Calibration LNL Note that an instrument configuration file may also be created and stored to disk using optionally purchased SCF Configurati
49. and Enter buttons to verify the ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode sub level menus detailed in Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 and Figure 3 8 The sub level menus shown represent only the first sub level below each mode s MAIN MENU There are several sub level menus not indicated here that run further below each first sub level Note that once inside of a sub level menu regardless of how deep the level is a press of the Menu button will return you to the next highest menu level In case you get lost within a mode s sub level menu keep pressing the Menu button until the ON LINE PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU appears on screen Be advised that Figure 3 5 through Figure 3 8 comprise a basic road map for navigating the menus within the programmer s three modes Sections 4 through 8 of this manual will provide detailed descriptions of each menu choice and complete guides through all the sub level menus that run below the levels indicated in these figures ATTENTION The following menus contain all possible options Your instrument may not include some items shown here MAIN MENU ONLINE SETMODE ONLINE DATA STORAGE REPLAY FROM SET UP NEW REVIEW CURRENT DATA STORAGE HPJENABLE STORAGE STATUS H gt DISK H INITIALIZE DISK LIST DISK FILES H gt scuepuies P scHEDULES Y BATCH NUMBER 4 BATCHSTATE waRNINGLEVEL FORMAT DISK DISPLAY ALARM Lal DISPLAY ALARM DISPLAY DI
50. assigned to the A1 A2 and A3 outputs respectively Enter a range for A1 s input Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 30 for high limit When input is between these values A1 output is scaled between OUT 1 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 1 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A1 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A1 output Enter a range for A2 s input Defaults are 30 for low limit amp 60 for high limit When input is between these values A2 output is scaled between OUT 2 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 2 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A2 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A2 output Enter a range for A3 s input Defaults are 60 for low limit amp 90 for high limit When input is between these values A3 output is scaled between OUT 3 OUT LO LIM amp OUT 3 OUT HI LIM Enter OFF or a range for A3 s output Defaults are 0 for low limit amp 100 for high limit Scales A3 output VPR amp VRX User Manual 135 Programming Function Blocks and Features Standard Splitter Output STD SPLITTER This function can be used for heat cool applications It is a deadband based splitter that divides a Split loop s output 100 to 100 into two outputs CVn A1 and CVn A2 both of which are zero when the loop output is zero Figure 4 16 A deadband provides a range of loop output within which both split outputs remain at zero For overlapped outputs use Advanced Spl
51. 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 167 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 24 Scan Rate Scan rate is the time required to measure inputs execute function blocks AL Loops AO DI DO CV etc and update outputs It is also known as the machine cycle scan cycle and update rate The Scan Rate prompt lets you set the scan rate of the instrument to a value slower than the maximum rate allowed by the hardware The hardware will determine the default scan rate Allowable entries are 250 milliseconds 500 milliseconds or 1 second 250 ms rate is only available on 2 input units We recommend the following scan rates for the following configurations Table 4 69 Suggested Scan Rates 250 ms 500 ms 1 second lt 2 inputs lt 8 inputs gt 12 inputs 2 control loop lt 4 control loops 2 4 control loops 2 profiler lt 4 profilers 2 4 profilers lt 12 CVs lt 24 CVs gt 32 CVs NOTE These are suggested scan rates In general if your instrument responds too slowly use a slower higher scan rate You can use a faster lower scan rate than suggested here but be aware of possible sluggish display and button response time 168 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 25 Select Language SELECT LANGUAGE on the Main Program Menu changes the instrument s language to e English e Spanish e German e French e talian 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 169 Prog
52. 2 5hrs 7 5 hrs 15 hrs 1d 6h 2d 12h 5 days 10 days 30d 1h 8 27 2 2hrs 6 7 hrs 13 hrs 1d 2h 2d 5h 4d 10h 8d 21h 26d 17h 9 24 2 hrs 6 hrs 12 hrs 24 hrs 2 days 4 days 8 days 24d 1h 10 22 1 8hrs 5 5 hrs 10 hrs 21 hrs 1d 18h 3d 15h 7d 6h 21d 20h 11 20 1 7hrs 5hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 20d 1h 12 19 1 5hrs 4 6 hrs 9 hrs 18 hrs 1d 13h 3d 2h 6d 4h 18d 12h 3 Trend Groups Enabled Points of screen Time base time width per screen widths 5 min 15 30min 1 hr 2 hrs 4 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 1 80 6 7hrs 20hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 26d 17h 80d 4h 2 53 45hrs 13 4hrs 1d 2h 2d 5h 4d 10h 8d 21h 17d 19h 53d 10h 3 40 3 3hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 13d 8h 40d 2h 4 32 2 7hrs 8hrs 16 hrs 1d 8h 2d 16h 5d 8h 10 16h 21d8h 5 27 2 2hrs 6 7 hrs 13 4hrs 1d 2h 2d 5h 4d 10h 8d 21h 26d 17h 6 23 1 9hrs 5 7 hrs 11 5hrs 22 hrs 1d 21h 3d 19h 7d 15h 22d 21h 7 20 1 7hrs 5hrs 10 hrs 20 hrs 1d 16h 3d 8h 6d 16h 20d 1h 8 18 1 5hrs 4 5 hrs 8 9 hrs 17 8hrs 1d 11h 2d 23h 22h 17d 19h 9 16 1 3hrs 4hrs 8 hrs 16 hrs 1d 8h 2d 16h 5d 8h 10d 16h 10 15 1 2hrs 3 6 hrs 7 3 hrs 14 hrs 1d 5h 2d 10h 4d 20h 14d 13h 11 13 11 hrs 3 3 hrs 6 7 hrs 13 hrs 1d 2h 2d 5h 4d 10h 13d 8h 12 12 1 hr 3 hrs 6 hrs 12 hrs 24 hrs 2d 1h 4d 2h 12d 6h 158 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Set Up Trend 2 Set up a second group of up to 6 or 12 points that will be displayed as a horizo
53. 270 xiv VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Figure 11 1 Panel Mounting Hardware Of Instrument esses nennen rennen 283 Figure 11 2 Card cage removed from case along with sub bezel 3 and seal gasket 5 283 Figure 11 3 Components of portable case se tette tie TESES RP 284 Figure 11 4 Exploded view of VPR VRX100 display nennen en eene ener nnne 285 Figure 11 5 Exploded View of VRX150 Display eese eene nnne 286 Figure 11 6 Exploded view of instrument card cage nennen nene 287 Figure 11 7 Components of case rear in units with 3 DI 4 DO or 6 DO point 288 Figure 11 8 Components of case rear in units with 12 AI or 16 32 DI DO point capability 288 Figure 11 9 Module for Two Additional Analog Inputs eese eene nennen 289 Figure Appendix B 1 Transformer for Digital Equipment sese enne eene nen 298 Figure Appendix B 2 Transient Suppression in Inductive Coils essent 300 Figure Appendix B 3 Contact Noise Suppression 301 Figure Appendix B 4 DC Load Noise Suppression eese 302 Figure Appendix B 5 Ferrite Clamp Installation
54. 28 A OR B ANDC A B C Result 0 0 0 0 lo lo E 0 0 1 0 0 lo E E 1 1 0 0 0 E lo E 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 E 1 Example equation using iteration The equation A B O computes the result of Input A OR Input B from current machine cycle AND Input A OR Input B from previous machine cycle Table 4 29 shows some possible results of this equation Table 4 29 Results of Logic Equation Using Iteration Input A current Input B current Input A previous Input B previous Result OR AND OR 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 120 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Inverter The output CVn OS is the logical inverse of the input parameter Table 4 30 describes the Inverter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 30 Inverter Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Input source to be inverted 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 121 Programming Function Blocks and Features BCD Converts up to 8 discrete inputs binary coded decimal into an unsigned integer and output the integer as CVn OV For example 00000100 4 On the VPR when the enable is triggered the setpoint program specified by the value of CVn OV is copied from internal storage to the Profile function block s where the profile s can be programmed or executed Table 4 31 describes
55. 4 54 describes the display setup procedure Table 4 54 Display Setup Procedure 1 Select Program Displays from the Program mode menu displayed For each display format desired trend bar graph panel display unit data specify points to be 3 Assign up to 10 displays to the Display button Set Up Trend 1 Table 4 55 describes the trend display setup procedure Table 4 55 Set Up Trend 1 Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition ENABLE YES NO Select YES to enable storage of this group of points Enabled trends are stored in a temporary buffer and can be scrolled back in time Select NO to disable storage and scrolling of this group of points POINT 1 POINT 6 Analog or discrete Select up to 6 12 analog or discrete points to be displayed VPR100 VRX100 parameters as a vertical or horizontal trend Trends of discrete points will show a value of 1 when ON and 0 when OFF POINT 1 POINT 12 VRX150 NORMAL TIME 5 15 30 minutes or 1 2 4 Enter the trend display time base for Normal typically slow BASE 8 24 hours 7 31 days speed The time base is the time period shown for one full Equivalent paper chart screen speeds are listed in Table 4 56 ALT TIME BASE 5 15 30 minutes or 1 2 4 Enter the trend display time base for Alternate typically fast 8 24 hours 7 31 days speed The time base is the time period shown for one full Equivalent paper chart screen speeds
56. 43 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 6 Text Entry From External Sources QWERTY keyboard To use a keyboard to enter text such as labels numbers and equations connect an AT Qwerty keyboard to the mini DIN connector with an adapter part No 104286 See section 3 7 on how to open the front bezel to access the mini DIN connector See Table 3 2 for key functions The instrument s cursor must on the text to be changed on the right side of the display before you type in the new text Press Enter to accept the changes or press Menu to reject the changes Table 3 2 QWERTY Key Equivalents Button Name QWERTY key Function Menu ESC e Exits prompt or menu without saving changes e Changes from online display to online menu Up T e Scrolls up a menu or list Amow Previous Down e Scrolls down a menu or list Amow Next Left Arrow lt e Increments the value of the selected field Enter Enter J e Selects menu item to change it e Saves changes made Display F4 e Changes to online mode and shows online displays e Exits Point Details menu Display 1 Accesses Display 1 Gotb m e Toggles Loop between Automatic and Manual Auto Manual A e On VRX150 without control accesses Display 2 Tab e Moves cursor around displays e Accesses Point Details menu Continued 44 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 2 QWERTY
57. 9 7 12 00 Program Profiler isien oee reteo nia oiae EEEE EEE KEE SA ca cecbeoese 201 beam eee a et ae ais 202 Edit Profile Prompts Get ee tur ORDER ERES 204 Edit Segments Prompts en eet e i p e ero eoe e eer 207 How Profiles Are Stored In Memory VPR100 VRX150 only eene 209 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Online Menu VPR100 VRX150 210 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Any Profiler Display 50 210 How Profiles Stored On Disks nino eR yit 211 Disk Program Capacity ee tA ote ERE GR eee IRI t EO Rie e ee AT 211 Procedure To Load A Program From 15 212 Profiler Starting Procedure ete peo BRE e EN OEE E PEREI E eS SEEE R ston dienes 213 Profiler Hold Procedute 5 optet e tty ina oe deti eee cef tede i eld pde 214 Profiler Reset Procedure ete Up t UE ESPERE EE E RE e ier 214 Profiler Advance Procedure eee E e teet ee e doses eee EEE 215 Profiler Shutdown Procedure snieni te rper ehe ED ERE e Doe ENS bre 215 Eyent Vaewing Procedut S e o Oboe m ee iin i pP Uere ertum 216 Details Viewing Procedure c teu es
58. 9 Access to Connector and Floppy Drive VPR100 amp VRX100 46 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts VRX150 Access 12 00 To access the floppy disk drive or the keyboard connector on the VRX150 see Figure 3 10 Honeywell VALUE1 DEG F 11 45 1235 2500 00 Barcode Reader QWERTY Keyboard Connector To access slide cover to left Floppy disk drive To access open at top Figure 3 10 Access To Connector and Floppy Drive VRX150 VPR amp VRX User Manual 47 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 8 Definition of Function Blocks Definition A function block is a unit of software that performs a set of operations on its input parameters and function block parameters and produces output parameters These output parameters can be programmed as inputs to other function blocks whose output parameters can be programmed as inputs to other function blocks and so on By programming all desired function blocks input parameters and function block parameters you configure the instrument to measure and control your process Types of function blocks Each function block performs a set of operations which fulfills a unique purpose For example the Analog Input function blocks processes the analog input data the alarm function block processes alarms and so on Table 3 4 describes each function block So
59. 93 Button functions 39 Byte order 165 C Calculated Value Advanced Splitter Output 134 BCD 122 CEMS Block Average 142 CEMS Rolling Average 143 Compare 109 Counter 113 Free Form Logic 119 Free Form Math 115 Function Generator 124 Interval Timer 126 Inverter 121 Logic 117 Mass Flow with Square Root 129 Math 114 Multiple Average 141 Peak Picking 107 Periodic Timer 127 Relative Humidity 132 Scaling 137 Signal Clamp 138 Signal Select 108 Single Point Block Average 139 Single Point Rolling Average 140 Standard Splitter Output 136 Sterilization 133 calculated values program 106 Calculated Values 89 Calibrate Analog Outputs 258 EMF Inputs 257 Calibrating RTD Inputs 258 CAT 89 100 101 CAT Calibration 258 CAT VAT changing switch settings 267 circuit card replacement 265 clock set 166 Cold Start 261 comm link setting termination jumper 270 Communications 29 Byte order 165 Update value from remote host 149 communications serial program 165 Constant Destination 150 edit 244 Program 149 Control loop errors 275 pretune 250 tuning 247 Control Loop Programming Structure 89 control loops program 89 Copy Block 151 Custom algorithm prompts 88 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 305 Index D DAT 89 100 Data Entry 244 Data Entry From External Sources 44 Data Storage 234 Allocate Storage 177 Batch Control 179 current storage setup 236 Enable stor
60. Average Period CALIBRATE HOLD OFF discrete parameter 0 When ON 1 no samples are taken and the output is 1 held 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 143 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 13 Program Alarms You can program an alarm to be triggered by any extreme input value To program alarms select PROGRAM ALARMS on the Main Program Menu Select an alarm to program REFERENCE When an alarm occurs it produces an output pulse which can be configured to trigger a discrete output such as a relay Refer to Section 4 11 for instructions Table 4 50 describes the Alarm prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 50 Alarm Prompts Prompt ON STATE OFF STATE Range Selections See Table 4 3 for choices Definition Enter labels for on and off states of alarm number COMPARE POINT OFF analog parameter number DEV type only It is the point against which the input point is compared The difference between the input point and the compare point is the value which is measured against the ALARM ACTION HIGH Alarm when input value gt setpoint value LOW Alarm when input value setpoint value DEV Deviation Alarm when input value deviates above or below compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value LDEV Low Deviation Alarm when input value deviates below compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value HDEV High Deviation Alarm when in
61. Data can be directed to various display formats stored on disk or read from an optional serial communications link Analog and discrete data can be displayed in trend or tabular format Viewed data can be either live real time inputs or historical retrieved from disk Flexible modular design and several options makes this instrument adaptable to nearly any industrial application Honeywell Figure 1 1 VPR100 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 1 Introduction 1 3 VRX100 Overview The Honeywell VRX100 Video Recorder Figure 1 2 and Figure 1 3 is a multipoint video recorder that does more than just process data recording It offers display versatility flexible data storage dual loop control and advanced math functions This integration of several functions within the same instrument eliminates the need for multiple devices and reduces installation costs The instrument features a high resolution LCD 139 7 mm 5 5 display capable of displaying up to 16 different colors simultaneously The front panel is hinged to allow access to a 1 44MB or optional 120MB or Zip disk drive and a connector for a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader for easy labeling of parameters Twelve panel keys control all functions of the instrument including configuration The instrument will accept thermocouple RTD pyrometer milliamp millivolt and volt inputs Up to eight analog outputs are available for retransmission or control
62. If one and only one input is ON Result Input A is OFF 0 and Input ON 1 is ON B is ON 1 RESET SET FF Rising edge of Input A turns Result Input A is ON 1 ON 1 ON Reset Set Flip Flop OFF 0 Rising edge of Input B resets Result Input A is OFF 0 and Input B is ON 1 Reset Set FF Input A Input B Toggle Flip Flop Rising edge of Input Input A changes from A inverts Result OFF 0 to ON 1 rising edge TOGGLE FF ON 1 if it was OFF 0 or OFF 0 if it was ON 1 Input A changes from unchanged ON 1 to OFF 0 falling edge Toggle Flip Flop Input A LI Rising edge of Input A turns Result ON Input A is ON 1 for any for one machine scan cycle length of time ONE SHOT ON 1 for 1 scan cycle of the instrument then OFF 0 One Shot Input A Result PASS Passes Input A s state unchanged to Input A changes state same as Input A CONDITION TYPE 118 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Free Form Logic Lets you enter up to 64 characters as a custom logic equation EQ containing inputs and logical operators The result of this equation is called Result Result is then processed according to the specified condition type and condition time The final output is CVn OS See Figure 4 7 Inputs 1
63. If there are more flashing diagnostics press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to restore the cursor Display All Analogs Displays current value of all analog points in the instrument These include all analog I O loops calculated values totalizers and system parameters Only those points that have been programmed will be displayed Display All Discretes Displays current status of all discrete points in the instrument These include all discrete I O alarms loops calculated values totalizers and system parameters Only those points that have been programmed will be displayed 242 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Delete All Diagnostics A diagnostic is not automatically cleared from the summary when the error has been found and corrected Table 7 8 gives the procedure for deleting the diagnostics Table 7 8 Delete All Diagnostics Procedure 1 Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from the Main On Line Menu 2 Select DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS to delete all diagnostics from the summary 3 Press Menu or Display buttons to exit the menu Product Information Select this item to display the logo screen which includes the product identification software version number part number of the PROM and serial number 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 243 Online Operation Using Menus 7 5 Data Entry Data Entry lets you enter or revise data online Choices available depend on installed opti
64. Input The output CVn A2 is the Time Remaining Tr at the current temperature to achieve Fa and is calculated as follows Fa Fo Tr 1 QT rez The calculation will be reset and the Fp value will remain at zero while the Reset Input is ON 1 The calculation will resume when the Reset Input goes OFF 0 again Table 4 40 describes the Sterilization prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 40 Sterilization Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 Reset input 1 TEMP INPUT OFF analog parameter Measured temperature in degrees C number REFERENCE TEMP OFF analog parameter Reference temperature number TEMP CONSTANT OFF analog parameter Temperature constant Z number DESIRED FO OFF analog parameter Desired Fg number 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 133 Programming Function Blocks and Features Advanced Splitter Output ADV SPLITTER This function can be used for heat cool applications It splits an input into 3 independently scaled outputs CVn AI CVn A2 and CVn_A3 Figure 4 14 For each output when the input is between IN LO LIM and IN HI LIM the output is scaled between the OUT LO LIM and OUT HI LIM Each output holds its OUT LO LIM value when the input the IN LO LIM value for that outpu
65. Key Equivalents continued HOLD or RESET H 2 5 5 or Button Name QWERTY key Function Start or F1 F5 Initiates a discrete action programmed STARTI to this key such as Starting a Setpoint or Profile or resetting a totalizer Hold or F2 F6 Initiates a discrete action programmed Reset or F3 to this key such as Holding a Setpoint Profile or resetting a totalizer F7 Initiates a discrete action programmed to this key such as Resetting a Setpoint Profile or resetting a totalizer ASCII barcode reader To enter text such as labels numbers and equations with a barcode reader connect the barcode reader to the min DIN connector with an adapter part No 104286 The instrument buttons remain functional See section 3 7 on how to open the front bezel to access the mini DIN connector To enter labels the instrument s cursor must be on the text to be changed on the right side of the display before you scan in the new text from the barcode Press Enter to accept the changes or press Menu to reject the changes The barcode reader may also be used on the instrument trend screens to enter text data that will be stored as a time stamped event The ASCII data is split up into three fields e Description e Tag State 16 characters 7 characters 6 characters The first 16 characters will go into the description field The next 7 into the tag field and so on This data will be time stam
66. MOVED Loop was in manual mode and loop s output value changed Repeat pretune PTA SP MOVED Loop was in automatic mode and the setpoint value changed Repeat pretune pretune PTA LOOP NOT CFG Loop is not configured Configure loop before repeating pretune PTA LOOP OS Loop is out of service Fix loop before repeating PTA BAD STEP SIZ Step size is turned off Set step size to a value before repeating pretune See Table 7 11 PTA ONOFF LOOP Cannot pretune an on off type loop PTA BAD SN RATIO Increase step size See Table 7 11 PTA BAD OSC Repeat pretune with smaller gain or proportional band in loop PTA BAD ID VALUE Increase step size See Table 7 11 PTA DB ACCESS Unknown hardware problem Consult service PTA TASK FAIL Unknown hardware problem Consult service 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 253 Online Operation Using Menus 7 8 Review Programming This item is visible only if enabled under Enable Features in the Program mode Select this item to see how the instrument is configured You can view all Program mode menus as if you were in Program mode but you cannot change anything 254 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Maintenance 8 Maintenance 8 1 Overview 12 00 This section includes information on maintenance through the Maintenance Mode menu using some off line utility programs and diagnostics procedures To avoid voiding the warranty con
67. Module Kit 19 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51404680 502 VRX VPR100 Miscellaneous Display Kit 23 in Figure 11 4 11 6 Hardware Kit and keyboards 51404909 502 VRX150 Miscellaneous Display Hardware Kit Figure 11 5 51197816 501 Front Plane Replacement Kit Kit 24 in Figure 11 6 51197819 501 Miscellaneous Hardware Kit Kit 27 in Figures 11 6 11 7 11 8 51197818 501 Floppy Disk Drive Replacement Kit Kit 26 in Figure 11 6 51197820 501 Instrument Panel Mounting Hardware Kit Kit 28 in Figure 11 1 51309456 501 16 Point DI DO Printed Circuit Assembly Kit 29 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51404540 501 12 Point Al 16 Point DI DO Back Plane Kit 30 in Figure 11 8 Replacement Kit 51309456 502 32 Point DI DO Printed Circuit Assembly Kit 31 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51404684 501 32 Point DI DO Back Plane Replacement Kit Kit 32 in Figure 11 8 51404897 501 Rear terminal cover n a Covers all rear terminals of all instruments 51404893 501 Mounting Adapter Plate n a Dimensions mm in Outside 360 68 14 2 W x 318 26 12 53 H Covers 322 58 12 7 W x 280 16 11 03 H Used to cover existing instrument cutouts for Honeywell Class 111 SpeedoMax 165 1650 SpeedoMax DPR180 DPR250 Yokogawa Micro R 180 1800 HR 2400 2500 Chessell 4180 4250 51404893 502 Mounting Adapter Plate n a Dimensions mm in Outside 440 69
68. Programming Function Blocks and Features Function Generator This CV type can be used to characterize a valve Figure 4 9 or an input signal Figure 4 10 You enter a custom curve of up to 19 segments 20 X Y coordinates The input is compared with the X values and its corresponding Y value becomes the output CVn OV Interpolation between coordinates is straight line See Figure 4 8 If the input value is outside the range of X values the nearest X value is used the output will be clamped to the corresponding Y value and the displayed output value will flash Y6 Y5 Y3 Y4 Y1 Y2 ee A X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 Figure 4 8 Function Generator Curve Table 4 33 describes the Function Generator prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 33 Function Generator Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s lower display limit Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds this limit Default value is Y1 value RANGE HIGH OFF or number Enter the output s lower display limit Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds this limit Default value is Y1 value INPUT OFF analog parameter number This value will be compared with the X values of the curve The corresponding Y value will be the CV output X1 Y1 X2 Y2 X20 OFF or number Y20 coordinates X values must increase as Xn incr
69. RATE 1 SP INC SLEW RESETH1 RATE 1 RATE RATE LIMIT PROP PROP PROP SP DEC SLEW RATE 1 PROP PROP PROP BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 LIMIT BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 SP HIGH LIMIT PROP RESET 2 RESET 2 RESET 2 BAND 2 GAIN 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 SP LOW LIMIT RESET 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 RATE 2 MANUAL RESET MANUAL RESET MANUAL RESET PV TRACKING RATE 2 MANUAL RESET MANUAL RESET MANUAL RESET SP1 TRACKING APPROACH APPROACH HYSTERESIS MANUAL RESET SETPOINT H APPROACH APPROACH HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH SETPOINT 1 APPROACH LOW APPROACH LOW MANUAL OFF SP1 TRACKING SETPOINT 2 APPROACH LOW APPROACH LOW SETPOINT 2 SP1 TRACKING SP1 TRACKING INTERACTIVE SETPOINT 1 SP INC SLEW SP1 TRACKING SP1 TRACKING LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 1 RESET LIMIT SETPOINT 2 SP DEC SLEW SETPOINT 1 SETPOINT 1 LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT SETPOINT 2 SETPOINT 2 LATCHING SP INC SLEW SP HIGH LIMIT SP INC SLEW SETPOINT 2 LIMIT LIMIT SUPPRESS SP INC SLEW SP INC SLEW SP DEC SLEW SP LOW LIMIT SP DEC SLEW SP INC SLEW OVERSHOOT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT PV TRACKING SP DEC SLEW SP DEC SLEW SP HIGH LIMIT SOFT PID SP HIGH LIMIT SP DEC SLEW LIMIT LIMIT LIMIT FEEDBACK SP HIGH LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT FEEDBACK SP LOW LIMIT SP HIGH LIMIT INTERACTIVE SP LOW LIMIT SP LOW LIMIT SUPPRESS FEEDFORWARD RATIO SETPOINT SP LOW LIMIT OVERSHOOT RESET LIMIT SUPPRESS SUPPRESS SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD RATIO BIAS SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT OVER
70. Select YES or NO This determines whether or not some overshoot is acceptable in the pretune specified tuning continued 250 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 11 Pretune STOPPED Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition OUTPUT SIZE 100 to 100 change Appears if loop is in Manual Enter the largest change in output or in engineering units that the process will tolerate The pretune will initiate and analyze this output SP STEP SIZE 100 to 100 change Appears if loop is in Auto Enter the largest change in setpoint or in engineering units that the process will tolerate The pretune will initiate and analyze this setpoint START Select to start the pretune function See Before Starting Pretune below Before Starting Pretune Before starting Pretune configure adjust the loop as follows Auto Manual Either mode is acceptable Changing the loop mode after starting pretune will abort the pretune causing an error message to appear Process Variable Adjust setpoint or output to bring the process variable to normal operation range Adjusting or switching setpoints or output after starting pretune will abort the pretune causing an error message to appear Gain Proportional Band Reset Use known good settings Or set Gain 1 0 PB 100 Reset 1 0 and place loop in Manual mode Rate Optional If OFF pretune
71. Since storage files and configuration files may not be stored on the same disk you can swap the storage disk with a configuration disk for up to the buffered data time period while loading configurations without losing storage data See Data Storage in section 4 26 for more information on buffered data When the storage disk is re installed or when another disk is initialized using the current schedules the buffered data will be transferred to the disk Initializing a disk Initialization creates separate areas on the disk for each type of data to be stored Data types that can be stored are up to 3 Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics and Unit Data You can initialize a disk using the current storage schedule or using a new storage schedule When data storage is active the instrument determines the status of the disk Status can be one of the following possibilities Table 7 3 Disk Status Disk status Result The current disk was inserted The instrument will resume storage to this disk automatically back into the drive Some other disk was inserted In this case a DISK NOT CURRENT message is displayed and data is That is disk is blank contains stored in a buffer not on the disk old data files or contains configuration files Initializing a disk using the same storage setup For 120MB or Zip disks it is recommended you preinitialize the disk using DSU See Data Storage in section 4 26 for more information T
72. Specify the appropriate algorithm ATTENTION ON OFF loop types provides direct output without the use of an analog output To complete an ON OFF loop configuration assign the ON OFF loop s output LPn OS to a Discrete Output Relay see Program Discrete Outputs section 4 11 Alfr LP 1 1 E Dott INC DO 2 DEC Al 2 DRIVE UNIT CONTROL OUTPUT TYPE POS_PROP INPUT SOURCE LP1 OV SLIDEWIRE INPUT Al2 OV Ww 2 POS ALGORITHM POS PROP INC OUTPUT RELAY RELAY 1 SLIDEWIRE INPUT DEC OUTPUT RELAY RELAY 2 INPUT TYPE LINEAR RANGE LOW 0 0 POWER SLIDEWIRE RANGE HIGH 100 0 OUTPUT TYPE VAT DIRECT INDIRECT INDIR INPUT SOURCE 1 0 CIRCUIT LOW 0 0 IN LOW LIMIT 0 0 CIRCUIT HIGH 1 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 1 0 ELECTRICAL UNITS VOLTS OUT LOW LIMIT 0 0 OUT HIGH LIMIT 1 0 NOTE Use Al 3 4 AND AO 3 4 for a second Position Proportional Control Loop Figure 4 2 Function Block Configuration of a Position Proportional Function Block for One Position Proportional Control Loop 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 103 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 10 Program Discrete Inputs Discrete Input function blocks are controlled by the on off status of the input hardware The output of the function block DIn OS reflects the status of the associated input hardware This output DIn OS can be connected to other function blocks input parameters to trigger actions such as start
73. Summary Viewing Procedure Action Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Table 5 13 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Summary Press Enter Press the Tab button to move the cursor to the TREND of the desired profiler then press Enter Result Notes Profiler menu is displayed Three profilers will be displayed as bar graphs Data for your profile s will be displayed SP1 SP2 SP3 100 00 200 00 1500 00 0 00 200 00 100 00 RUN READY END 40 00 71 00 820 20 SEG 5 SEG 1 SEG 15 00 21 13 00 00 00 01 30 00 TREND TREND TREND Setpoint Profiler 3 Bar Summary SPP 3BS The profiler trend of the selected profile is displayed SP1 PROFILOi s PV 241 27 1050 SP 248 00 secse RUN 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 217 Setpoint Profiler How to edit a profile s segments Profile may be in Ready End or Hold to edit segments CAUTION For value duration ramp type it is recommended you do not edit the currently running segment or the next segment Doing so may prematurely terminate the segment that is the profiler may jump to the next segment Table 5 21 Segment Editing Procedure Step Action Result Notes 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profiler menu is displayed Table 5 13 2 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to The Edit Profile menu is displayed Edit Press Ente
74. Table 4 66 Serial Communications Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition UNIT ADDRESS 1 254 Enter the unit s address Use a number once only so that each address on the link is unique PROTOCOL Binary Modbus RTU Select the correct protocol BAUD RATE 1200 2400 4800 Enter the speed of data transfer All equipment on the link must 9600 19200 38400 be set to match the host setting 76800 PARITY EVEN ODD NONE Appears for binary protocol only All equipment on the link must be set to match the host setting BYTE ORDER Appears for Modbus protocol only Example Decimal number 25 38 Floating point number Register 1 Register 2 Choice Meaning Byte Order Result for 25 38 FPB FPB Big Endian 0123 41 CB 0A 3D FP BB FP BigEndianByteSwap 1032 CB 41 3D 0 FPL FPL Little endian 3210 3D OA CB 41 FP LB FP LB LitleendanByteswap 2301 OA 3D 41 CB DOWNLOAD YES NO Set to YES to prevent configurations from being downloaded from LOCKOUT a PC with SCF software 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 165 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 22 Set Clock To assure data alarms and events are properly time stamped the clock must be properly set The clock uses military time Select SET CLOCK from the main Program menu Enter the date and time with the following prompts Table 4 67 describes the Set Clock prompts Table 4 67 Set Clock Prompts Prompt Range Sele
75. UNITS 132 Table 4 39 Relative Humidity Prompts Range Selections OFF or number OFF analog parameter number OFF analog parameter number OFF analog parameter number F C K R VPR amp VRX User Manual Definition Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits Dry bulb temperature in temperature units selected Wet bulb temperature in temperature units selected Enter atmospheric pressure in Pascals 101325 Pa Is one standard atmosphere Select the temperature units for the calculation Units are for wet bulb and dry bulb 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Sterilization The output CVn OV is a kill time Fo which quantifies the destruction of microorganisms during a sterilization process Fo represents the number of minutes after which the microorganism population is decreased by one decimal or log unit The Fo formula is Fo dt x 1 Qe where dt time between Fo measurements in minutes Dt is equal to the scan cycle of the instrument in minutes T measured temperature input in reference temperature 121 C typical Z product dependent temperature constant This function also compares the calculated Fo value to the desired Fo value Fa Preset When Fo equals or exceeds Fa the function activates its discrete output CVn OS this output remains ON 1 until the Fo calculation is reset via the Reset
76. User Manual 211 Setpoint Profiler How to load a program from disk Table 5 12 Procedure To Load A Program From Disk Action Press the Display button to change to online mode Press the Menu button to display the online menu Press Down Arrow button to highlight Setpoint Profiles Press Enter Result Notes An online display is shown Online menu is displayed Cursor moves down Setpoint Profiles menu is displayed Press Down Arrow button to highlight Load Program From Disk Prompt is highlighted Press Enter Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow to highlight desired program file Press Enter to select Press Enter again to load Load Program sub menu is displayed Program is highlighted Program is loaded from the disk to the instrument 212 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler How to start a profiler A profiler can be started from the Ready Hold or End state Table 5 13 Profiler Starting Procedure Action Result Notes Press Display button until the Setpoint Trend is S P1 P RO F LO 1 500 00 displayed Or Press the Display button until a Setpoint Bar Graph display is shown Press the Tab button to move the cursor to the TREND text under the desired profile at the bottom of the display Press Enter to display the Setpoint Profile Trend display for that profile 0 00 PV 0 00 SP 0 00 READ
77. Using Primary Displays Table 6 1 Displays Accessed With Display Button continued Display Function Interactive or view only Page Loop w 2 Bar Graphs Displays 2 Loops data as bar graphs Interactive 227 Loop w 3 Bar Graphs Displays 3 Loops data as bar graphs Interactive 227 Loop w 4 Bar Graphs Displays 4 Loops data as bar graphs Interactive 227 Alarm Summary Displays current alarms Interactive 228 3 point Vertical Bar Graph Displays 3 points vertically View only 4 point Vertical Bar Graph Displays 4 points vertically View only 6 point Vertical Bar Graph Displays 6 points vertically View only 8 point Vertical Bar Graph Display 8 points vertically View only 12 point Vertical Bar Graph Displays 12 points vertically View only 4 point Horizontal Bar Graph Displays 4 points horizontally View only 6 point Horizontal Graph Displays 6 points horizontally View only Unit Data Displays up to 12 point values at a time View only Panel Meter Displays up to 12 different panel displays ata View only time Storage Status _Displays data storage status View only Totalizer Displays all totalizer values View only Process Summary Displays simultaneously the following formats View only VRX150 only VPR100 VRX100 only Horizontal Trend Digital Loop w 4 Bar Graphs Panel Meter 2
78. a bias equal to the newly entered value minus the actual measured value at the time that the adjustment is entered All points on the display which are currently adjusted will have a Value Adjust Indicator beside the value To adjust a value select the desired AI and press Enter Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to change the value on the display The value can be changed to any value within the programmed limits of the AI To remove the value adjustment set the value to OFF The AI will display its current value and the indicator will be removed 244 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Set Analog Outputs This menu item will appear if the optional analog outputs are installed It lets you adjust various analog output parameters Four output types are available current output CAT voltage output VAT time proportion duration adjusting DAT and Position Proportion PP Outputs through 3 may be dedicated to CAT or VAT types Outputs 4 and 5 may only be DAT types Prompt Definition FAILSAFE VALUE Enter a value of 0 to 100 or an analog parameter for the initial output This is the initial output on cold start If the failsafe value is set to off the output will go to 0 IMPULSE TIME For DAT outputs use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to adjust the impulse time Impulse time must be 1 second Impulse time is the cycle time for on and off cy
79. all desired choices then repeat the procedure if desired for the other Loops 90 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 9 Control Loop Type Menu Selections STD ADV SPLIT ON OFF CAS P CASS RATIO DIAT IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL OUT DECIMAL POS POS POS POS POS POS POS POS PV PV PV PV OUT UNITS PV PV PV PV HIGH LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV PV HIGH LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV HIGH LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT PV LOW LIMIT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL PV LOW LIMIT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION ACTION GAIN PROP GAIN PROP GAIN PROP SP1 TRACKING CONTROL GAIN PROP GAIN PROP GAIN PROP BAND BAND BAND ACTION BAND BAND BAND PROP PROP PROP SETPOINT 1 GAIIN PROP PROP PROP PROP BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 BAND 1 GAIN 1 RESET H1 RESETH1 RESETH SETPOINT 2 PROP RESET H1 RESET H RESET H BAND 1 GAIN 1 RATE 1 RATE 1
80. all points you want to display logarithmically Under Program Displays Set Up Trend specify the trend points you want displayed 2 3 4 5 Under Set Up Trend Set Display Limits change the decimal point position to X XXEXX Save your changes This causes all trend points with the X XXEXX output decimal position from steps 1 3 to be displayed logarithmically Any trend display containing these points will display them logarithmically with the number of log divisions derived automatically from the low and high limits of the first trend point found with the X XXEXX decimal position Trend points without the X XXEXX decimal position are displayed normally linearly 156 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 56 Paper Chart Speed Equivalents to Time Base Selections Instrument Paper Chart Vertical Trend Paper Chart Horizontal Trend cm hour inches hour cm hour inches hour Time Screen VPR100 VRX100 VPR100 VRX100 VRX150 VRX150 5 minutes 72 28 120 47 2 154 60 6 246 96 8 15 minutes 24 9 4 40 15 7 51 3 20 2 82 32 2 30 minutes 12 4 7 20 7 8 25 6 10 1 41 16 2 1 hour 6 2 8 10 3 9 12 8 5 1 20 5 8 1 2 hours 3 1 1 5 1 9 6 9 2 6 2 5 4 1 4 hours 1 5 0 6 2 5 0 9 0 5 0 2 0 8 0 3 Table 4 57 VRX 100 Live Trend Buffer Size 1 Trend Group Enabled Points of Time base time width
81. amp VRX User Manual 113 Programming Function Blocks and Features Math Performs math on up to 8 inputs using a single operator Output is CVn OV Division by 0 is indicated by CVn OV s displayed value flashing 0 Table 4 22 describes the Math prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 22 Math Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT A INPUT OFF analog parameter Enter up to 8 input sources number If connecting to an upstream loop that loop output LP OV MUST be INPUT A see Feedback OUTPUT LOW LIMIT Enter limits Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT these limits are exceeded OPERATOR ADD SUBT MULT DIV 1 Input OPERATOR Input2 OPERATOR Input8 ABSVAL SQRT and where OPERATOR is one of these STDDEV add subtract multiply or standard deviation Standard Deviation uses all inputs Example Input1 minus Input2 minus Input8 2 OPERATOR Input1 where OPERATOR is absolute value or square root 3 Input OPERATOR Input2 where OPERATOR is divide Note Inputs 3 8 are not used in division FEEDBACK OFF analog parameter Select LP BC or AO BC to propagate the back calculation number BC value from a downstream loop or AO Also program the upstream loop s feedback with this Math CV s back calculation value CV BC You MUST program this CV s feedback to NONE if this CV is not used as part of a control loop output
82. and blank data point Flashing between value Same as Output Limits of Totalizer or Interval Timer Exceeded Appears in and blank data point place of the value on all displays Interval Timer s or Totalizer s value is outside its output limits Value is not clamped 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 231 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 232 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus 7 Online Operation Using Menus 7 1 Overview Online operation involves interacting with displays and with menus This section describes how to interact with the online menus The Online Menu is accessed by pressing the Display button then the Menu button Or you can choose SET MODE from any menu to change the mode ATTENTION When switching to Online mode from Program or Maintenance modes by pressing the Display button sometimes incorrect data is displayed for a few seconds before the correct online display is shown You can avoid this distraction by selecting ONLINE from the SET MODE menu instead The top level of the menu structure is shown in Table 7 1 Your unit may have a reduced menu if options are not present or if features have been disabled through programming selections Table 7 1 Online Mode Menu Menu as displayed Function SET MODE Change instrument s operating mode DATA STORAGE Set up and operate data storage ACCESS SUMMARIES Display status summaries
83. any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance first change to online mode by selecting SET MODE from the PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE menus then press a Display button to access the displays 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 41 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Name Auto Manual ATTENTION Function This key is available only on instruments with control On VRX150 without control this key functions as the Display 2 key In a loop display toggles loop between Auto and Manual modes loop s Force Remote Manual discrete must be OFF In a loop display toggles loop between Remote Manual and Manual modes loop s Remote Manual discrete must be ON Does not function if loop s Discrete vs Key discrete is ON In this case the button s functioning has been transferred to the loop s Auto Manual Select discrete Operating mode in which function applies Program Online Maint The following keys are like Digital Inputs on the keypad of the instrument They must be configured as part of the instrument s function blocks in order to be active START START HOLD RESET RESET This key is on the VPR100 only When pressed this key raises the SY1 F1 signal for 1 machine scan cycle User typically
84. blage et d branch e en dernier e Il est obligatoire de connecter cet appareil sur une ligne poss dant un moyen de coupure pr s de l appareil CARACTERISTIQUES DE L EQUIPEMENT Tension d alimentation 85 265 Fr quence 50 60 Hz Puissance ou courant 45 VA Fusible 2 250 CONDITIONS AMBIANTES Ne jamais utiliser cet quipement en pr sence de liquides ou vapeurs inflammables L utilisation de tout instrument lectrique dans un tel environnement pourrait pr senter un risque pour la s curit Temp rature Ambiante 0 a 50 C Stockage 20 70 C Humidit 10 90 HR non condens 40 Vibration 5 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 150 Hz acc l ration 0 5 g INSTALLATION DE L EQUIPEMENT Cet appareil doit tre mont dans un panneau pour limiter l acc s aux bornes arri res par l op rateur SICHERHEITSHINWEISE GE21 6047 Befolgen Sie alle Sicherheitshinweise in diesen Unterlagen um das Risiko eines Stromschlags zu verringern der zu K rperverletzung f hren kann Dieses Symbol warnt den Benutzer vor eventueller Ber hrungsgefahr wo lebensgefahrliche Spannungen zug nglich sein k nnen Sch tzende Erdung F r den Anschluf der sch tzenden Erdung der Versorgungssystemleitung OAS e Bei Benutzung der Ausr stungen auf nicht vom Hersteller angegebene Art und Weise kann der von der Ausr stung gew hrleistete Schutz beeintr chtigt werden e Ersetzen Sie keine Komponente
85. can during fast forward 200 175 150 130 107 100 Sample interval 60 x 500 msec 30 seconds E pla gt a gt Normal time of segment 110 seconds 130 seconds 120 seconds Fast forward time lt 2 seconds gt 2 seconds 2 seconds lt q sampled value profile is sampled Time Multiplier 60 Scan Rate of machine 500 msec Therefore every half second the profile is incremented 30 seconds Segment 2 begins between samples Segment 2 s events not recognized until next scan cycle Figure 5 12 Fast Forward When Shutdown is activated by a discrete Profiler is in Profiler input or by the operator menu the profiler Run Hold or jumps to jumps from the batch phase to the shutdown End BATCH phase of a multiphase profile The shutdown LAST phase begins at the segment defined by the SEGMENT parameter BATCH LAST SEGMENT 1 1 Shutdown is useful when you need to shut down your process without waiting for the profiler to finish a batch Example BATCH FIRST SEGMENT which specifies the start of the batch phase of the profile is set at Segment 3 The last segment of the batch phase BATCH LAST SEGMENT is set at Segment 7 The last segment of the profile is Segment 9 When SHUTDOWN changes from OFF to ON the profiler will jump to Segment 8 the first segment of the shutdown phase of the profile See Figure 5 13 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler
86. capacities Note that while the profiler of SP1 was specified in Figure 3 28 s diagram any of the profilers within the instrument could have been used When set point profile is executed discrete inputs are typically used in conjunction with external switches to control the set point profiler function block For example the set point profiler function block can be programmed to start hold or reset based on discrete input statuses See Figure 3 29 AO1 BC TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA External INPUT TYPE J Switches RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 000 OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 5 2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 10 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RATE OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 OS OUTPUT STATE DI3 OS Figure 3 29 Discrete Inputs Controlling Execution Of Set Point Profiler Function Block 70 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Also typical in the execution of a set point profile is the generation of discrete events during each profile step Discrete events are simply status indicators that are programmed to assume either an ON or OFF state during a step of a profile As simple discrete status indicators these events may for example be used to initiate a logic control scheme on the process being controlled upon the occurrence of a particular profile segment In this product note that up to 16 discrete events may be
87. connections Unless local electrical codes dictate otherwise the recommended minimum wire size for connections is given in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Recommended Minimum Wire Size Gage No Description 14 Earth ground wire to common power supply Earth ground wire to single instrument AC line leads 24V and common leads 24VDC power supply 20 22 DC current and voltage field wiring DC current and voltage wiring in control room Make all connections at the terminals outside the case as shown in Figure 2 3 through Figure 2 5 and Table 2 4 through Table 2 6 Do not run low level signal leads close to or parallel with line voltage leads or other power leads in order to avoid electrical interference with signals A mains disconnect switch must be installed that breaks all current carrying conductors J An external switch should be used for all other hazardous voltage connections Disconnect all power before making any wiring connections than one switch may be required to de energize the instrument Power Connections The instrument can be connected to a power mains source of from 85 Vac to 265 Vac 50 Hz or 60 Hz with no conversion or special installation requirements N Safety Grounding The protective ground terminal is to be connected to the mains supply ground Noise Suppression To protect the instrument from noise and to comply with CE see Appendix B 24 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 N
88. describe the Setpoint Profile prompts Table 5 4 Setpoint Profiles Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition EDIT PROFILE 1 Select a profile to edit See Table 5 5 for EDIT PROFILE 2 prompts EDIT PROFILE 3 EDIT PROFILE 4 STORE PROGRAM TO STARTING PROFILE Select 1 4 DISK Select the lowest numbered profile to be stored that is Profile 1 2 3 or 4 See How programs are stored on a disk on page 211 for details NUMBER OF PROFILES Select 1 4 Number of profiles 1 2 3 or 4 determines how many profiles will be stored starting with the Starting Profile 4 For example if Starting Profile is 1 and Number of profiles is 3 then Profiles 1 2 and 3 are stored See How programs are stored on a disk on page 211 for details FILE Select the filename and number Filename extension is LNS After you select the number and press Enter the profile s are stored to disk FILES ON DISK Lists all files on the disk STORE PROGRAM TO PROGRAM NUMBER Select 1 12 MEMORY On the VPR there are up to 96 slots allotted for profile memory storage Depending on how many profiles your instrument has each program will contain a certain number of profiles See How programs are stored to memory on page 209 for details STORE PROGRAM TO MEMORY Select this to store program to memory 202 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 4 Setpoint Profiles Prompts continu
89. desired reaction vessel temperature 2 SP2 is the remote setpoint input of LP2 Figure 3 26 Function Block Diagram Of The Cascade Control Strategy Recall that based on the instrument s model number up to four control loops LP1 through LP4 are potentially available for use within the instrument All control loops in this product may be programmed to operate using to two user defined set point parameters designated by SPI and SP2 Should you implement a control loop using one or both setpoints That depends on what is necessary to meet the requirements of the specific application being dealt with When in the on line mode and viewing a control loop s dedicated on line display the working set point of the live control loop can be switched between SP1 or SP2 by simply pushing the SP key on the instrument s front bezel Note that while both set point parameters may be programmed to have straight numeric values only SP2 may be defined as a remote set point That is SP2 may be set up so that its value is determined by the output value of another function block such as a setpoint profile In the cascade control strategy demonstrated in Figure 3 26 SP2 s remote set point functionality is exploited by the LP2 secondary cascade loop When this control configuration is made operational LP2 s working set point SP2 will have a value determined by LP1 OV In Figure 3 26 the process values of each loop are the output values of the
90. e There is no disk in the drive e The disk is write protected e operator is in the process of retrieving stored data from the disk e The disk is not current see DSK NOT CURRENT below e The front bezel is open The message will disappear when the condition is corrected or if data Storage is disabled turned off DISK FULL Yellow DISK WARNING Yellow BEZEL OPEN Yellow No more space is available on one or more of the files on the floppy disk for storage of data as programmed This message will appear only if at least one partition on the disk is programmed for non rollover operation The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized or if data storage is disabled turned off Floppy disk is not full but available space on one or more disk files has reached the programmed warning limit The message will disappear when a new disk is initialized or if data storage is disabled turned off Instrument front panel is open or is not closed securely DISK ERROR Yellow The instrument is attempting to store data but the disk is either not properly formatted or is faulty The message disappears when the disk is formatted or replaced or if data storage is disabled turned off WRITE PROTECTED DSK NOT CURRENT Yellow Yellow DISK MISSING Yellow When a disk is initialized the instrument marks it as the current disk The instrument will only store data to the current disk If a
91. from remote host 149 upgrade 260 V VAT 89 100 VAT Calibration 258 viewing profile details 216 viewing profile events 216 viewing profile summary 217 W Warm Start 261 Warm Start Time 261 Warning level 96 data storage 179 Wiring 20 308 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 SIKKERHESKRAV DA2I 6047 For at undg elektrisk st d med mulighed for personskade skal alle sikkerhedsbestemmelser i denne manual f lges n je Dette symbol advarer brugeren om en potentiel bergringsfare safremt der kan vere adgang til den livsfarlige netspanding Beskyttende jordterminal Terminalen er forberedt for og skal forbindes til beskyttelses jordledning i henhold til sterkstr msberkendtggrelsen DK S e Hvis udstyret ikke bruges som specificeret i manualen kan den beskyttelse udstyret yder blive nedsat eller forsvinde e Herstat kun komponenter som udtrykkeligt er specificeret som udskiftelige i manualen e Alle ledningsforbindelser skal f lge st rkstr msberkendtg relsen DK og udf res af autoriseret erfarent personel e Den beskyttende jordterminal skal forbindes f rst af alle forbindelser og fjernes som den sidste e Det anbefales jvf st rkstr msberkendtg relsen at der installeres en afbryder til frosyningssp ndingen n r udstyret UDSTYRS SPECIFIKATIONER Str mforsyning 85 til 265 V AC DC Frekvens 50 60 Hz Nominel effekt 45 VA Sikringsv rdi 2 A 250 V AC DC OMGIVELSES SPECIFIKATIONER
92. identified as SPn A1 and remains constant for the duration of the segment OFF or Positive number The purpose of the number entered here depends on the ramp type of the profile See 4 types of ramp segments on page 186 for details GUAR SOAK 1 ON or OFF ON means the profiler will Hold during this segment if deviation between PV 1 and the profiler output exceeds the guaranteed soak limits in Table 5 5 OFF means the profiler will not Hold during this segment due to deviation See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 for details GUAR SOAK 2 ON or OFF ON means the profiler will Hold during this segment if deviation between PV 2 and the profiler output exceeds the guaranteed soak limits in Table 5 5 OFF means the profiler will not Hold during this segment due to deviation See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 for details EDIT EVENTS EVENT 1 Enter the state of up to 16 discrete outputs of this segment These outputs can be used to trigger any action requiring a discrete signal such as a relay or another function block EVENT 16 An event stays on or off for the entire segment To trigger events in the middle of a segment you must divide the segment into 3 segments See Segment Events on page 192 for details 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 207 Setpoint Profiler 5 5 How to load and run a profiler Overview From the Setpoint Profile Trend s menu you can e load a profiler from memory VPR and
93. increases loop s Y setpoint value loop must be in Auto mode In loop display increases loop s output loop must be in Manual mode Scrolls a trend forward in time 4 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 39 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Name Function Operating mode in which function applies Program Online Maint Down Moves cursor down a list menu ys Y Arrow Next V When selecting a number letter or Y Y Y decimal point position moves cursor one character to the right then wraps around to leftmost character In loop display decreases loop s Y setpoint value In loop display decreases loop s output V loop must be in Manual mode Scrolls a trend backward in time Left Arrow Numeric entry moves one digit to left d Y d 4 Text entry moves one character to right Enter Selects displayed menu item and either Y Y displays its submenu or moves cursor to the right for data entry Enters a changed value or parameter Z If prompted to SAVE CHANGES saves changes made and returns to Y d higher menu Tab When trend or panel display is on d accesses Trend menu or panel display menu to adjust the appearance of the display When either above menu is shown Y advances display to next live point When Setpoint Profile Trend display is Y shown accesses a menu for viewing and controlling operation of the profile On Loop disp
94. instruments with the seismic mounting option refer to the separate mounting instructions Table 2 1 Panel Mounting Procedure 1 Place the instrument in the panel cutout as shown in Figure 2 1 or Figure 2 2 2 Remove the screw from the top and bottom rear center of the instrument Engage the rounded projection on the mounting T bar in the slot on the top of the instrument s case Note the end with the notch For thin panels up to 7 92 mm 5 16 place the notched end toward the panel For thick panels up to 12 7 mm 1 2 place the notched end away from the panel For thicker panels up to 6 35 mm 1 4 can be cut off the unnotched end 4 Slide the bar up against the panel and insert the screw at the end of the case as shown Check the fit and alignment of the instrument and tighten the screws on the top and bottom to 3 LB IN 35 N M of torque maximum See Table 2 2 for proper screw length 5 Install the second T bar and screw in the slot on the bottom of the case in the same way Check the fit and alignment of the instrument and tighten the screws on the top and bottom to 3LB IN 35 N m maximum torque Use proper screw length to prevent Electric Shock Table 2 2 Screw Lengths for Panel Thicknesses For Panel thickness Use screw length 1 52 mm 06 to 4 8 mm 3 16 12 mm 15 32 4 8 mm 3 16 to 8 mm 5 16 8 mm 5 16 8 mm 5 16 to 12 7 mm 1 2 8 mm 5 16 12 7 mm
95. low limit to gt 500 mV Low limit Outside of Change limit to within specified limits Change lag or delay to greater than For thermocouple or RTD Range Low limit is lt Table the low limit for that type for that type Table 4 6 Low Output Limit less A current output CAT or voltage output VAT Change current output CAT or than Zero low limit is less than zero voltage output VAT low limit to greater than or equal to zero Monthly Periods Must Be Periodic Timer CV period is monthly but no Change Periodic Timer phase Phased phase is defined No Room for Function System has used all allocated function blocks Verify programming of affected Block function block Number of Frames Out Rolling Average CV of Samples is less than 1 Change of Samples to 1 60 of Range or greater than 60 Out of EEPROM Memory No more static memory or EEPROM memory Verify programming of affected function block Out of RAM Memory No more RAM available Verify programming of affected function block Output Limits Equal Output range limits low and high must be Change to unequal limits unequal Pairs Inconsistent Applies to custom or Function Generator CV Program a Y for each X or vice versa Curve has Xn but no Yn or vice versa Curve Program at least 2 X s and 2 Y s does not have at least 2 X Y pairs Request Made with Invalid Tag Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file o
96. manual and instead use the following table as a guide Keep in mind Section 3 contains basic concepts you should know consider reading it first Step Action See 1 To program analog inputs Section 4 7 Program Analog Inputs 2 To program control if your Section 3 13 How to program common configurations application has control Section 4 8 Program Control Loops Section 5 Setpoint Profiler if your instrument has a setpoint profiler Section 4 9 Program Analog Outputs 3 To configure displays Section 4 18 Program Displays 4 To configure data storage Section 4 26 Data Storage Setup 5 To program other functions Remaining sections in Section 4 How To Program Function Blocks and Features 3 3 Modes of Operation The instrument has three modes of operation Program Online and Maintenance Each mode has its own menus Most menu items provide access to sub level menus The SET MODE item switches the instrument from one mode to another Your instrument may have reduced menus if options are not present Program mode Program mode is an off line mode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all inputs and outputs are frozen Online mode Online Mode enables full use of the instrument with its inputs outputs and internal programming In this mode it is fully interactive with all externally connected elements Maintenance mode Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper and complete func
97. number or an analog parameter value Discrete Input 16 16 16 Interfaces with discrete input hardware dry contact closure Discrete Output DO 16 24 24 Interfaces with output relay hardware AC relay DC relay mechanical relay open collector output Loop LP 2 4 4 PID or ON OFF control with various outputs Setpoint Profiler 1 4 4 Generates a time varying setpoint for a loop s Setpoint 2 System SY 1 1 1 Outputs discrete status of alarms data storage and diagnostics outputs analog value of reference junction temperature This function block is not programmable its outputs are produced automatically Totalizer TL 12 12 3 Outputs accumulated total over time Depends on options ordered Why use function blocks Function blocks give you configuration flexibility For instance the instrument does not have a dedicated relay that is activated during an alarm instead you can program any of several Alarm function blocks to control any relay Also there is not a specific input for your process variable any of several Analog Input function blocks can be programmed to be your process variable In general function blocks let you connect the output parameter of any function block to the input parameter of any function block 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 49 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 9 Components of function blocks The three components of a function block are e Input parameter s e Function block para
98. of carbon in carburizing hardening and atmosphere generating applications Prompt PROBE TYPE CARBON PROBE IN PROBE TEMP INPUT TEMPERATURE UNIT Table 4 38 Carbon Prompis Range Selections NONE AACP SUPER SYS MARATHON FCC NUMBER PARM OFF NUMBER PARM OFF NONE F C K R Definition Selection which represents the manufacturer of the oxygen probe being used This determines which linearization equations are used for C and dewpoint calculations Analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe mV output Analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe temperature output Temperature scale for this block This selection must match the temperature scale of the analog input that is connected to the oxygen probe temperature output TEMP LOW LIMIT CO COMPENSATION FURNACE FACTOR SOOTING FACTOR NUMBER OFF NUMBER PARM OFF NUMBER PARM OFF ON OFF Probe temperature value below which this block s low temperature discrete output OS is turned ON This limit and subsequent discrete output may be used to force the control loop s output to a known value when the probe temperature is too low for carbon potential control Number used in the C calculation which represents the CO present in the endothermic gas Correction factor used to account for environmental variation within the furnace chamber In units of C this factor is added directly to the C value calculat
99. of which up to four are current adjusting or voltage adjusting Data can be directed to various display formats stored on disk or read from an optional serial communications link Analog and discrete data can be displayed in trend or tabular format Viewed data can be either live real time inputs or historical retrieved from disk Flexible modular design and several options makes this instrument adaptable to nearly any industrial application Honeywell DEG Y Honeywell DEG C Y 2500 0 VALUE6 A ALARM 1 HIGH A ALARM 1 HIGH 0 amp C A O 69 m A C CJ x v 2 C C X v GJ Figure 1 2 VRX100 with Control Figure 1 3 VRX100 without Control 2 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction 1 4 VRX150 Overview The Honeywell VRX150 Video Recorder is a multipoint video recorder that does more than just data recording It offers display versatility flexible data storage multiloop control and advanced math functions This integration of several functions within the same instrument eliminates the need for multiple devices and reduces installation costs The instrument features a large 10 4 26 4 cm diagonal high resolution LCD display which is capable of displaying up to 16 different colors simultaneously A front door allo
100. output channel if using DAT output algorithm This discrete output will be unprogrammable under the PROGRAM DISCRETE OUTPUTS programming menu Enter the largest value that does not cause drive motor oscillation The full scale travel time for the motor SLIDEWIRE INPUT OFF NUMBER PARM The AI block associated with the hardware input connected to the slidewire typically Al2 The range of the feedback analog input must be programmed for engineering units of 0 to 100 units indirect range with a circuit span of 0 to 1 Vac 102 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition The rules are AUTO and DIAT algorithm can be used only with DIAT loop type PP algorithm can be used only with loop types other than DIAT PP and AUTO algorithms require a feedback analog input AUTO permits normal feedback positioning of the drive motor when the feedback input is good and defaults to DIAT operation if the slidewire feedback input fails INC OUTPUT RELAY OFF RELAY 1 RELAY 24 This is the increasing discrete output channel for the POS PROP or DIAT positioning algorithms DEC OUTPUT OFF RELAY 1 RELAY 24 This is the decreasing discrete output channel for the RELAY POS PROP or DIAT positioning algorithms POS ALGORITHM POS PROP DIAT AUTO Positioning Algorithm
101. parameters It is designated by one of the two character output codes shown in Table 3 5 An output code can be programmed to be the input to one or several other function blocks See Figure 3 11 Output codes are either discrete can be on or off or analog numerical value For example DI1 OS is the output status of Discrete Input 1 on or off OV is the output value of Analog Input 1 a voltage or temperature Therefore a discrete input parameter must be programmed with only a discrete output code and an analog input parameter must be programmed with only an analog output code ATTENTION The function block SYSTEM PARAMETER abbreviated SY does not have input parameters or function block parameters like the other function blocks SY produces output codes only These output codes shown in Table 3 5 are mostly values or states that indicate the status of system wide parameters For example if any Alarm function block s output status is ON the SY function block s AG alarm global output code is also ON Another example is the SY F1 output code which produces a quick ON to OFF discrete signal when the F1 or START key is pressed This SY F1 can be used as a trigger to another action For example to allow an operator to start the Profile or reset the Totalizer by pressing the START key or F1 key you can program a Setpoint Profile s Start parameter or a Totalizer s Reset parameter with SY F1 12 00 VPR amp VRX User
102. per screen per trend screen R group widths 5 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 2 hrs 4 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 1 238 19 hrs 2d 11h 4d 23h 9d 22h 19d20h 39d16h 79d8h 263 days 2 158 13 hrs 1d 15h 3d 6h 6d 14h 13d 5h 26d 10h 52 21 158d 16h 3 119 9 hrs 1d 5h 2d 11h 4d 23h 9d 22h 19d 20h 39d16h 119 days 4 95 7 hrs 23 hrs 1d 23h 3d 23h 7d 22h 15d20h 31d17h 95d 4h 5 79 6 hrs 19 hrs 1d 15h 3d 6h 6d 14h 13d 5h 26d 10h 79d 8h 6 68 5 hrs 17 hrs 1d 10h 2d 20h 5d 16h 11d 8h 22d 16h 68 days 2 Trend Groups Enabled Points of Time base time width per screen per trend screen group widths 5 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 2 hrs 4 hrs 8 hrs 24 hrs 1 119 9 hrs 1d 5h 2d 11h 4d 23h 9d 22h 19d 20h 39d16h 119 days 2 79 6 hrs 19 hrs 1d 15h 3d 6h 6d 14h 13d 5h 26 10h 79d 8h 3 59 5 hrs 14 hrs 1d 5h 2d 11h 4d 23h 9d 22h 19d 20h 59d 12h 4 47 4 hrs 11 hrs 23 hrs 1d 23h 3d 23h 7d 22h 15d 20h 22d 14h 5 39 3 hrs 9 hrs 19 hrs 1d 15h 3d 6h 6d 14h 13d 5h 39d 16h 6 34 2 hrs 8 hrs 17 hrs 1d 10h 2d 20h 5d 16h 11d 8h 34 days 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 157 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 58 VRX 150 Live Trend Buffer Size 1 Trend Group Enabled
103. programs it to Profiler Start input This key is on the VPR100 only When pressed this key raises the SY1 F2 signal for 1 machine scan cycle User typically programs it to Profiler Hold input Use Edge Level input selection This key is on the VPR100 only When pressed this key raises the SY1 F3 signal for 1 machine scan cycle User typically programs it to Profiler Reset input 42 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Name Function Operating mode in which function applies 1 This key is on the VRX100 150 only e When pressed this key raises the SY1 F1 signal for 1 machine scan cycle Program Online Maint e Forinstruments with the Setpoint Profiler user typically programs it to Profiler Start input or Totalizer Reset F2 This key is on the VRX100 150 only e When pressed this key raises the SY1 v F2 signal for 1 machine scan cycle e For instruments with the Setpoint Profiler option user typically programs it to Profiler Hold input Use Edge Level input selection or to Totalizer Reset F3 This key is on the VRX100 150 only e When pressed this key raises the SY1 2 signal for 1 machine scan cycle D E e For instruments with the Setpoint Profiler option user typically programs it to Profiler Reset input or Totalizer Reset 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual
104. rate will be used when display Trend s alternate timebase is selected from the Online Point Trend menu Storage Trend s low rate will be used when display Trend s normal timebase is selected See Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts Timebase EXTERNAL ENABLE OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When ON 1 this discrete parameter will allow storage of the data type when off storage for the data type will stop This enable is independent of the storage mode it does not control batch start stop SELECT FILENAME FILE CYCLE DRYER Select a file name to identify the type of data to be stored PROD RECORD TANK UNIT LOOP REACTR CONFIG KILN VESSEL CALIB WCHEM PRESS FURNCE DEMIN CONTRL BATCH FERMTR LEHR LINE STRLZR OVEN ZONE 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 173 Programming Function Blocks and Features Trend Data 2 amp 3 Alarms Events 174 Trend Data 2 and Trend Data 3 use the same prompts as in Table 4 71 TREND DATA 3 does not have COPY DISPLAY SETUP or CHANGE WITH KEY prompts because there is no corresponding Display Trend 3 to be copied ATTENTION A maximum of 12 data points per second can be stored in Trends 1 2 3 and Unit Data combined Alarm data storage consists of a complete log of alarms including time of occurrence time of clearing value of the alarm parameter the alarm sense high low etc and the batch identification number if present The alarm prompts are STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER
105. schedules that have been configured in the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu requires you to initialize the DOS formatted floppy disk to which process and diagnostic data will be stored This is done by executing a routine entitled INITIALIZE DISK also found in the DATA STORAGE menu The task of initializing a disk and activating data storage schedules are one and the same ATTENTION Initializing a disk is only necessary for performing Data Storage You do not have to initialize a disk to perform Configuration Set Point Program or Calibration Storage When executing the INITIALIZE DISK menu prompt you will observe two selections USE NEW SCHEDULES and USE CURRENT SCHEDULES The SCHEDULES in both selections refer to the data storage schedules prepared in the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu described earlier USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk to activate a newly configured data storage schedule for the very first time The only time you will USE NEW SCHEDULES again is after you have made any changes to the way the data storage schedules have been configured You must USE NEW SCHEDULES to initialize the disk in order for these changes to take effect USE CURRENT SCHEDULES to initialize a disk if the disk will replace one that has become full This will ensure that data being recorded continues uninterrupted over the space of both the full and replacement disks During the time when the full disk is being replaced with a new disk recorded data
106. specifikation kan de inbyggda s kerhetsfunktionerna ventyras e Ers tt aldrig n gon komponent eller del som inte ar specificerad som ers ttningsbar av tillverkaren e Allledningsdragning m ste utf ras i enlighet med lokala best mmelser och skall utf ras av beh rig personal med erfarenhet av s dant arbete e Skyddsjordsanslutningen skall anslutas f re alla andra anslutningar och losskopplas sist e En str mbrytare f r n str mmen rekommenderas STR MF RS RJNING Sp nning 85 a 265 V AC DC Frekvens 50 60 Hz Effekt eller m rkstr m 45 VA S kringsv rde 2 A 250 V AC DC OMGIVNINGSVILLKOR Anv nd ej instrumentet i n rhet av br nnbara v tskor eller gaser Anv ndandet av instrumentet i s dant milj r en direkt s kerhetsrisk Temperatur Omgivande 0 till 50 C Forvaring 20 till 70 C Fuktighet 10 till 90 RH ej kondenserande 40 C Vibration 5 till 15 Hz amplitud 1 mm 15 till 150 Hz acceleration 0 5 g INSTALLATION Instrumentet skall monteras i en panel eller i en lada f r att undvika att personalen kommer i ber ring med bakre inkopplingsplintar HSM8 HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS ARGENTINA HONEYWELL S A 1 C BELGRANO 1156 BUENOS AIRES ARGENTINA Tel 54 1 383 9290 ASIA PACIFIC HONEYWELL ASIA PACIFIC Inc Room 3213 3225 Sun Kung Kai Centre N 30 Harbour Road WANCHAI HONG KONG Tel 852 829 82 98 AUSTRALIA HONEYWELL LIMITED 5 Thomas Holt Drive North R
107. t paraMeterS a 54 How to program function block parameters seen nennen 57 How to program a simple configuration essere eene nennen nennen nennen nenne 57 How to program common enne eene ene en rennen eren nenne 59 51 NM D ies 73 HOW TO PROGRAM FUNCTION BLOCKS AND FEATURES 77 OVERVIEW c M 77 acordar TTE 78 Phe Progratramode menu ee ee RS re Ie DE ee ERREUR d tue 79 Frequently used programming prompts ener nre trennen nenne 80 Set Mode ee decrees e iecore en eene oe pta eee eee Decret 81 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 4 6 4 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 19 4 20 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 77 7 8 12 00 Entet Labels Aase orne o naga merat E ai 82 Program Analog Inputs ee IUe a a i e tees re ea ee a eo iai 85 Program Control Loops ies 5 i terr Meant cs hes e etc t et Hebe t e RE Peine E Taasta eges 89 Program Analoe Outputs sic ae ol deae ee dg 100 Program Discrete e eee ehe ee epe en 104 Program Discrete Outputs ette eret t EE bedienen dente aeneae de eet wT 105 Program Calculated e eee ea gere
108. temperature measurements OV are then fed to the process variable input PV of the LP1 control loop block Note how has been defined as a split output control loop using the notation TYPE SPLIT Unique to this control loop is the defined range of its output value LP1 OV Where the standard control loops mentioned thus far have had outputs ranging exclusively between 0 and 100 the values of the split output control loop vary between 100 and 100 0 is considered the midpoint for this control loop s output range When brought on line a 0 to 100 output value will be generated by LP1 when hot water is needed to maintain the temperature at set point When the addition of cold water is necessary the loop s output will assume a value between 0 and 100 Note that to externalize the control signals generated by LP1 two analog output blocks AO1 and AO2 will be used AOI s 4 to 20 mA signal will be tied to the hot water valve actuator while the actuator that adjusts the position of the cold water valve will receive its mA control signal from AO2 To provide AO1 and AO2 with usable input driving signals LP1 s output will be applied to a function called a standard splitter STD SPLITTER Made from one of the instrument s calculated value function blocks CV s the standard splitter will essentially be a mechanism that translates the values of the split output control loop into two distinct O to 100 signals They will be
109. the CPU AED REPORT FAILURE A OO N Reset unit Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second Clear configuration and reload it If message recurs replace the CPU AED HANDSHAKE FAILURE k OO m Reset unit Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second Clear configuration and reload it If message recurs replace the CPU FB TASK OVERRUN Al TASK OVERRUN 12 00 1 2 Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second Check for noise See Appendix B for noise suppression Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second continued VPR amp VRX User Manual 273 On Site Adjustments 274 Table 9 9 Internal Error Messages continued Error message Suggested Action SLOT CARD FAILURE STORAGE FAILURE DATA STORAGE STATUS LOST RJ FAILURE 1 Check for noise See Appendix B for noise suppression 2 Check Al card connection 3 Replace Al card 1 Check for bad floppy disk 2 Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive 3 Check seating of floppy cables 4 Replace CPU 1 Check for bad floppy disk 2 Run disk diagnostic on the disk drive 3 Check seating of floppy cables 4 Replace CPU 1 Check reference junction sensor connection 2 Check Al card 3 Replace CPU CLOCK FAILURE 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit
110. to CV1 from the analog output function blocks at inputs denoted FB1 and FB2 CV1 BC the third feedback path runs from CV1 to the FB input of LP1 All three feedback paths work together to acknowledge to LP1 that the appropriate output signals have been generated in response to the output levels the loop has called for VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Cascade Control An example of a cascade control application is featured in Figure 3 25 Cascade control is typically used when two process values must be simultaneously controlled with one process value directly influencing the behavior of the other In this control strategy each process value is supported by its own dedicated control loop The term cascade is used because it describes how this control approach literally attaches both control loops together This act of linking control loops allows for the regulation of both process values using one and only one output control signal NSTRUMENT CHEMICA THERMOCOUPLES REACTION PV 200 SP 500 OUT 83 594 e OIL 4 TO 20 mA CAT ELECTRIC HEATING ELEMENT OIL JACKE Ls SCR AC POWER SOURCE Figure 3 25 Temperature Control Of An Oil Heated Chemical Reaction Chamber In Figure 3 25 the temperature in a chemical reaction chamber is determined by the temperature of the heated oil surrounding it Heating
111. to be Points For Rate Selected at 1 4 second scan rate compatible with scan rate Type Does Not Exist A function block type was loaded that does not Re program or re load correctly exist For example you loaded a Profile but the unit does not have the Profile option Type Incompatible With Analog output type is different from hardware Change programming to be Hardware setting For example analog output is compatible the with hardware or vice programmed as current output CAT but versa then reload configuration or hardware is set to voltage output VAT reconfigure the block Type Requires Hardware Hardware is missing for the programmed Either ignore the message knowing analog output or discrete output relay that those particular points did not get loaded or verify configuration and make sure that the points that are in the configuration match the hardware components Undefined Function Internal Error Block Request No user action Value Written to An input has been connected and user has Avoid changing connected values Indirected Point tried to write a value to that input For example if a control loop setpoint is connected to Al1 OV you will receive this message if you try to change the loop setpoint online X Axis Must Increase Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Function Re program Xn lt 1 Generator and if Xn gt Xn 1 X Axis Not Increased Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Func
112. transmitter signal to generate a pH measurement This measurement will be OV which in turn will be applied to LP1 s process variable input PV Before the 4 to 20 mA signal is applied to it will be converted to a 1 to 5 VDC signal with a 250 shunt resistor will be configured to generate a pH measurement in a range from 0 RANGE LOW 0 to 14 RANGE HIGH 14 in response to a voltage input between 1 CKT LOW z 1 and 5 CKT HIGH 5 VDC The PID algorithm of the control loop function block will adjust the value assumed by LP1 OV between 0 and 100 This 0 to 100 signal will be applied to AOI which will be configured as a DAT type analog output The internal parameter of IMPULSE TIME in AOI is the DAT analog output s cycle time or period With a specified impulse time of 150 seconds an arbitrarily picked value the DAT output will be ON for 75 seconds and OFF for 75 seconds when the input from is set to 50 The ON and OFF times will be determined completely by the output levels called for by LP1 Finally to externalize the ON and OFF output states of AOI to the outside world the output relay represented by the DO1 function block will be programmed for AO1 s exclusive use Hence as AOI switches between ON and OFF states in response to LP1 OV s 96 output levels so too will the DO1 output relay to generate the pulses required to drive the caustic reagent pump Split Output or Duplex Control 1
113. types The default setting is F If you change the default be sure to change the analog inputs RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH values accordingly The instrument will not adjust these values by itself Ignore the TEMPERATURE UNIT prompt or set it to NONE if the analog input being programmed will not be used for temperature measurements Note that the term direct generally applies to input types where the sensors in direct physical contact with the monitored process are also in direct physical contact with the instrument terminal board The term indirect applies to inputs from transmitters since the sensors in direct physical contact with the monitored process are indirectly connected to the instrument through the transmitter circuitry and wiring Appears only if INDIR or SQRT was previously selected Is the actual low end value of voltage to be used for Indirect measurements Appears only if INDIR or SQRT was previously selected Is the actual high end value of voltage to be used for Indirect measurements Circuit low and circuit high units LAG is a time constant applied to the input measurement value This provides digital filtering LAG to the measurement Lag appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 6 Standard Algorithm Prompts continued Promp
114. when leaving the loop program sequence Diagnostic routines are executed at this time to verify all entries are complete and compatible A FAIL message at this time may indicate incomplete entries or incompatible selections Split output tuning Programming loop parameters Minimum programming requirements 12 00 When programming Split Output control loops tuning parameter set 1 is automatically applied to output values between 0 and 100 Tuning parameter set 2 is automatically applied to output values between 0 and 100 Control loop programming may require entry of numerical values analog parameters or discrete parameters as determined by the specific loop feature In some cases the choices may be a numeral an analog parameter or OFF For parameter choices refer to Table 3 5 for definitions of the discrete and analog parameter types available OFF or NONE are listed as menu choices where applicable Scroll to locate Many of the prompted entry fields for control loops are optional As a general rule the minimum entry information for control loops includes the Process Variable PV with range limits setpoint value some combination of gain reset and rate and a source for the feedback In most cases the feedback source will be the back calculation output BC value of the analog output AO function block VPR amp VRX User Manual 89 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 8 Loop Characteris
115. which if CAUTION gt b Pit OOK not avoided may result in property damage WARNING PERSONAL INJURY Risk of electrical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc may be accessible Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Functional earth terminal Used for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement NOTE This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Chassis Ground Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Chassis Groun
116. white pen color for a white background or a black pen color on a black background these will render your points invisible continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 161 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 63 Assign Displays To Keys Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition DISPLAY 1 FORMAT Select one of the following display formats Figure 4 19 and DISPLAY 2 Figure 4 20 The corresponding format will be shown when the Display keys are pressed NONE V_TREND Vertical Trend VTRNDDIG Vertical Trend Digital DISPLAY 10 VTRNDBAR Vertical Trend w 4 Bars VRX 150 H_TREND Horizontal Trend HTRNDDIG Horizontal Trend Digital HTRNDBAR Horizontal Trend Bar V 3 BAR 8 point Vertical Bar Graph V 4 BAR 4 point Vertical Bar Graph VRX 150 V 6 BAR 6 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 8 BAR 8 point Vertical Bar Graph VRX 150 V 12 BAR 12 point Vertical Bar Graph VRX 150 4 BAR 4 point Horizontal Bar Graph VRX 150 H 6 BAR 6 point Horizontal Bar Graph VRX 150 PANEL 4 4 point Panel Display VRX 150 PANEL Panel Display VPR 100 VRX 100 UNIT DATA Unit Data Display PANMETER Panel Meter ALARMSUM Alarm Summary STORAGE Storage Status TOTALIZR Totalizer LOOP BAR Loop with Bar Graph LOOP 2BS Loop 2 Bar Summary LOOP 3BS Loop 3 Bar Summary LOOP 4BS Loop 4 Bar Summary SPP 2BS Setpoint Profiles 2 Bar Summary SPP 3BS Setpoint Profiles 3
117. will continue for the time period specified Enter a starting value or OFF at the time of configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Rate 1 is the rate for the first set of tuning parameters Rate 2 is for the second set Variable Rate1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RT Program Constants Section 4 16 Determines the period of time for a repeat of the proportional gain output Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Reset 1 is the time for the first set of tuning parameters Reset 2 is for the second set Variable Reset1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RS See Program Constants Section 4 16 A value of OFF may be entered to allow proportional only control When turned off the manual reset value determines the loop output at setpoint Bumpless manual to automatic transfer is canceled when proportional only control is selected This value restricts the calculated integral value of the loop during Cold Start or on a manual to automatic transfer Enter a bias value to be used in calculating the working set point of the ratio control loop This is essentially a value that will be added to the product that results when RATIO SETPOINT is multiplied by the ratio loop s wild variable input value For example in the fuel air ratio control s
118. 0 00 0 00 00 SP 0 00 SEG1 9 READY 0 00 Figure 6 2 Setpoint Trend Display With Menu 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 221 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Live or Replay Trends With a live vertical or horizontal trend is displayed Figure 6 3 press Tab key to access the Point Detail menu When replaying stored trends this menu is always displayed From this menu you can press the Tab key again to advance the scoreboard at the top of the display to the next point in the trend Also you can press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons to scroll the trend forward or backward in time TEMP7 1941 5 DEGF 500 0 DEGC 050 7 2061 5 DEG BIN 25000 CN Y 7 l iia VALUE2 4 TAG3 Tras A values N 4 N y ES I le 1115 3 VALUES pH LAI
119. 00 0 1 typical 1 7 1 0 0 083 0 150 2 IPTS 68 the other channels 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 1 Italicized values indicate overall input range 3 Accuracy for the calibrated channel The factory calibrates channel 1 If calibrated on channel 1 channel 6 may be as much as 5 0 Degrees F higher If using all 6 inputs for CU10 it is recommended to field calibrate on channel 3 or channel 4 to minimize the correction needed Use Analog Input Value Adjust screen to compensate 11 Introduction Table 1 4 Standards This product is designed and manufactured to be in conformity with applicable U S Canadian and International IEC CENELEC CE standards for intended instrument locations The following Standards and Specifications are met or exceeded Case Protection VPR100 amp VRX100 only Rear of Panel With the proper panel mounting with the required gasketing and with the front bezel firmly closed the instrument meets the criteria for NEMA Type 3 Enclosure for protection from rain and sleet as described in NEMA Standard 250 1991 Sec 6 4 2 2 IEC 529 IP 20 EN 60529 IP 20 Flammability Rating Vibration Level UL 94 V2 5 to 15 Hz 1mm displacement 15 to 150 Hz 0 5g acceleration Electromagnetic Compatibility CE EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Safety CE Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 61010 1 For US ANSI ISA S82 1994 For Canada CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 92
120. 00 READY SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 622 0 ISP 405 00 1040 00 1622 00 4244 00 71 00 820 20 OUT 150 OUT 10 0 OUT 150 OUT 100 OUT 59 four 150 100 5 0 50 SEGMENT 1 SEGMENT 15 00 00 00 01 30 00 SP A SP2 SP SP2 M 5 1 la st Ms Mes hes REND TREND Loop 2 Bar Summary Loop 3 Bar Summary Loop 4 Bar Summary Setpoint Profiler 2 Bar Summary LOOP 2BS LOOP 3BS LOOP 4BS SPP 2BS SP1 5 2 SP3 SP1 PROFILOi sw 100 00 200 00 1500 00 T 4 1 i 4 T 1 0 00 200 00 100 00 l READY END 40 00 71 00 820 20 PV 241 27 10530 SEG 1 15 00 91 19 00 00 00 01 30 00 SP 248 00 secs RUN TREND TREND TREND Setpoint Profiler 3 Bar Summary SPP 3BS Setpoint Profiler Trend SP TREND Figure 4 19 Displays Accessible by the Display Buttons continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 153 Programming Function Blocks and Features TEMP TEMP2 TEMP3 TEMP4 DEWPOINT IN TEMP IN 1000 00 500 00 250 00 500 00 42 DEGF 252 DEGF 500 0 500 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 510 00 282 00 124 00 273 00 DEGF DEGF DEGF DEGF s 4 Point Vertical Bar Graph 8 Point Vertical Bar Graph 12 Point Vertical Bar Graph V 4 BAR V 8 BAR V 12 BAR
121. 1 2 and thicker 8 mm 5 16 and cut t bar as noted in Step 3 of Table 2 1 16 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation Mounting adjacent instruments VPR100 amp VRX100 Horizontal For closest spacing horizontally spacing of 7 mm 0 28 will provide zero clearance between bezels of adjacent instruments For applications where instruments will be opened frequently for access to floppy disk increase this spacing slightly to avoid the possibility of adjacent instruments touching when opening or closing Vertical Space must be allowed for opening an instrument s bezel Recommended vertical spacing is 60 mm 2 37 between cutouts Seismic Mounting VRX100 12 00 1 Determine the thickness of the panel 3 18mm 125 min 6 36mm 250 max that the unit will be mounted into Measure the mounting holes on the angle brackets Holes that are 13 34mm 525 from the face of the angle bracket are used for mounting units on panels that are 3 18mm 125 thick Holes that are 10 16mm 400 from the face of angle bracket are used for mounting units on panels that are 6 18mm 250 thick Remove the protective backing from one of the gaskets and apply to the face of the angle bracket that will contact the rear of the panel Repeat the process for the second angle bracket See Figure 2 1 Place the recorder in the panel cutout While holding the unit from the front of the panel attach the top amp bot
122. 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 53 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 10 How to program input parameters A function block has two types of programmable parameters input parameters and function block parameters When in a function block s Program menu if a menu item has choices OFF a number or PARM then the menu item is an input parameter to that function block That is if you choose PARM you can connect the input parameter to another function block s output code How to connect an input parameter to another function block 54 One way to program an input parameter is to connect it to an output parameter from another function block We will show you this procedure using a specific function block s input parameter but the keystrokes used in the procedure will apply when you are making any input parameter connection Loop CONTROL output ANALOG OUTPUT 1 LP2 OV a INPUT Number SETPOINT 2 SOURCE H FAILS AFE Figure 3 12 Example Input Parameter Connection Assume we want to make the connections shown in Figure 3 12 We want Analog Output 1 a current output to get its input from Control Loop 2 s output value Therefore we must program Analog Output 1 s Input Source parameter with the output code that represents Control Loop 2 s output value The following procedure shows how Table 3 6 Output Code Connection Procedure 1 In the Program Analog Outp
123. 2 00 Split output or duplex control loops are typically used in heat cool applications Temperature is controlled through simultaneous use of both heating and cooling elements If the instrument was to support a heat cool control configuration an example of the control scheme that might be dealt with is illustrated in Figure 3 23 INSTRUMENT PV 85 SP as OUT 73 5 VALVE 4TO20mA ACTUATOR CAT I FES HOT gt WATER HOT WATER VALVE 4 TO 20 mA EN Nc 1000 PLATINUM RTD VALVE ACTUATOR COLD WATER j COLD WATER N VALVE WATER TANK Figure 3 23 Temperature Control Of Water Using Split Output Or Duplex Control The instrument must be set up to produce two 4 to 20 mA control signals By applying them to current controlled valve actuators coupled to hot and cold water valves these signals will regulate the amount of hot and cold water introduced to the vessel to maintain the water temperature at whatever set point will be programmed The temperature of the water will be measured by means of a three wire 100 Platinum RTD This process may be likened to manipulating hot and cold faucets regulate water temperature VPR amp VRX User Manual 65 Programming and Operating Concepts 66 In Figure 3 24 the analog input function block is depicted processing the resistance values produced by the RTD The resulting water
124. 20 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 2 Interacting With Primary Displays Interacting with Setpoint Profile Summary Displays When any Setpoint Profile Summary display is shown Figure 6 1 press Tab to move cursor to the TREND text below each bar graph then press Enter to go to the Setpoint Trend display for that profile See Interacting with Setpoint Trend Display below 200 00 1500 00 100 00 200 00 1500 00 200 00 100 00 0 00 200 00 100 00 READY END RUN READY END 71 00 820 20 40 00 71 00 820 20 SEGMENT 1 SEGMENT 15 P SEG 5 SEG 1 SEG 15 00 00 00 01 30 00 00 21 13 00 00 00 01 30 00 TREND a EN REND TREND TREND TREND 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 RUN RUN READY HOLD 40 00 70 00 50 00 50 00 SEG 5 SEG 2 SEG 1 SEG 6 00 21 13 00 10 08 00 00 00 01 23 00 TREND TREND TREND TREND Figure 6 1 Setpoint Profile Summary Displays Interacting with Setpoint Trend Display When a Setpoint Trend display is shown Figure 6 2 press the Tab key to display options for controlling the profilers execution See Section 5 5 for details on these options SP1 PROFILO 5 HOLD RESET ADVANCE SHUTDOWN EVENTS DETAIL SUMMARY ZH LOAD PV
125. 3 Change lithium battery on CPU card 4 Replace CPU CLOCK RESET 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit 3 Change lithium battery on CPU card 4 Replace CPU TIMING ERROR 1 Reprogram clock 2 Reset unit 3 Change lithium battery on CPU card 4 Replace CPU TASK ERROR 1 Reset unit COMM PORT ERROR 2 Clear configuration and reload 3 If message recurs replace CPU RAM ERROR 1 Run RAM diagnostic 2 Replace CPU 1 Check communications card seating 2 Replace communications card 3 Replace CPU VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments 9 7 Loop Error Indicators When a loop s PV SP2 or other parameter fails the loop switches to its default failsafe condition indicated by certain display symbols flashing To return the loop to its desired condition correct the failure Then if the loop s LATCHING is NO the loop will return to normal automatically If LATCHING is YES also perform the action needed to return the loop to normal Table 9 10 Abnormal Loop Conditions And Indicators Desired Condition Abnormal Condition Default condition Flashing Action needed Failsafe symbols if LATCHING YES Auto amp SP2 SP2 Failure Working SP SP1 SP2 Select SP1 then SP2 Manual amp SP2 SP2 Failure Working SP SP1 SP2 Select SP1 then SP2 Auto amp SP2 SP2 amp PV Failure Working SP SP1 SP2 Select SP1 then SP2 AUTO Select Manual then Mod
126. 37 W x 295 mm D 5 39 H x 5 39 W x 11 61 D Weight VPR100 amp VRX100 3 6 kg 8 lbs VRX150 5 4 kg 12 lbs Ports Standard QWERTY Keyboard Connector 5 pin DIN type on front panel behind bezel May be used to connect to QWERTY keyboard or to ASCII Barcode Reader Environmental Temperature Operating 0 C to 50 C 32 F to122 F Storage 20 C to 70 4 F to 158 F Relative Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing at 40 C Altitude 2000 meters Installation II Category Pollution Degree 2 Power Universal supply 85 to 265 Vac 50 60 Hz 45 VA Optional 24 Vdc supply 21 6 to 26 4 Vdc 1 4 A Fuse Rating 2 0 amp 250 Vac slow blow type Not replaceable by operator continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 5 Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Attributes Display Type Color LCD active matrix Update Rate 1 second Trend Timebase 5 min 15 min 30 min 1 hr 2 hr 4 hr 8 hr 24 hr 7 day 31 day VPR100 amp VRX100 Screen Size 139 7 mm 5 5 diagonal Resolution 320 x 240 pixels VRX150 Screen Size 264 2 mm 10 4 diagonal Hesolution 640 x 480 pixels Keys Data Storage 12 membrane keys Media 1 44 or 120 Mbyte disk Data Types Analog points calculations discrete status alarms diagnostics Trends VRX100 VPR100 3 max 6 points max each VRX150 4 trends ma
127. 4 Table 4 73 Unit Data Prompts ce tree etr eg Re E PO RC ter Uie rE OSES EES 175 Table4 74 Storage Allocation Prompts ee tete ipee ge eii tee ilte t 177 Table 4 75 Capacity of 1 44 Megabyte Floppy Disk sese enne nennen 178 Table 4 76 Capacity of 120 Megabyte Disk seeeseeeeeeeeeneren eene enne 179 Table 4 77 120MB Zip Preinitialization Procedure eene nennen nennen nenne eene 180 Table 4 78 Filename Extensions Of Data Storage Types sesesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeen nennen nennen nennen enne 181 Table 5 1 Example of Segment Events etie ttem reti Lou E reed 192 Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen nennen ens 195 x VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 6 5 Table 6 6 Table 6 7 Table 6 8 Table 6 9 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 8 6 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 Table 9 5 Table 9 6 Table
128. 42mos 10year 21 6 5hrs 13days 27days 8 1 163days 27mos 54mos 1 3 26 yrs 49hrs 10day 20days 62days 124days 20mos 41mos 10year 20 12 39hrs 19 6 1 6days 49days 98days 1 6 32mos 98 16 5 28hrs 144hrs 12days 36days 72days 12mos 24mos 72mos 1 For combinations not shown above use the formula on the left for an estimate of storage disk capacity Use the formula on the right to estimate the amount of time trend data will be stored to the buffer while the floppy disk is removed Estimated 298 R Estimated 26 Trend Disk z R Trend Buffer R Capacity Hours Fa Capacity Hours i R Storage Rate for Trend 1 in seconds Capacity Factor for Trend 1 based on number of points Re Storage Rate for Trend 2 in seconds F2 Capacity Factor for Trend 2 based on number of points Storage Rate for Trend 3 in seconds Capacity Factor for Trend 3 based on number of points Capacity Factors Number Of Points Factor F1 Fe or Fs 0 0 00 1 14 00 2 20 16 3 26 52 4 33 60 5 38 76 6 45 81 7 50 4 8 56 0 9 63 0 10 72 0 11 84 0 12 84 0 178 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Pointsper Rate Of Sto
129. 65 Kit 11 1314 DI DO MOTHERBOARD 75 Kit 18 Pu TYPICAL MOUNTING OF or 74 Kit 18 PLASTIC STANDOFFS 6 DO CONFIGURATION MOUNT USING 9 DO MODULES MOUNTED 7 USING DETAIL 63 77 Kit amp 27 DETAIL 75 65 Kit 11 DI DO MOTHERBOARD 5 2 o Kit s DO1 amp 00218 3 D 4 DO CONFIGURATION ons pora call MODULE S MOUNTED MAINCPU se KEHO or 15 USING DETAIL 63 um 00 nmm m 80 Kit 29 or 31 ix SA UL mmm 40 Kit 26 27 Kit 28 16 OR 32 POINT DI DO CONFIGURATION PLUGS INTO REAR OF FLOPPY DISK DRIVE PLUGS INTO BOARD OF POSITION 2 RED STRIPE EN PU 34 Kit 27 S Pa E d 2 kit 26 29 Kit 24 PART OF 44 KIC 26 DETAIL 29 35 Kit 26 28 Kit 27 30 Kit 23 34 Kit 27 2 34 KIT427 4 P 2 Kit 26 or 27 27 Kit 27 d rs 50 Kit 12 5 U m T s t 1 43 Kit 12 Sa Kit 33 i SS od 073 Kit t 17 POWER SUPPLY BASE ANALOG MOUNT DETAILS 66 AND 73 OUTPUT BOARD 46 Kit 10 USING DETAIL 63 Figure 11 6 Exploded view of instrument card cage 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 287 Parts 84 Kit 27 85 Kit 27 ue 59 Kit 5 1 or 3 60 Kit 1 56 Kit 27
130. 65 Settings for expanded AT Lan ges ce sicuti p eet re hne be eta o ae eese returns 266 51 DIP Switch Default Settings eee ener nennen 267 DIP Switch Settings For DI DO Combinations eese nennen nennen nennen enne 260 VPR amp VRX User Manual xi Table 9 8 Diagnostic Error Messages eesseesseeeeseeeeeee nennen nennen eene ennt tene tenete ee terne nete enter eter ene enne ens 271 Table 9 9 Internal Error Messages intere teet eio ie ipeo eden 273 Table 9 10 Abnormal Loop Conditions And Indicators eren 275 Table 10 1 Error eere e erit eite ette re este tie tei e tns 277 Table Tel Parts eoe RUE UR bU US UE EEEE ENR bes ob UE REI t EE pe UE RUE 281 Table Appendix A 1 Security Bypass Procedure enne enne eene tenete neret enne 291 Table Appendix B 1 External Wiring eee ket tentent treiber eei iere Eor ERS TEET 297 Lable Appendix B 2 MOV DEVICES sonet REPRE URS DIR SEU EA EIE EDS 299 Table Appendix B 3 Coil Voltage vs Resistor Voltage Rating xii VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Figures Figure sca facies bts ebat tee ete oreet be See DU IR e Ue DRE EE Ce 1 Figure 1 2 VRX100 with Control eese enne e tene trente ener etne innen eene 2 Figure 1 3 VRX100 without Control Ee tre eR Cet eere e reete ri pe ete
131. 75 mV 0 02 0 03 0 009 mV per C 200 to 1000 mV 0 02 0 24 0 037 mV per C 200 to 5000 mV 0 03 1 56 0 150 mV per C 0to10V 0 5 50 1 86 mV per C 10 to 10 V 0 5 100 0 045 mV per C 0 to 20 V 0 5 100 1 86 mV per C 20 to 20 V 0 5 200 0 255 mV per C 10 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction Table 1 3 Analog Input Accuracy Non linear types Accuracy at Calibration Temperature Accuracy Temperature Effects C Range F C Thermocouples ITS 90 except where noted 2190 18 to 1199 0 1 2 2 0 005 0 009 18 to 1371 0 1 2 5 0 005 241 268 to 152 0 6 13 7 0 005 0 009 151 to 999 0 1 2 3 1 184 to 19 0 3 3 0 0 002 0 003 700 18 to 371 0 1 1 0 2372 18 to 1300 0 1 24 13 0 005 0 009 949 43 to 509 1 2 38 3 Be 0 002 0 003 3300 510 to 1816 01 32 18 R 0 to 3210 18 to 1766 0 1 3 2 1 8 0 002 0 003 S 0 to 3210 18 to 1766 0 1 32 1 8 0 002 0 003 W5 W26 0 to 4200 18 to 2316 0 1 4 2 2 3 0 005 0 009 PLAT 12 100 to 2500 73 to 1371 01 26 14 0 005 0 009 NI NIMO 32 to 2502 0 to 1372 0 1 2 5 1 4 0 005 0 009 RTD 100 to 155 73 to 68 0 1 0 4 0 2 0 005 0 009 156 to 310 69 to 154 0 2 0 8 0 4 PT1002 300 to 1570 184 to 854 0 1 1 9 1 1 0 005 0 009 Pyrometry Rayotube amp Spectray Types 18890 3302 750 to 1600 399 to 871 0 1 typical
132. 8 for an explanation of the various warning messages 3 Examining replay data For details on examining replay trend data see Section 6 2 Interacting With Primary Displays To examine replayed alarms events and diagnostics use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow keys Reading Data Storage Messages See Data Storage Messages in Table 6 8 for message descriptions 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 239 Online Operation Using Menus 7 4 Access Summaries Summaries are available for all points alarms and diagnostics in the instrument Display alarm summary 240 Alarms are set up as part of the instrument configuration procedure Section 4 13 Up to 16 alarms can be configured An alarm can be assigned to any analog data point Analog Input Analog Output or Calculated Value and can be one of these types Alarm type Function HRATE High Rate HIGH Alarm when input value gt setpoint value LOW Alarm when input value lt setpoint value DEV Deviation Alarm when input value deviates above or below compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value LDEV Low Deviation Alarm when input value deviates below compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value HDEV High Deviation Alarm when input value deviates aboveow compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value Alarm when input value increases at rate gt setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are p
133. 9 B essel CONDITION FREEFORM pesut lovnos _ LOGIC gt E EQUATION CONDITION m G 4 H _ Figure 4 7 Free Form Logic Signal Flow Table 4 27 describes the Free Form Logic prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 27 Free Form Logic Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition EQ Symbol for AND operator Symbol for OR operator Symbol for XOR operator NEG Symbol for NOT operator A D G Symbols for Input A through Input Letter O is the symbol for output CVn OS from the previous logic calculation Use for iterative calculations 1 One ON 0 Zero OFF Expressions enclosed by parentheses are evaluated first INPUT INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Up to 8 input sources 1 Resets the output to OFF 0 Use when using the letter O 1 in equations RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 CONDITION TYPE NONE DELAY EXTEND See Table 4 20 on page 111 PULSE RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 on page 111 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 119 Programming Function Blocks and Features Order of evaluation 1 Parentheses 2 NOT 3 AND 4 OR XOR Example equation using operators and inputs A B C computes the result of A OR B AND C Table 4
134. A SP2 M SP1 Loop 2 Bar Summary Loop 3 Bar Summary LOOP 2BS LOOP 3BS LP1 1 2 1 4 LOOPT 1000 00 1500 00 1200 00 2400 00 AUTO SP1 12 15 1 mi PV 2205 00 J SP 2000 00 1 4 3 1 K DEV 205 00 998 leur 1 yo OUT 83 5 Pv 405 00 105400 62300 1266 00 ISP 405 00 1040 00 622 00 1244 00 100 OUT 15 0 10 0 5 0 5 0 18000 51 52 51 51 Loop 4 Summary Loop with Bar Graph LOOP_4BS LOOP_BAR Figure 6 7 Loop Displays When the Loop w Bar Graph Loop 2 Bar Loop 3 Bar or Loop 4 Bar display is shown you can e select Auto or Manual control mode for the loop e change loop output e change the setpoint value e switch to the Loop Tuning display for Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 toggle for tuning parameters and pretuning Detailed instructions for performing these interactions are described in Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Interacting With Loop Displays To perform this action Do these steps Move the cursor box to Press the Tab key to move the cursor to the Loop Tag at the top of the display another area of the display then to the setpoint value then to the loop output value if loop is in Manual mode Toggle the loop between Press Auto Manual button Auto and Manual modes To use the Auto Manual button all of the following conditions must be met 1 Loop must be in Local mode which means FORCE REMOTE MAN discrete parameter must be OFF 2 DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete par
135. AIL ENABLE MASTER OPERATOR SETPOINT REVIEW SECURITY SECURITY sec CoDE gt SET sec cope P AUTO MANUAL gt 5 1 5 2 PROFILE PROGRAM DATA STORAGE UNIT BAUD DOWNLOAD L SERIAL COMM L ADDRESS PROTOCO RATE PARITY LOCKOUT DATE Lp CLOCK HOURS MINUTES MONTH DAY YEAR FORMAT STORE CONFIG STORE CALIB LOAD CONFIG LOAD CALIB LOAD STORE CONFIG TO DISK TO DISK FROM DISK FROM DISK 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual Figure 3 7 PROGRAM mode MAIN MENU 37 Programming and Operating Concepts MAIN MENU MAINTENANCE SETMODE MAINTENANCE PI CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 Hp INPUT 5 INPUT 6 gt ee e P INPUT 412 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 3 ourPur 4 OUTPUT 4 CALIBRATE ANALOG oureurs Low HIGH Low Low gt Low RAM SIZE KEYBOARD DISPLAY DISK READ OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS Mans L ple CLEAR CONFIGURATION DATABASE SERVICES ONLY RESET UNIT PE PRODUCT INFORMATION MAINS FREQUENCY WARM START TIME i DEMO CLEAR CALIBRATION ONLY WRITE TEST INCREMENTAL CLEAR ALL MEMORY FULL UPGRADE UPGRADE SOFTWARE UPGRADE l 38 Figure 3 8 MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU VPR amp VRX Use
136. After selecting ENTER LABELS choose an item such as Analog Inputs to label Use the prompts in Table 4 3 All text and numeric keys may be used for labels no characters are prohibited To cancel an entry press the ESC key on the QWERTY keyboard or press the Menu button on the front panel VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 3 Labels for Function Blocks Prompt Range Selections Definition DESCR Enter 16 characters maximum Called a descriptor Usually appears as a header or title on some displays and reports For alarms this is the actual alarm message If labeling is enabled the descriptor can be edited in the function block s program menu TAG Enter 7 characters maximum Identifies the point or function on most displays and reports Each tag must be unique f labeling is enabled the tag can be edited in the function block s program menu UNITS Default choices Shows units of measure for analog values PSI DEGR GAL MA on most displays and reports This list of BAR K LPH units be changed under the MW MV LPM PH ENGINEERING UNITS menu item If GPH V LPS KG labeling is enabled the units can be edited in the function block s program GPM OHM LITR GRAM menu GPS HZ DEGC LB DEGF ON STATE OFF ON FILL DRAIN Select a label describing the ON 1 state UP DOWN EMPTY FULL of the discrete function These labels can START STOP IN OUT not be changed LOW HIGH OPEN CLOSED
137. Auto Man button when the DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete is ON 1 AUTO MAN SELECT ON 1 Manual mode AUTO MAN SELECT OFF 0 Automatic mode When DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 AUTO MAN SEL has no effect Change Action Input Selects the opposite control action from that selected for the control action see CONTROL ACTION Control action is opposite when the discrete value is ON or 1 When Reverse Acting Control is selected the loop output will increase as the process variable becomes less than setpoint and will decrease as it becomes greater than the setpoint When Direct Acting Control is selected the output action is opposite DISCR VS KEY SEL DUAL TUNING SEL OFF discrete parameter O 1 OFF discrete parameter O 1 Discrete vs Keyboard select When this discrete is ON 1 the Auto Man and Setpoint buttons are disabled their functioning is transferred to the AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT discretes See AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT Status changes made by AUTO MAN SELECT and SETPOINT SELECT will remain when DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 When ON 1 selects the second set of tuning constants 82 A bumpless transfer integral term adjusted calculation will be made on transition 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 93 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition ENGINEERING Select letter Units of measu
138. Bar Summary VPR 100 VRX 100 SPP 4BS Setpoint Profiles 4 Bar Summary VRX 150 SP TREND Setpoint Profile Trend PRO SUM Process Summary VRX 150 ANALOGS Analog Summary VRX 150 DISCRETE Discrete Summary VRX 150 NUMBER Appears if a trend bar graph loop or setpoint profile trend format is selected Select which data group to be displayed Example if the format is LOOP BAR enter 2 to display Loop 2 data Example if the format is V TREND enter 1 to display Trend 1 data ROTATION RATE Appears if panel trend or bargraph display format is selected Select number of seconds each point will be shown on the panel display or at the top of the trend or bargraph displays 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 162 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 19 Enable Features Features can be restored to or removed from menus and displays simply by turning them On ENABLE or Off DISABLE here Disabled functions and their data are not destroyed or erased they just cannot be viewed on the display For example a programmed constant retains its value and continues to function in calculations whether it is disabled or enabled Table 4 64 Enable Features Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition EXPANDED INPUT ENABLE DISABLE from the Analog Input Programming menu DISABLE removes the LAG and SAMPLE HOLD functions
139. Clamp Installation CE 303 VPR amp VRX User Manual 293 B 2 Potential Noise Sources Overview Noise can enter electronic equipment via three methods of coupling namely e Capacitive or electrostatic e Inductive or magnetic e Impedance Capacitive and inductive coupling Capacitive and inductive coupling have the same essential effect they couple current or voltage without any actual connection of the two circuits Impedance coupling requires a connection between the two circuits Typical noise generating sources that could affect electronic equipment through capacitive and inductive coupling include e Relay coils e Solenoids e AC power wires particularly at or above 100 Vac e Current carrying cables e Thyristor field exciters e Radio frequency transmissions Impedance coupled noise Impedance coupled noise may enter by way of the lines used to power the digital equipment or by way of improper grounding Most power lines at typical industrial locations are far from noise free The noise on them can be generated in many ways but are nearly always associated with switching circuits of some nature These include e arge relays Contactors e Motor starters e Business and industrial machines e Power tools e HID high intensity discharge lights e Silicon controlled rectifiers SCRs that are phase angled fired 294 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00
140. D CE Mark Compliant E CSA NRTL c plus CE Mark Compliant Software Support 0 None B SCF and SDA Software Packages C SCF configuration software D SDA data analysis software for PC Case Mounting 0 Standard Case Mounting P Portable Case HR LUN R Rear Cover aura S Seismic Mounting dec T Standard Case Mounting 24V Inst Power Standard Case Rear Cover 24V Inst Power Communication 0 None C RS485 Binary RTU VRX100 only Figure 1 6 VRX100 VRX150 Model Number 14 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation 2 Installation What s in this section The following topics are covered in this section Installing optional DSU software 15 Site preparation 15 Location 16 Mounting 16 Wiring 20 ATTENTION If the instrument is used in a manner not specified by Honeywell the protection provided by the instrument may be impaired 2 1 Installing optional DSU software If your instrument is equipped with the optional 120MB or Zip disk drive you should have received a floppy disk containing DSU EXE the Data Storage Utility This software lets you use your PC to initialize 120MB or Zip disks for data storage in a fraction of the time it would take on the instrument To install the DSU EXE onto your PC simply copy the program onto your hard drive You can create a folder called DSU if you want 2 2 Site Preparation The instrument is a complex elect
141. DATA ENTRY Adjust function values and states SETPOINT PROFILES Edit profile parameters Store and load programs TUNE LOOP Enter loop tuning values Pretune loop REVIEW PROGRAMMING View all programming read only 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 233 Online Operation Using Menus 7 2 Set Mode Select this item to change the operating mode of the instrument to Program or Maintenance These operating modes are discussed in Sections 4 7 and 8 7 3 Data Storage Overview Data Storage lets you store trend data unit data alarms events and diagnostics for later review onscreen or on a PC with SDA software Setup and configuration of Data Storage is described in Section 4 26 online operation is described here Typical online data storage tasks 1 Removing installing and labeling disks 2 Initializing new disk using the current Data Storage setup schedules 3 Checking current storage setup 4 Starting and stopping storage 3 methods a Start stop all storage via ENABLE STORAGE menu b Start stop a particular storage file s storage via its external enable discrete c Start stop all storage batches via BATCH STATE menu item or via BATCH CONTROL discrete 5 Checking storage status with DATA STORAGE STATUS display 6 Replaying data stored on disk 7 Reading data storage messages Installing a disk The disk must be DOS formatted Formatting may be done at a PC or in the instrument with DATA STORAGE me
142. DI8 DI16 DI8 COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM DO17 DO1 DI17 DO1 DO17 DO1 DI17 DO1 DO18 DO2 DI18 DO2 DO18 DO2 DI18 DO2 DO19 DO3 0119 DO19 DO3 0119 DO3 DO20 DO4 DI20 DO4 DO20 DO4 0120 DO4 DO21 DO5 DI21 DO5 DO21 DO5 DI21 DO5 DO22 DO6 0122 DO6 DO22 DO6 0122 DO6 DO23 DO7 DI23 DO7 DO23 DO7 0123 DO7 0024 DO8 0124 DO8 DO24 DO8 0124 DOs 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 269 On Site Adjustments 9 5 Setting The Communications Link Termination Jumper The last unit in the communications link must be terminated and all other slave units in the link must be unterminated or data transfer will not function properly Units are shipped from the factory with terminations set for unterminated operation To terminate an instrument jumpers W2 and on card 046925 in Slot 1 must be both set in the 1 2 position To remain unterminated jumper W2 and W3 must be in the 2 3 position See Figure 9 6 To gain access to the circuit card follow instructions in Section 9 1 For serial communication wiring see Communications Wiring in Section 2 5 Main CPU Card Position 2 See Figure 11 5 Jumpers W2 and W3 Figure 9 6 Location of Jumpers W2 and W3 270 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments 9 6 Diagnostic M
143. E 5 Analog Input Accuracy Linear types neret nene trennen reet nest 10 Analog Input Accuracy Non linear ener nene ennt nene enr en tenter entente 11 STAD ATS test vaste E 12 Panel Mounting Procedure 3 2 3 cere teg pee tede ese erbe ree Perte cbe Eee 16 Screw Lengths for Panel Thicknesses eese nennen nennen eene nee 16 Terminal Designators And Their Associated Applications sesesseeeeeeeeeneeeenne 20 Optional Cards for Terminal Board TB3 sss nennen enne 21 Optional Cards for Terminal Boards TB3A amp TB3B essere eene 22 Optional 12 PT AI Card Terminal Boards TB3A amp TB3B eee nennen 23 Recommended Minimum Wire Size sesessesseseeeeeeee enne nennen trennen eren enne nene 24 Communications Connectiofis cce Oron lette d ceste ve erem te re ERE NEIN 29 Communications Wiring Procedure esee ener ener nennen 29 Button Functions i Yee ee eR Le niea eet eet 39 QWBRTY Key Equivalents e ro hU eret n e sine EG P RUE TERRE ER 44 Front Open Close Procedute eee eee pete ede ee ripped 46 Function Block Oe HE D REID aie Ente ut E ERO TE pk 49 Function Block Parameter Designators eese enne nennen 52 Output Code Connection Procedure
144. Features 4 9 Program Analog Outputs Outputs 1 3 are CAT or VAT types used for control and or retransmission Remaining outputs are DAT types used for control only The relay outputs must be present to use these DAT outputs If the instrument will be used for control program the loops first See Program Control Loops in Section 4 8 Select an analog output to program To change an analog output s hardware from CAT to VAT see Section 9 3 Analog output type Select the output type from Table 4 11 Table 4 11 Analog Output Types ype as displayed Full name of output type CAT Current Adjusting Type Current output VAT Voltage Adjusting Type Voltage output DAT Duration Adjusting Type Time proportioning output POS_PROP Position Proportion Type Table 4 12 shows the prompts for each type of Analog Output Table 4 12 Prompts For Analog Output Types CAT VAT DAT POS_PROP IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS IN DECIMAL POS OUT DECIMAL POS INPUT SOURCE INPUT SOURCE INPUT SOURCE INC SLEW LIMIT SENSITIVITY IN LOW LIMIT DEC SLEW LIMIT DRIVE UNIT SPEED IN HIGH LIMIT IMPULSE TIME SLIDEWIRE INPUT OUT LOW LIMIT MIN ON TIME POS ALGORITHM OUT HIGH LIMIT MIN OFF TIME INC OUTPUT RELAY INC SLEW LIMIT FAILSAFE DEC OUTPUT RELAY DEC SLEW LIMIT FAILSAFE VALUE FAILSAFE OUTPUT RELAY FAILSAFE VALUE Table 4 13 describes each prompt 100 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Pro
145. Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 15 Here the function block diagram is drawn to include the key components of a typical loop feedback path The AOI function block has been changed to feature a second output denoted AO1 BC This output has been connected to a feedback input at LP1 identified by the notation FB The 1 designator stands for Analog Output 1 s Back Calculation When the control loop is brought on line AO1 BC will essentially represent the value of AO1 s 4 to 20 mA output at any particular instant The term Back Calculation is used to reinforce the idea that this information is being sent upstream against the flow of all other information within the function block diagram VPR amp VRX User Manual 63 Programming and Operating Concepts Time Proportioning Relay Driven Pump 64 A second control scheme is to use a relay to produce a time proportioning or Duration Adjusting Type DAT control signal Such an application is depicted in Figure 3 21 LINEAR pH INSTRUMENT TRANSMITTER 4 TO 20 mA DAT CONTROL SIGNAL CAUSTIC REAGENT WASTE WATER TREATMENT VESSEL WITH IMMERSION STYLE pH AND MIXING IMPELLER Figure 3 21 Control Of Wastewater pH Using A Time Proportioning DAT Control Signal This application requires a basic time proportioning control loop to monitor and control the pH of the wastewater to a local set point of 7 pH units T
146. Graph 1 Prompts nennen nennen 159 Table 4 60 Set Up Panel Display Prompts eese enne eene teen 159 Table 4 61 Set Up Unit Data Display nenne nennen trennen tren nne 159 Table 4 62 Set Up Profile Display Prompts essere 160 Table 4 63 Assign Displays To Keys entren trennen ens 161 Table 4 64 5 163 Table 4 65 Security Prompts nene iei ep ek n Hester pei E Ho rui ES EEE ERO Erne r ETE PECS rE 164 Table 4 66 Serial Communications Prompts eesessesseseseeeeeeeeerenrenne trennen entren tenete ene 165 Table 4 67 Set Clock Prompts codeine edere od ett teen Me TREE 166 Table 4 68 Access Config Files eene en rennen tre tene tree trennen innen 167 Table4 60 Suggested Scan Rates sten eie tre ERR OTRO GTC RID RR I e COR EGER RE 168 Table 4 70 Data Storage Setup Procedure onesie ee one enne ener ea nE PEIER 170 Table 4 71 Prompts For Storage Setup Of Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics esee 172 Table 4 72 Stored Events dE een ene ieee 17
147. Honeywell VPR100 VRX100 VRX150 User Manual 57 77 25 15 4 12 00 Sensing and Control Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2000 by Honeywell Revision 4 12 00 WARRANTY REMEDY Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship Contact your local sales office for warranty information If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective The foregoing is Buyer s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifications may change without notice The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing However we assume no responsibility for its use While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell web site it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application Sensing and Control Honeywell 11 West Spring Street Freeport Illinois 61032 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 About This Document Abstract This manual describes the installation configuration operation and maintenance of the VPR100 Video Programmer Recorder the VRX100 Video Recorder and the VRX150 Video Recorder Contacts World Wide Web
148. IDENTIFYING Pretune is identifying process dynamics as a result of a setpoint or output change This process may take up to 4 to 6 process time constants See Table 7 12 3 CALCULATING Identification is complete and calculation of new tuning parameters is in process See Table 7 12 4 COMPLETE Calculations are complete and new parameters are ready to replace the loop s tuning parameters if desired See Table 7 13 NOTE While using Pretune it is recommended that Overshoot Suppression is turned off With overshoot suppression on Pretune may not work or may give inaccurate tunings Pretune STOPPED menu Table 7 11 describes the Pretune STOPPED prompts Table 7 11 Pretune STOPPED Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition STATUS This is a read only prompt Status stopped PV This is a read only prompt Current process variable value of the loop being tuned OUTPUT This is a read only prompt Current output value of the loop being tuned SETPOINT This is a read only prompt Current working set point value of the loop being tuned TUNE SET Select which set of tuning If tuning a split loop set 1 applies to loop output between 0 parameters 1 or 2 will and 100 set 2 applies to loop output between 0 and 100 be pretuned and installed OPTIMIZE Select SET PT or LOAD This optimizes the new tuning parameters according to their intended use that is controlling changes in setpoint or process load OVERSHOOT
149. IMIT AOn DS AOn DEC SLEW LIMIT AOn HS AOn IN HIGH LIMIT AOnLS AOn IN LOW LIMIT AOn IT AOn IMPULSE TIME type DAT COMM CONSTANT YES or NO A constant can receive its value from a remote host The remote value can then be plotted via the constant on a trend for display or to data storage YES The constant when written to remotely via serial communications with Binary and Modbus Protocols is written only to the RAM copy of the instrument configuration but not to the nonvolatile flash copy When the instrument cold starts the constant reverts back to any value that was manually set with the instrument s displays That is after a cold start or power cycle the constant s value is the last value as set by the instrument and not as set by the remote host NO The constant when written to remotely via serial communications Binary and Modbus will be written to the RAM copy of the instrument configuration and also to the nonvolatile flash copy After a cold start the constant s value is the last value as set by the Local User Interface or the remote host 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 149 Programming Function Blocks and Features Destination defined To program Loops and Analog Outputs you select the Program Control Loops or Program Analog Outputs from the Program Mode Menu then program each menu item Some of these menu items such as proportional band or slew limits are function block parameters that is t
150. ITTEEN VAATIMUKSET Sy tt j nnite 85 265 V AC DC Taajuus 50 60 Hz Teho 45 VA Sulakearvo 2 A 250 V AC DC KAYTTOOLOSUHTEET Ala k yt laitetta paikassa jossa on syttyvi nesteit tai kaasuja koska laitteen k ytt aiheuttaa r j hdysvaaran L mp tila ymp r iv 0 50 C Varastossa 20 70 C Kosteus 10 90 RH non condensing 40 T rin 5 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 150 Hz Kiihtyvyys 0 5 g LAITTEEN ASENNUS Piirturi on asennettava paneeliin siten ett per liitimille j riitt v sti CONSIGNES SECURITE FR21 6047 Pour r duire tout risque de d charge lectrique qui pourrait provoquer une l sion corporelle respectez toutes les consignes de s curit de cette documentation Ce symbole avertit l utilisateur d un risque lectrique potentiel lorsqu il peut avoir acc s des l ments sous tension Borne de mise la terre Destin e au raccordement du conducteur de mise la terre de l alimentation e Sil quipement est utilis dans un but non sp cifi par le constructeur la protection fournie avec cet quipement peut tre affect e e Aucun composant ou pi ce ne doit tre remplac s il n est pas explicitement sp cifi comme tel par le constructeur e Tous les c blages doivent tre conformes aux normes locales et doivent tre r alis s par un personnel autoris et exp riment e de masse doit tre raccord e avant tout autre c
151. Installation Analog Input Connections See Table 1 1 Specifications for acceptable voltage and current signal inputs Connect current and voltage inputs to the appropriately labeled terminals as in Figure 2 5 CAUTION Safety isolation exceeding the safe working level of 30 V RMS 42 4 V peak is not provided between analog inputs If the working voltage of any analog input exceeds this level use suitable wire gauge and insulation on all analog inputs and use proper safety precautions when handling all analog input wiring ATTENTION 12 00 For current inputs shunt resistors are not provided When required current shunts are mounted on these terminals see Figure 2 5 Use Part No 311285 for 4 20 mA input conversion to 1 5 V Thermocouples may be grounded or ungrounded since each point is isolated using solid state relays Connect RTD input leads to the proper terminals for the RTD input card Note that an RTD has three leads The A B and C leads must be equal length and gage i e the same resistance In the same instrument avoid the following input ground connections e Both a thermocouple input tied to ground an RTD input tied to ground The thermocouple measurement would be incorrect e Athermocouple at a common mode voltage and an RTD tied to ground The common mode voltage would be connected to the ground e Athermocouple at a common mode voltage and an RTD which is ungrounded The common mode v
152. LE STORAGE and EXTERNAL ENABLE both must be enabled for BATCH CONTROL to function The instrument will automatically assign a number internally to identify the batch for storage For example data stored between the first start and stop is marked as Batch 1 When the next batch starts the instrument will increment the batch number These numbers identify the batches for later retrieval BATCH Accessed under DATA STORAGE Shows the number 1 255 of the active batch The NUMBER batch number is assigned automatically by the instrument when the batch is started by either method BATCH CONTROL or BATCH STATE 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 237 Online Operation Using Menus Checking Data Storage Status The Data Storage Status display is accessed under Data Storage on the main online menu It is also 238 accessed by pressing any display button if the button has this display assigned to it See Figure 7 1 Time remaining for each trend days hours minutes Number of remaining samples for alarms events diagnostics and unit data Status of system disk and Enable Storage gt ALARM SAMPLES DATA STORAGE STATUS 13 15 DD HH MM 2 10 15 r TREND 1 HI EVENT SAMPLES gt DIAG SAMPLES UNIT DATA SAMP gt SYSTEM NORMAL gt 5 NORMAL 2 lt 2 lt lt lt pen ENABLE STORAGE ENABLE 1 HIGH Status of external enable Y Ena
153. Labels For Internal Function Block Parameters Note that the internal parameters that we have specified in the function block diagram built up so far are based largely on what can be inferred from the elements of the control configuration depicted in Figure 3 15 These internal parameters will relate directly to settings found in instrument programming menus that exist for each particular function block As your experience and familiarity with programming the instrument increases you will become more familiar with some of the less intuitive parameters and you will include these in your diagrams 5 Connect the blocks 62 The next step is to connect the function blocks in the diagram Refer to Figure 3 19 The interconnection lines drawn depict the flow of information between function blocks and represent how the blocks work together to support the complete control strategy As shown the furnace zone temperature measurement that generates will essentially be used as the process variable of the LP1 control loop Based on the values of the loop s tuning constants and on how far OV deviates from the 500 set point the control loop function block s PID algorithm will accordingly adjust LP1 OV to whatever value will be necessary to maintain the process set point LP1 OV which ranges from 0 to 100 96 will in turn be applied to AO1 s input to drive the 4 to 20 mA control signal applied to the valve actuator By modulating the valve ac
154. Ltd Mlynske nivy 73 PO Box 75 820 07 BRATISLAVA 27 SLOVAKIA Tel 421 7 52 47 400 425 SPAIN HONEYWELL S A Factory Josefa Valcarcel 24 28027 MADRID SPAIN Tel 34 91 81 3 61 00 SWEDEN HONEYWELL A B S 127 86 Skarholmen STOCKHOLM SWEDEN Tel 46 8 775 55 00 SWITZERLAND HONEYWELL A G Hertistrasse 2 8304 WALLISELLEN SWITZERLAND Tel 41 1 831 02 71 TURKEY HONEYWELL Otomasyon ve Kontrol Sistemlen San ve Tic A S Honeywell Turkey A S Emirhan Cad No 144 Barbaros Plaza C Blok Kat 18 Dikilitas 80700 Istanbul TURKEY Tel 90 212 258 18 30 UNITED KINGDOM HONEYWELL Unit 1 2 amp 4 Zodiac House Calleva Park Aldermaston Berkshire RG7 8HW UNITED KINGDOM Tel 44 11 89 81 95 11 U S A HONEYWELL INC INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS DIV 1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE PA 19034 3260 FT WASHINGTON U S A Tel 215 641 3000 VENEZUELA HONEYWELL CA APARTADO 61314 1060 CARACAS VENEZUELA Tel 58 2 239 0211 Honeywell Sensing and Control Honeywell 11 West Spring Street Freeport IL 61032 57 77 25 15 Rev 4 0101 Printed in USA www honeywell com sensing
155. M Latches Push toward center of instrument to release Sub bezel PC Molding Figure 9 1 Circuit Card Removal VPR100 amp VRX100 Table 9 2 Circuit Card Replacement Procedure VPR100 amp VRX100 Step Action Place the rear of the card cage assembly into the opening Lift it up and over the limit stop then push it all the way back into the housing 2 Press the unit back to fully engage the rear card edge connectors and until both front latches snap into place and the PC molding is flush with the sub bezel See Figure 9 1 3 Pull on the lower bail linkage to verify that the unit is fully seated and firmly latched then close the front display assembly Engage the top edge of the bezel first then swing in the bottom and press it in until the button latch snaps into place VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments Circuit Card Removal and Replacement Procedures VRX150 Table 9 3 Circuit Card Removal Procedure VRX150 1 Remove the 4 screws from the top and sides of the display front Do not drop the display front 2 Disconnect the 2 ribbon cables at the display 3 Disconnect the 6 wire connector at the front of the assembly next to the floppy disk drive 4 With one hand pull the handle to remove the circuit card assembly out of the instrument 5 The assembly sub chassis will strike a stop when it is almost all the way out Lift the back end of the card cage to clea
156. Manual 51 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 5 Function Block Parameter Designators Function Function Block Output Parameter Name Parameter Block Name code Type Type Al Analog Input OV Output Value Analog SY System Parameter RT Reference Junction Temp Analog BN Batch number of data storage Analog PN Currently running program number Analog AG Alarm Global Discrete AH Alarm High Discrete AL Alarm Low Discrete DF Diagnostic failure Discrete DG Diagnostic General Discrete SF Storage Full Discrete SW Storage Warning Discrete AX Analog Safe Parameter Analog DX Discrete Safe Parameter Discrete 1 1 or Start Key on keyboard Discrete F2 F2 or Hold Key on keyboard Discrete F3 F3 or Reset Key on keyboard Discrete AO Analog Output OV Output Value Analog BC Back Calculation Value Feedback Analog S2 Process Variable AO s input Analog DI Discrete Input OS Output State Discrete DO Discrete Output OS Output State Discrete LP Control Loop OV Output Value Analog PV Process Variable Analog DV Deviation Value Analog WS Working Setpoint Analog 51 Setpoint 1 Value Analog S2 Setpoint 42 Value Analog BC Back Calculation Value Cascade feedback Analog AM Auto Manual Status Discrete SS Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Status Discrete ON OFF Loop only OS Output Status Discrete 52 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 5 Function B
157. Min On Time 5 seconds The output will not come on unless the input source is 2 596 For instance if input source 396 output would be on for 3 of impulse time or 3 seconds but since 3 seconds is less than the Min On Time output will not turn on Example 2 Impulse Time 150 Min On Time 3 seconds The output will not come on unless the input source is 2 296 For instance if input source 196 output would be on for 196 of impulse time or 1 5 seconds but since 1 5 seconds is less than the Min On Time output will not turn on MIN OFF TIME OFF or number The minimum off time in seconds for the output If the input OUTPUT RELAY SENSITIVITY DRIVE UNIT SPEED Select discrete output channel NUMBER OFF NUMBER OFF source calls for the output to be off for less than this time the output will not turn off at all Example 1 Impulse Time 100 Min Off Time 5 seconds The output will not turn off unless the input source is s 9596 For instance if input source 98 output would be off for 296 of impulse time or 2 seconds but since 2 seconds is less than Min Off Time output will not turn off Example 2 Impulse Time 150 Min Off Time 3 seconds The output will not turn off unless the input source is s 98 For instance if input source 99 output would be off for 1 of impulse time or 1 5 seconds but since 1 5 seconds is less than the Min Off Time output will not turn off This is the discrete
158. N LINE to SETPOINT GAIN 10 ig RESET 1 1 via SP Set Point Select key on instrument s RATE 0 front bezel Figure 4 1 Function Block Configuration of a Typical Ratio Control Loop When the ratio control loop in Figure 4 1 is brought ON LINE its ON LINE display must be accessed to allow the instrument s SP Set Point Select key to be operational To make the working set point of the ratio control loop equal the equation WILD VARIABLE X RATIO SETPOINT RATIO BIAS you must select the TUNE LOOP menu item TOGGLE SETPOINT SOURCE so that an SP2 is seen in the loop s ON LINE display Note that within the ratio control loop s programming menu accessed under PROGRAM CONTROL LOOPS you will not find a SETPOINT 2 menu choice The ratio control loop function block operates with the formula WILD VARIABLE X RATIO SETPOINT RATIO BIAS assuming all the functionality of the ratio loop s second set point Switching the working set point of a live ratio control loop from SP2 to SP1 will essentially suspend any ratio control and cause the loop to behave like a standard PID controller This standard PID loop will have a local set point equal to the value programmed for SETPOINT 1 To control the process variable using a fixed set point that is independent of the loop s WILD VARIABLE input toggle the ratio control loop s working set point to SP1 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 99 Programming Function Blocks and
159. NO Definition Used for all input parameters of the loop Select interactive YES or non interactive NO for the control algorithm operation Interactive causes the Gain Rate and Reset terms to interact to make up the proportional term of the algorithm similar to analog controllers In non interactive the proportional term is simply related to Gain LATCHING MANUAL OFF MANUAL RESET YES NO OFF discrete parameter 0 1 100 to 100 Select the desired action required after a failure to the failsafe status When the loop s PV or Setpoint 2 fails the downstream function block activates its failsafe See Table 9 10 Default condition column If latching YES when the failure is corrected the operator must take specific action to cancel these failsafe measures and return theloop to normal operation See Table 9 10 for action needed If latching NO when the failure is corrected the loop will automatically return to normal operation with no action needed by the operator When this discrete input goes ON 1 it causes the control output to go off This feature functions only when OFF is entered for RESET Enter a value equal to the desired loop output when the process variable is at setpoint This allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the process variable up to setpoint OUTPUT LOW LIM amp OUTPUT HIGH LIM OFF or number For cascade primary loop set to P
160. OCK TYPE INPUT PARAMETER FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETER PARAMETER CODE Figure 3 14 Example Configuration Table 3 11 Example Configuration Procedure Function block type Full name as displayed in the Program 2 Select this and program it 3 Select this and program input parameter with this output Function block it with this menu from the function code See Section parameter from the choice See 1 Select this menu item from block s menu 3 10 for details function block s Section 3 11 the Program menu menu for details Al 1 ANALOG INPUT 1 TYPE J LP 1 LOOP 1 Pv AM OV SETPOINT 1 1500 FEEDBACK 1 AL 1 ALARM 1 INPUT Alt OV SETPOINT 500 ACTION HIGH DO 1 DISCRETE OUTPUT 1 INPUT AL1 OS E E AO 1 ANALOG OUTPUT 1 INPUT LP1 OV TYPE CAT 58 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 13 How to program common configurations Being able to diagram a control configuration in terms of function blocks makes it easier to program and configure your instrument for its intended process control application This function block diagram you create can be used as a construction blue print to program the instrument Each block in the diagram relates to a dedicated instrument programming menu in the instrument s PROGRAM mode What follows are examples where common control configurations are presented along
161. OURCE Operation of the loop using SETPOINT 1 will be indicated by the presence of an SP1 symbol on the loop s display SP2 will be the symbol observed when the loop is operating using SETPOINT 2 While SETPOINT 2 may be programmed as a numerical value it may also be used as a remote set point input to the loop You may link SETPOINT 2 to any of several analog parameters that include the Output Values of analog input or calculated value function blocks If used as a remote set point input SETPOINT 2 s value may not be manually changed from within any live ON LINE mode control loop displays 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 97 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition SOFT PID YES NO Soft PID action YES causes the control algorithm to not calculate proportional output corresponding to errors resulting from changes to setpoint The algorithm will adjust its Reset Integral term to a value required to maintain the present output when the setpoint is changed Normal proportional action should occur for all changes and variations to the controlled variable SP INC SLEW LIMIT amp Enter a number Working setpoint slew limits for increasing and decreasing SP DEC SLEW LIMIT slew rates Variable slew limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with IS or DS See Program Constants Section 4 16 SP LOW LIMIT a
162. PB or GAIN Select whether gain or proportional band will be used for tuning the control loop GAIN 1 OR GAIN 2 Enter a value of 0 1 to 200 Gain is the proportional gain entry for the control loop The for Gain or 0 5 to 1000 0 for value entered here is the gain applied to the error signal to Proportional Band Enter determine the loop output For example a 10 change in OFF to allow integral only process variable with respect to the input range from a control Variable Gain1 or balanced condition will result in a 10 change in output PB1 is available by when a gain of 1 0 is used Enter a starting value at initial programming a constant s configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop Destination with GN or PB tuning If an indirect source is specified as in an adaptive See Program Constants gain configuration the value can only be altered at the Section 4 16 source Gain and Proportional Band are interchangeable values Proportional Band 100 Gain For loops with dual tuning Gain 1 is the gain for the first set of tuning parameters Gain 2 is for the second set HYSTERESIS Enter 0 100 of PV span Deadband value prevents excessive output oscillation when using ON OFF control 94 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Prompt IN DECIMAL POSITION INTERACTIVE Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Range Selections Select decimal position YES
163. PRESS ENTER TO SAVE press Enter to save your changes or press Menu again to exit the session without saving the changes 88 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 8 Program Control Loops Control Loop Programming Structure Programming a control loop requires configuring at least 3 function blocks an Analog Input a loop algorithm and an Analog Output AO The term AO is applied to any type of control output current CAT voltage VAT or time proportioning DAT The structure of the instrument permits many variations on this concept by allowing Calculated Values CVs both digital and analog to be used as inputs to the different parameters within the control algorithms It also allows a single parameter to be read by any number of function blocks in the unit Loop Characteristics Table 4 8 lists loop characteristics to be aware of when configuring your instrument Characteristic Choice of algorithm type Gain or proportional band Table 4 8 Loop Characteristics What to be aware of Two PID algorithm types interactive and noninteractive Noninteractive is the default type however this may be changed PB is the default however this may be changed 7 loop types available If the loop type is changed after a configuration is completed all previously programmed entries will be deleted Diagnostic routines You will be prompted to save your entries
164. Procedure The profiler is held at its present value and the continues Run time stops Events are held at Action Result Notes 1 Place profiler in Hold See Profiler Hold procedure in Table 5 14 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profile menu is displayed Table 5 13 2 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Profiler is reset to segment 1 All profiler timers Reset Press Enter are reset All events go OFF Profiler output goes to starting value of segment 1 ATTENTION A profile can also be RESET by pressing the RESET or button but only if that profiles RESET RUN parameter was configured as SY1 F3 See Section 5 3 214 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler How to advance a profiler to the next segment Table 5 16 Profiler Advance Procedure Action Result Notes 1 Place profiler in Hold See Profiler Hold procedure in Table 5 14 2 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Profiler advances to next segment Each press of Advance Press Enter Enter advances the profiler one segment If at the last segment the profiler advances to the first segment If it is a multiphase profile the profiler advances within the batch phase only Events assume their segment states 3 To resume running the profiler select Start Profile resumes running from the new segment How to shut down a profiler Table 5 17 Profiler Shutdown Procedure Action Result Notes P
165. RESET RUN HOLD ACTIVE TRUE FALSE READY ABORT LEFT RIGHT ALARM NORMAL DECRS INCRS AUTO MANUAL LOAD UNLOAD SP1 SP2 COOL HEAT NO YES PAUSE OFF STATE See ON STATE for default choices Select a label to describe the OFF 0 state of the discrete function These labels can not be changed 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 83 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 4 Other Labels Range Selections Enter up to 16 characters to specify a label for the instrument Definition The unit name appears on all Data Storage floppy disks coming from this instrument ENGINEERING Enter up to 4 characters to change You can change the 25 engineering units UNITS available engineering units from the available in Table 4 3 as UNITS defaults PSI DEGR GAL MA To reset the 25 engineering units to their BAR K LPH 96 defaults select RESET DEFAULTS MW MV LPM PH GPH V LPS KG GPM OHM LITR GRAM GPS HZ DEGC LB DEGF FILENAMES Enter up to 6 characters to change These filenames will appear as choices on available filenames from these defaults FILE CYCLE DRYER PROD RECORD TANK UNIT LOOP REACTR CONFIG KILN VESSEL CALIB WCHEM PRESS FURNCE DEMIN CONTRL BATCH FERMTR LEHR LINE STRLZR OVEN ZONE other menus To reset the filenames to their defaults select RESET DEFAULTS 84 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 7 Program Analog Inputs To program An
166. ROL LOOPS P 1 LP2 LP3 1 4 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 mal DISCRETE INPUTS DH 012 013 moe DH4 DHS 016 ourPur 1 y OUTPUT 2 ouTPUT s OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 23 OUTPUT 24 E al DISCRETE OUTPUTS DO1 DO22 DO23 DO24 CALC CALC CALC CALC CALC CALC CALCULATED VALUES VALUE 1 VALUE AS DARDI 32 ALARM 1 ALARM 2 ALARM 3 ALARM 1 ALARM 19 ALARM 19 gt ALARMS AL1 12 AL3 tue See eo gt 114 gt 115 116 p TOTALIZER 1 TOTALIZER 12 L TOTALIZERS TL1 eee TL12 PROFILE 1 PROFILE 4 PROFILE 4 PROFILE gt PROFILES bi SP1 5 2 SP3 5 4 CONSTANT 1 CONSTANT 2 CONSTANT 3 __ CONSTANT 14 CONSTANT 15 _ CONSTANT 16 CONSTANTS gt CN2 CN3 efe e CN14 5 BLOCK FROM TO COPY gt COPY BLOCK P CHANNEL CHANNEL BLOCK DIGPLAYS SET UP SETUP SETUP BAR SET UP BAR SET UP PANEL SET UP UNIT SET UP PROFILE ASSIGN DISPLAY TREND 1 P TREND 2 GRAPH 1 GRAPH 2 DISPLAY DATA DISPLAY DISPLAYS TO KEYS EXPANDEI AI VALUE DIDO REVIEW DISK FEATURES BUT Lplevroueray rie ALARMS gt consranre gt m sonny ZOOM CUSTOM TIMEBASE POINT INPUT SELECT DET
167. RR 2345 54 01 12 59 04 12 97 PROCESS 3 HRATE TEMP 9 CURR 1234 56 01 12 59 04 12 97 A D DISK FULL Figure 6 8 Alarm Summary Display Refer to section 7 4 Access Summaries for details 228 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 3 Display Messages and Symbols Overview Messages and symbols will appear in different areas of the display to inform the operator of a variety of conditions The area across the bottom of the display Figure 6 9 is reserved for messages that require the operator to take action They include Active Alarm Symbols Diagnostic Messages and Data Storage Messages Location The Alarm and Diagnostic messages consist of a symbol on the left side of the display and a text message next to it on the right The Data Storage message has no symbol and includes only the text portion Multiple messages If multiple messages are present simultaneously they will be arranged in a cascaded or shingled arrangement so that underlying symbols will be visible data storage on top diagnostics in the middle alarms on bottom Example of primary display Figure 6 9 shows an example of a primary display The Scoreboard individual point BOILER7 2305 5 DEGF 12 15 36 11 15 13 15 36 3300 00 Messages DISK FULL Diagnostic Data Storage Figure 6 9 Example of Primary Display 12 00 VPR amp
168. RX User Manual 12 00 Installation Discrete Output Connections The instrument has the following discrete output types e Mechanical relay e Solid state AC DC e Open collector Make connections according to Figure 2 10 See Table 1 1 Specifications for output signal specifications switch characteristics for output circuit card modules The solid state relay switches are each optically isolated and also fully isolated from all other outputs For common power interconnect all module commons see Figure 2 10C Power to all modules is supplied by the user The relay will provide protection by removing power to the outputs whenever system power is lost ATTENTION In exceptional cases where the device connected to a relay contact requires a very low nominal energizing current it is possible that the current through the snubber network capacitor s located on the circuit card and used to protect relay contacts from arcing when the relay contacts are open will be sufficient to continue to energize the relay To prevent this unwanted energizing install a load resistor in parallel with the device ATTENTION The solid state relays have minimum output current requirements See solid state relay specifications in Table 1 1 If these requirements are not met the discrete output may not turn on DO1 2C Or fo DO1 2C Qj OA NC o o Dot Ne O DO DO1 uot Mechan
169. SHOOT GAIN OVERSHOOT LATCHING PV TRACKING PV TRACKING FEEDBACK OUTPUT WILD VARIABLE PV TRACKING TRACKING SOFT PID SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD FORCE REMOTE PV TRACKING SOFT PID MAN FEEDBACK FEEDBACK FEEDBACK continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 91 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 9 Control Loop Type Menu Selections continued STD ADV SPLIT ON OFF CAS P CASS RATIO DIAT FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD CHG ACTION SOFT PID FEEDFORWARD GAIN INPUT FEEDFORWARD FEEDFORWARD CHG ACTION DUAL TUNING FEEDBACK FEEDFORWARD GAIN GAIN INPUT SEL GAIN OUTPUT OUTPUT DUAL TUNING DISCRVSKEY FEEDFORWARD OUTPUT TRACKING TRACKING SEL SEL TRACKING FORCE REMOTE FORCE REMOTE DISCRVS KEY SETPOINT FEEDFORWARD FORCE REMOTE MAN MAN SEL SELECT GAIN MAN CHG ACTION CHG ACTION SETPOINT AUTO MAN OUTPUT CHG ACTION INPUT INPUT SELECT SELECT TRACKING INPUT DUAL TUNING DUAL TUNING AUTO MAN INTERACTIVE FORCE REMOTE DUAL TUNING SEL SEL SELECT MAN SEL DISCRVS KEY DISCR VS KEY OUTPUT LOW RESET LIMIT CHG ACTION DISCR VS KEY SEL SEL LIMIT INPUT SEL SETPOINT SETPOINT OUTPUT HIGH LATCHING DUAL TUNING SETPOINT SELECT SELECT LIMIT SEL SELECT AUTO MAN AUTO MAN INTERACTIVE DISCR VSKEY AUTO MAN SELECT SELECT SEL SELECT INTERACTIVE INTERACTIVE lResetumr SETPOINT INTERACTIVE SELECT RESET LIMIT RESET LIMIT LatcHNG AUTO MAN RESET LIMIT SELECT LATCHING LATCHING INTERACTIVE LATCHING RESET LIMIT LATCHING 92 VPR a
170. SPLAY ALL Ly DISPLAY ALL DELETE ALL PRODUCT SUMMARY HISTORY DIAGNOSTICS ANALOGS DISCRETES DIAGNOSTICS INFORMATION ACCESS SUMMARIES H EDIT ALARM ADJUST ANALOG SET ANALOG RESET RESET ALL BATA ENTRY gt setpoints P EPIT CONSTANTS INPUTS gt outputs gt torauzers TOTALIZERS SETPOINT PROFILES H gt EDIT PROFILE 1 gt EDIT PROFILE 2 HH EDIT PROFILE 3 HH EDIT PROFILE 4 T a ORT H gt EROI DSK Z Y LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY TUNE LOOP H gt LOOP 1 H gt LOOP 2 H LOOP 3 H LOOP 4 Figure 3 6 ON LINE mode MAIN MENU VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts MAIN MENU PROGRAM SET MODE procral SCAN RATE SELECT LANGUAGE gt ANALOG ANALOG DISCRETE DISCRETE CONTROL CALCULATED SETPOINT LABELS b INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS LOOPS EARNS VALUES TOTALIZERS PROFILES INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 12 ANALOG INPUTS 12 AI3 aa D as 6 oe gt 112 LOOP 1 2 LooP 3 LOOP 4 gt CONT
171. Segment 3 Value Time duration of soak Value value of soak Segment 1 Value Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Time Time Rae Time Figure 5 5 Rate Ramp Type ATTENTION Rate ramp type s TIME prompt is in engineering units of the PV not in time units seconds minutes or hours VPR amp VRX User Manual 189 Setpoint Profiler External Ramp Type This ramp type works with the RAMP INCREMENT discrete input During a ramp segment each time RAMP INCREMENT changes from OFF to ON the profiler output incrementally changes by the amount specified in the ramp segment s TIME in units of the PV When RAMP INCREMENT changes from ON to OFF the profiler output soaks at its present value This increment soak repeats until the profiler output reaches the VALUE of the next soak segment The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used Ramp Type External First and last segments must be soaks No consecutive ramps or Soaks Time amount profile will change toward next soak Value when the Ramp Increment discrete switches on Value not used wih ramp segment Time duration of soak Value value of soak Segment 3 FSS SS SSeS SS SS Satay Segment 2 Time Wee et Segmert 2 Time Segment 1 Segment 2 Time SS Se Se Segment 1 V Segment 3 Time Time lap Ramp Increment Off to On Segm
172. T 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 05 POINT 3 os OFF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 05 ON POINT 4 os ON POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 ov 152 3 DEGF POINT 1 05 POINT 1 05 POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 ov 342 5 DEGF POINT 2 05 CLOSED POINT 2 os CLOSED POINT 3 ov 126 7 POINT 3 ov 126 7 DEGF POINT 3 05 HIGH POINT 3 os HIGH POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 ov 486 1 DEGF POINT 4 os LOW POINT 4 05 LOW A TEMP 1 H IGH Analog Points Summary Discrete Points Summary Vertical Trend w 4 Bar ANALOGS DISCRETE VTRNDBAR PRESS 3 ZONE1 R 9P2 SP3 SP4 0 00 v00 0 00 0 00 RUN RUN READY HOLD a 40 00 70 00 50 00 50 00 SEG 5 SEG 2 SEG 1 SEG 6 pror taser 00 21 13 00 10 08 00 00 00 01 23 00 Bur iso 04000 TREND TREND TREND TREND s 5 Panel Display 4 Large Font Setpoint Profiler 4 Bar Summary Process Summary PRO SUM Points PANEL 4 SPP 4BS Contains these screens Horizontal Trend Bar HTRNDBAR 4 Loop Bar Summary LOOP 4BS Panel Meter PAN METER Figure 4 20 VRX150 Displays Accessible By The Display Button 154 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Display Setup Procedure Table
173. TION TYPE NONE DELAY EXTEND See Table 4 20 PULSE RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 109 Programming Function Blocks and Features Operator GT Greater than 2 degrees Input 1 gt Input 2 Result switches ON nput 2 Input 1 gt Hysteresis esult switches OFF Figure 4 4 Compare s Greater Than Result With Hysteresis 110 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 20 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts Condition type Application If this is true then CVn OS is NONE Result Result Condition type Application If this is true then CVn OS is DELAY Filters short pulses Result switches ON 1 for n ON n seconds minus Delays rising edge of Result for seconds 2 CONDITION TIME CONDITION TIME CONDITION TIME Result switches OFF 0 OFF 0 Condition Type Delay Condition Time 3 seconds If Result is 2 least 3 sec Not on at least 3 sec Condition type Application If this is true then CVn OS is EXTEND Used for interfacing with slower Result switches ON 1 for n ON 1 for n seconds plus circuits seconds then OFF 0 CONDITION TIME then OFF 0 Extends falling edge of Result ON with no delay for CONDITION TIME Result switches ON 1
174. V AC DC OMGIVELSER Instrumentet m ikke opereres i n rheten av lettantennelige v sker eller gasser Bruk av elektriske instrumenter i slike omgivelser utgj r en sikkerhetsrisiko Temperatur omgivelse 0 til 50 C lagring 20 til 70 C Fuktighet 10 til 90 HR ingen kondensering 40 C Vibrasjon 5 til 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 til 150 Hz akselerasjon 0 5 g UTSTYRSINSTALLASJON Pass p montere panelene p regulatoren slik at ber ring av terminalene p baksiden forhindres INSTRUC ES DE SEGURANCA PO21 6047 Para reduzir o risco de choque el ctrico que pode causar danos corporais seguir todas as normas de seguran a contidas nesta documenta o Este s mbolo avisa o utilizador sobre um eventual perigo de choque quando s o acess veis voltagens sob tens o perigosas Terminal de protec o de terra Fornecido para liga o do condutor do sistema da protec o de terra OAS e Se este equipamento for usado de modo n o especificado pelo fabricante a protec o fornecida pelo equipamento pode n o ser adequada se deve substituir qualquer componente ou pe a que n o seja explicitamente especificado como substitu vel pelo nosso revendedor e Toda a cablagem deve estar de acordo com os c digos el ctricos locais e deve ser realizada por pessoal experiente devidamente autorizado e O terminal de terra deve ser ligado antes de ser feita qualquer outra cabelagem e desligado em ltimo lugar
175. V LOW LIMIT and PV HIGH LIMIT of the cascade secondary loop respectively OUTPUT TRACKING PROCESS VARIABLE PROP BAND 1 amp PROP BAND 2 PV LOW LIMIT amp 0 100 Analog parameter OFF OFF analog parameter number OFF or number This will be the loop s output value when the FORCE REMOTE MAN input to the loop is high 1 See Force Remote Man Process variable for the loop See GAIN 1 OR GAIN 2 Enter the high and low limits for the process variable being PV HIGH LIMIT controlled Loop tuning parameters are based on the span selected by the high and low limit values PV TRACKING PV OFF A selection of Process Variable PV will cause Setpoint 1 of the control loop to track the process variable when the loop is in Manual mode A transfer to Automatic mode will maintain the tracked setpoint value as the working setpoint of the loop unless the loop was operating from Setpoint 2 prior to the transfer to Manual 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 95 Programming Function Blocks and Features Prompt RATE 1 amp RATE 2 RESET 1 amp RESET 2 RESET LIMIT RATIO BIAS Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Range Selections 0 02 10 00 minutes 0 005 99 99 repeats minute OFF or 100 to 200 Definition Modifies the loop output based on the rate of change of the process variable The output is modified by a value that assumes the rate of change of the process variable
176. VIe Wu ied ORE die nter EEUU LEER D EET EUIS UR eee elena dede 219 Interacting With Primary Displays eese nennen eene nennen nennen trennen nenne 221 Display Messages and Symbols eese nennen nene 229 ONLINE OPERATION USING MENUS eene 233 cau C I 233 Set MOdE ete eie aee iere eer ee e tona 234 Data Storage x eeu Sits daa ea adii Rene ates 234 Access S mMari S Le ree Re UR Eel Peta Ada celica Ded 240 Dat ENY oe tette eete tette e et tci tob cit tosta 244 Setpoint Profiles seps ient iere 246 Tone Pom 247 Review Pro ramtining etii dete teet ete tb se n ete eoe rd Ere bdo et esee es 254 VPR amp VRX User Manual vii 8 MAINTENANCE 255 MENEO Tuum 255 5 2 Routine Maintenant s o rette tee d eet ERR E E ERE PEE dent ee ERR PEL eR e Cea c EE RR ER 257 8 39 Set Mode uade qUp DRE Hist e 257 8 4 Calibrate Analog emet petere epe eerte petere eee etie ehe eee dede tees 257 8 5 Calibrate Analog OUtpUults c eee 258 8 6 Off line Diagnostics reme hehe een eae ne 259 5 7 Database Services oue eR ee eee ee eer tege de DEE EPOR e ELI ges 260 5 5 Re
177. VRX User Manual 229 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Description of Messages and Symbols Table 6 8 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display Message Symbol Color Description followed by text Red An active alarm exists Flashes while unacknowledged When the description of alarm operator acknowledges the alarm the flashing will stop The symbol and text will remain until the alarm has cleared D followed iby text Blue A diagnostic error has been detected Flashes while doschptibn etdiadHostic unacknowledged The symbol and text will remain until the operator acknowledges or deletes the diagnostic in the online Access Summaries menu Color Description shown low to high priority UPDATING DISK Yellow Instrument is flushing all buffered data to the disk CHECKING DISK Yellow Whenever the front panel has been opened and closed the INITIALIZING Yellow instrument checks that a properly formatted disk is installed and ready to receive data Initialization is in progress DS INIT FAILED Yellow Initialization failed Possible reasons disk has not been formatted is write protected or is defective STORAGE FULL Yellow Less than 5 minutes of space remains in the internal buffer Data is accumulating in the internal buffer temporary storage because it is unable to store the data on the floppy disk Possible reasons include e Disk is full and storage is programmed as non rollover
178. WINS ie eet pee e RES Ee Uode 28 Figure 2 13 Network Data Cable Connections nennen rene ener tent trennen 30 Figuie 3 1 VBRTIOQ s Front Bezel etie reni n Saag iie a gemere epit 32 Figure 3 2 VRX100 s Front Bezel Buttons With Control enne enne en nnne enne 32 Figure 3 3 VRX100 s Front Bezel Buttons Without Control eese eene eene nennen enne nenne 32 Figure 3 4 VRX150 Front Bezel Buttons nete pret DR RUSO ee ED ERR p REEL E 33 Figure 3 5 Menu Navigation Guide Through ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MEN i ERU UD qe ER Eq I ds UR E RE ER EUR 35 Figure 3 6 ON LINE mode MAIN een rennen entrent tree 36 Figure 3 7 PROGRAM mode MAIN MENU sees esri tene ener etre tenete rennes 37 Figure 3 8 MAINTENANCE mode MAIN 38 Figure 3 9 Access to Connector and Floppy Drive VPR100 amp VRX100 sese 46 Figure 3 10 Access To Connector and Floppy Drive VRX150 sse nennen rennen 47 Figure 3 11 Alarm 1 Function Block Components eese eene nennen eene eene 50 Figure 3 12 Example Input Parameter Connection sees nennen 54 Figure 3 13 Function Block Connection Format
179. WN The cursor moves to the left and DOWN is selected 3 12 How to program a simple configuration This section describes how to program your instrument You should practice doing these procedures until you are familiar with the buttons and menus Table 3 10 Function Block Configuration Procedure Step Action 1 Select the desired function block from the Program menu Program each of the function block s input parameters with OFF a number or an output code from another function block See section 3 10 for this procedure for this procedure Program each function block parameter with a number selection NONE or OFF See section 3 10 Continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 57 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 10 Function Block Configuration Procedure continued Program the function block s other items as desired Other items include decimal point positions descriptor tag and various labels for identifying the function block 5 Repeat steps 1 4 for all desired function blocks until the instrument is configured Example configuration Figure 3 14 shows a simplified configuration using typical function block connections Note that several parameters are left out to simplify the drawing and procedure Table 3 11 describes how to program these connections SETPOINT 500 ACTION HIGH SETPOINT 1 1500 Al 1 TYPE J FEEDBACK KEY FUNCTION BL
180. Y Press Tab button to display the profile menu S 1 RO FI LO 1 500 00 0 00 PV 0 00 0 00 00 SP 0 00 SEG1 9 READY Cursor is on Start Press Enter Profiler starts running at segment 1 if in Ready or End or resumes running from its Hold state If in Ready state and Hot Start has been activated profiler will start at the first point in the profile where the present value of PV 1 occurs Event outputs assume their states as of the beginning of the running segment Profiler status on lower right of display indicates RUN after you start the profiler ATTENTION A profile can also be started by pressing the START or F1 button but only if that profile s START parameter was configured as SY1 F1 See Section 5 3 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 213 Setpoint Profiler How to hold a profiler Table 5 14 Profiler Hold Procedure Action Table 5 13 Hold Press Enter ATTENTION Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Result Notes Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Profile menu is displayed segment s events are frozen Elapsed time their current states A profile can also be put on HOLD by pressing the HOLD or F2 button but only if that profile s HOLD parameter was configured as SY1 F2 and if that profile s HOLD LEVEL EDGE is set to EDGE See Section 5 3 How to reset a profiler Table 5 15 Profiler Reset
181. access to the Online retrieval of stored data DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the Online trend Zoom feature DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the Online trend Point Detail feature DISABLE removes the menu items which allow access to the manual Trend Timebase Select capability DISABLE removes INPUT ALGORITHM prompt from the Program Analog Input menu VPR amp VRX User Manual 163 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 20 Program Security Security lets you protect certain menu items and functions from unwanted or accidental access Access to a secured item requires entry of a 3 digit master or operator code Select PROGRAM SECURITY to display the Security menu if security is active you will be prompted to enter the master code before continuing REFERENCE If the master or operator s security code is lost or forgotten a security bypass procedure is available See Appendix A Table 4 65 describes the Security prompts Table 4 65 Security Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition ENABLE SECURITY YES NO Set to Yes to activate security on all enabled security items having a non zero master or operator s code f set to No no items will be secure MASTER SEC CODE 3 digit number Set to a non zero value a value of zero offers no security Secures the following items MEMORY CLEAR SERVICES in Maintenance mode PROGRAM SECURITY in Program mode Changing
182. ad This setting does not affect the action of the reset discrete parameter When the RESET goes high 1 an UP action totalizer will reset to zero or a DOWN action totalizer will reset to the preset value Use SY1 F3 to reset with the RESET or F3 key 147 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 15 Program Profiles Profile programming is explained in Section 5 148 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 16 Program Constants Constants can be programmed here and their values edited Online Select a constant to program Table 4 52 describes the Constant prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 52 Constant Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition VALUE OFF analog If a number the Constant may be altered Online from the Data parameter number Entry menu If a parameter this parameter be directed by DESTINATION to override certain programmed values INPUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Display limits for when viewing Constant on trend display or on INPUT HIGH LIMIT perceive DESTINATION See Destination defined on next page NONE No destination LPn GN LOOPn GAIN1 LPn PB LOOPn PROP BAND 1 LPn RS LOOPn RESET 1 LPn RA LOOPn RATE 1 LPn RB LOOPn RATIO BIAS LPn IS LOOPn SP INC SLEW LIMIT LPn DS LOOPn SP DEC SLEW LIMIT LPn HS LOOPn SP HIGH LIMIT LPnLS LOOPn SP LOW LIMIT AOn IS AOn INC SLEW L
183. age 170 examine replaying data See Trend interacting Initialization errors 236 Initializing Disk 181 235 installing DSU 15 messages See Messages overview 73 preinitialize 120MB Zip disk with DSU 180 replaying 239 Set Up Alarms 174 Set Up Diagnostics 175 Set Up Disk Capacity 177 Set Up Events 174 Set Up New Schedules 171 Set Up Trend Capacity 177 Set Up Trend Data 1 171 Set Up Trend Data 2 amp 3 174 Set Up Unit Data 175 Setup 170 starting and stopping 237 status 238 typical tasks 234 Warning level 179 Database Services 260 Deadband 136 Delete All Diagnostics 243 Demo 262 Diagnostic acknowledging 242 deleting all 243 what happens during 242 Diagnostic messages 271 DIAT 103 DIAT output programming 103 discrete forcing 244 Discrete Input Connections 26 discrete inputs program 104 Discrete Output Connections 27 discrete outputs program 105 discrete point status displaying 242 Disk Formatting 179 intialize for data storage 235 Disk capacity for data storage 177 Display alarm summary 240 Display All Analogs 242 Display All Discretes 242 Display button displays accessed by 219 Display Messages and Symbols 229 Displays Program 152 DSU 15 installing 15 unpacking 4 using 180 E Edit Alarm Setpoints 244 Edit Constants 244 editing profile segments 218 Electrical Units 86 88 Enable Features 163 Enter Labels 82 error messages 271 Error Messages 277
184. age mode is set to OFF for all 3 trends This rate can be altered here or in the trend data setup see Table 4 71 If the low storage rates are changed the disk capacity will reflect the new trend capacity Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points are sampled The 25 ms selection is only available for 2 input instruments with no more than 3 points total in Trends 1 3 The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total in Trends 1 3 TREND 1 HI RATE TREND 2 LO RATE Seconds 25 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 See TREND 1 LO RATE This rate can be altered here or in the trend data setup see Table 4 71 If the hi storage rates are changed the disk capacity will reflect the new trend capacity Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points are sampled The 25 ms selection is only available for 2 input instruments with no more than 3 points total in Trends 1 3 The 5 sec rate cannot exceed 6 points total in Trends 1 3 TREND 2 HI RATE TREND 3 LO RATE See TREND 1 HI RATE See TREND 1 LO RATE TREND 3 HI RATE See TREND 1 HI RATE UNIT DATA 0 10000 Select maximum number of samples of unit data to be SAMPLES stored Default capacity is 1000 Shown only if unit data was set up as part of the schedule ALARM SAMPLES 0 1600 Select maximum number of samples of alarm transitions off
185. alog Inputs select PROGRAM ANALOG INPUTS on the Main Program Menu Select an AI to program Table 4 5 Analog Input Algorithm Selection Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT ALGORITHM Standard or Custom This prompt appears only if CUSTOM INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program Mode Menu Section 4 19 If CUSTOM INPUT is disabled you will see the Standard prompts Table 4 6 Standard lets you choose a thermocouple RTD EMF or pyrometer type The Standard prompts are shown in Table 4 6 Custom lets you convert the input from a thermocouple or EMF to engineering units using a custom curve containing up to 20 points Standard algorithm prompts Table 4 6 describes all the prompts associated with the standard algorithm These are the default prompts for analog input programming See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 6 Standard Algorithm Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT TYPE See Table 1 3 for selections The Input type thermocouple RTD pyrometer default type is OFF RANGE LOW The value must be within the limits Low end of the input range 12 00 specified for the input type see Table 1 3 Be sure to use the correct value for the temperature units used F C K R To enter the full range for the temperature units selected see TEMPERATURE UNITS select TYPE again and press Enter without changing the range type
186. ameter must be OFF 3 If security is active for AUTO MAN changes the security code must be entered first For a description of the loop parameters FORCE REMOTE MAN and DISCR VS KEY SEL see Table 4 10 continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 227 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 7 Interacting With Loop Displays continued To perform this action Do these steps Lower or raise the loop Press Tab key to move cursor to loop output To change the output the loop output displayed as must be in manual mode initiated by front panel key or by external discrete signal notin Remote Manual mode Increase or decrease Press Tab key until cursor is on the setpoint value Press Up Arrow and Down Setpoint value Arrow to adjust value Only numerically assigned setpoint values can be changed online Setpoint 2 cannot be changed if it is acting as a remote setpoint e g running a profile You can also change the setpoint value by accessing the Tune Loop menu as described in the next row Access the loop tuning Press Tab key until the cursor is on the loop tag at the top of the display Press parameters Enter to access the Tune Loop menu for that loop Adjust desired parameters To return to the loop display press Menu See Section 7 7 Tune Loop Interacting with Alarm Summary pace4 ALARM SUMMARY 14 25 PROCESS 1 HIGH TEMP 7 CURR 1234 56 01 12 59 04 12 97 PROCESS 1 LOW TEMP 8 CU
187. and AI2 analog input function blocks will produce temperature measurements of the reaction chamber and provide them to the process variable input of LP1 while measurements of the oil temperature in the jacket tank will be furnished to LP2 s PV input by AI2 Because OV will provide LP2 with its operating set point LP1 s output range will be defined in engineering units of temperature instead of the usual 0 to 100 LP2 s output range is 0 to 100 in anticipation of using it to drive the AOI function block s 4 to 20 mA signal Note that the range covered by LP1 OV will have to be consistent with the operating temperature range of the oil For example if it is determined that the oil temperature will be manipulated between 75 and 500 F the low and high limits assumed by LP1 OV and for that matter SP2 will equal 75 and 500 respectively Finally LP2 BC and AOI BC are the two back calculated feedback paths shown As is true for the operation of all back calculated feedback paths both LP2 BC and 1 BC work together to acknowledge the cascaded control loops that the appropriate actions have taken place in response to both loops output values The method used to coordinate the tuning of the cascaded loops is particularly interesting Using the diagram of Figure 3 26 the first priority is to tune the secondary cascade loop of LP2 With LP1 kept in manual mode tuning may begin by first placing LP2 in manual mode and then manipulat
188. and Down Arrow buttons to restore the cursor Display Alarm History The Alarm History display is a multi page display which lists information on cleared alarms The most recent 25 cleared alarms will be shown with the oldest being dropped from the list when a new alarm clears and is logged in The Alarm History includes the descriptor and tag identifiers of the alarm the type high low high rate etc the setpoint value at the time the alarm occurred and the date and times of the occurrence and clearing of the alarm designated as IN and OUT times respectively Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to view the various pages of the display as desired 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 241 Online Operation Using Menus Display Diagnostics A Diagnostic is a displayed error message that indicates a serious error or failure has occurred See Section 9 5 for diagnostic descriptions and possible causes What happens during a diagnostic e flashing blue diagnostic indicator will appear on the bottom of the screen diagnostic message will be entered into the diagnostic summary which can be viewed at any time The summary contains each message and the date and time of occurrence e If Data Storage is set up accordingly the diagnostic occurrence will also be logged a summary list stored on floppy disk diagnostic summary can contain a maximum of 50 messages with the newest shown at the top of the list
189. ange the mode to Program Select Program Profilers Select a profiler 1 through 4 to program Only profilers that are not actively running are selectable Table 5 3 briefly describes the prompts for all profilers For detailed descriptions refer to Sections 5 2 and 5 3 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 3 Program Profiler Prompts Prompt DISPLAY LO LIM DISPLAY HI LIM PV 1 PV 2 Range Selections Definition Enter the lower limit for the SP Trend display Allow for the maximum and minimum Profiler and PV values OFF or number OFF or number Enter the upper limit for the SP Trend display allowing for the maximum and minimum Profiler and PV values OFF analog parameter number Program the profiler to monitor a process variable PV 1 is trended on the SP Trend display PV 1 is compared to the profiler s value to determine deviation Excessive deviation between PV 1 and profiler value can cause a Hold guaranteed soak OFF analog parameter number This is an optional PV that can also be monitored and can be used to determine deviation from profiler value PV 2 is shown on SP Trend display s Point Detail menu PV 2 is also trended on SP Trend display START Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Start on page 195 RESET RUN Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Reset Run on page 195 HOLD D
190. anning 85 tot 265 V AC DC Frequentie 50 60 Hz Vermogen of stroomvermogen 45 VA Zekering 2 0 A 250 V AC DC OMGEVINGSCONDITIES Gebruik het instrument niet in de aanwezigheid van ontvlambare vloeistoffen of dampen Het gebruik van elk elektrisch instrument in een dergelijke omgeving vormt een gevaar voor uw veiligheid Temperatuur In bedrijf 0 tot 50 Opslag 20 tot 70 Vochtigheid 10 tot 90 RH niet condenserend 40 Trilling 5 tot 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 tot 150 Hz versnelling 0 5 g MONTAGE VAN DE APPARATUUR De recorder moet worden gemonteerd in een paneel om de toegankelijkheid tot de achterste aansluitpunten te beperken TURVALLISUUSMAARAYKSET FD1 6047 Noudata t m n ohjeen kaikkia turvaohjeita valtta aksesi s hk tapaturman vaaraa T m merkki varoittaa k ytt j s hk iskun vaarasta paikassa miss voi koskettaa vaarallisia j nnitteit CL Suojamaaliitin Kytke maadoitsjohdin t h n liittimeen e Jos laitetta k ytet n olosuhteissa joihin sit ei ole suunniteltu k ytt turvallisuus voi heikenty e Ala vaihda mit n komponettia tai osaa jota valmistaja ei ole m ritellyt k ytt j n vaihdettavaksi e Asennus johdotus on teht v paikallisten varmuusm r ysten mukaisesti valtuutetun s hk asentajan toimesta e Ensimm iseksi on kytkett v suojamaa liitin ja viimeiseksi irroittettava e aitteen l heisyyteen suositellaan asennettavaksi verkkokytkin LA
191. applied to the ratio control loop whose value will be multiplied by the RATIO SETPOINT multiplier The product of this multiplication may be specified as the ratio control loop s working set point and can be biased by specifying a RATIO BIAS value This input parameter is referred to as the WILD VARIABLE since the ratio loop has no control over its value whatsoever In the fuel air ratio control examples used in RATIO SETPOINT AND RATIO BIAS fuel flow was for all intents and purposes the WILD VARIABLE Note that the typical function block diagram one will use to represent a ratio control loop is illustrated in Figure 4 1 98 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features UNITS FPS INPUT TYPE LINEAR DIRECT INDIRECT SQRT SQRT RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH p CIRCUIT LOW 1 CIRCUIT HIGH ELECTRICAL UNITS VOLTS FEEDBACK AIR 4 TO 20 mA SIGNAL TO AIR FLOW CONTROL VALVE WILD VARIABLE OUTPUT TYPE CAT IN LOW LIMIT 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RATIO OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 UNITS FPS SETPOINT INPUT TYPE LINEAR PIRPOTINDIRECTSORT SQRT TUBE ERANG Working set point of loop when use of WILD RANGE HIGH 40 SETPOINT 1 500 MP TENE CEE CIRCUIT LOW WILD VARIABLE AI3 OV of PV If ratio control using CIRCUIT HIGH RATIO SETPOINT 0 50 must be temporarily suspended loop s working ELECTRICAL UNITS VOLTS RATIO BIAS 0 75 set point may be switched O
192. applied to the inputs of AO1 and AO2 and as such will drive and linearly correspond with AO1 and AO2 s 4 to 20 mA outputs CV1 BC AO1 BC FB1 CV1 A1 4 TO 20 mA gt 1 A01 1000 OV PLATINUM RTD N CVI TYPE STD SPLITTER INPUT TYPE PT100 4TO 20 mA TYPE SPLIT 2 2 100 100 2 BC CV1 A2 CV1 A1 0 0 100 0 100 LP1 OV Figure 3 24 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 23 The two outputs on CV1 that will drive AOI and AO2 are respectively labeled CV1 A1 and CV1 A2 CV1 s basic operation is described by a plot of these outputs versus OV Shown in the lower left of Figure 3 24 the plot demonstrates that CV1 will produce a 0 to 100 value at its CV1 A1 output when calls for an output level between 0 and 100 CV1 A2 will remain at 0 When applied to AOI the CV1 A value will activate the 4 to 20 mA signal needed at the hot water valve actuator to make the water temperature in the vessel rise Similarly when calls for an output level between 0 and 100 CV1 will produce a corresponding 0 to 100 value at CV1 A2 This time CV1 A1 will remain at 0 and the CV1 A2 value generated will induce the introduction of cold water into the vessel to cool its contents down Note the function block diagram s use of three back calculated feedback paths Two such paths are labeled AOI BC and AO2 BC They are connected
193. are listed in Table 4 56 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 155 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 55 Set Up Trend 1 Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition SET DISPLAY OFF or number Set the high and low full scale display limits for each point If LIMITS you select OFF for a limit on this display the limits programmed for the analog point either RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH or OUT LOW LIMIT and OUT HIGH LIMIT will be used as the trend limits for that point The accuracy of a trended point is determined only by the original output limits of the point not by setting wider or narrower limits here Setting excessively narrower limits here will result in a viewable trend with a high degree of inaccuracy when viewed as a of the screen To increase accuracy over a narrower range decrease the programmed output range limits of the point itself TIMEBASE OFF discrete parameter 0 Enter a discrete parameter which will cause trend to display SELECTOR 1 alternate timebase when ON and normal timebase when OFF Displaying trend points logarithmically To display any trend point logarithmically follow this procedure 1 Under the Program menu select the desired point to be displayed logarithmically For example for Analog Input 1 select Program Analog Inputs then select Analog Input 1 Change the point s decimal position to X XXEXX Save your changes Repeat steps 1 and 2 for
194. are stored on a disk Programs are saved to disk as a file name number and LNS extension Unlike memory storage you can specify which profiles you want stored as a program Disk capacity depends on the number of profiles in the program See Table 5 11 For example on a 4 Programmer instrument if you want to store Profiles 2 3 and 4 as a program you enter 2 at the prompt STARTING PROFILE to indicate that the lowest numbered profile to be stored will be Profile 2 At the prompt NUMBER OF PROFILES you enter 3 to indicate that 3 profiles will be stored Table 5 10 shows all possible combinations of profiles that can be stored to disk Table 5 10 How Profiles Are Stored On Disk 1 Programmer Instrument 2 Programmer Instrument 3 Programmer Instrument 4 Programmer Instrument 1 Profile per Program Up to 2 Profiles per Program Up to 3 Profiles per Program Up to 4 Profiles per Program Starting Number Program Starting Number Starting Number Program Starting Number Profile of contains Profiles of Profiles of contains Profile of Profiles this Profiles Profiles these Profiles profile profiles 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 2 1 2 4 2 2 2 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 2 NEN 2 Table 5 11 Disk Program Capacity Number of Profiles in Program Maximum Disk Capacity 1 224 programs 2 199 programs 3 138 programs A 100 programs 12 00 VPR amp VRX
195. ase Inspect entire instrument configuration of one or more function blocks The and reconfigure as needed affected function blocks are reset to their defaults 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 271 On Site Adjustments 272 ATTENTION Be advised that the INPUT FAIL diagnostic will continue to be displayed even after its cause has disappeared After verifying that this diagnostic s cause has been corrected you may clear the INPUT FAIL message from all ON LINE screens by performing one of the following sequences of steps 1 Acknowledge the INPUT FAIL diagnostic From the ON LINE main menu select ACCESS SUMMARIES Select DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS Use the Up and lt Down gt buttons to highlight the INPUT FAIL diagnostic s that you wish to acknowledge and then press lt Enter gt Once the diagnostic has been acknowledged it will still be listed in the DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS screen but will no longer be displayed on any ON LINE screen 2 Delete the INPUT FAILURE diagnostic From the ON LINE main menu select ACCESS SUMMARIES Select DELETE ALL DIAGNOSTICS Once this menu choice has been executed all diagnostic messages will be deleted from the DISPLAY DIAGNOSTICS screen and will no longer be displayed on any ON LINE screen During power up if an analog input is open or is out of range the setpoint and process variable values will display OFF and the loop s AUTO mode is disabled Check connections to determine prob
196. ase high limit High Output Limit Greater Than 5 A voltage output VAT high output limit must not be greater than 5 Hysteresis Less Than Alarm Hysteresis parameter should be greater Decrease high limit Increase Hysteresis Zero than or equal to zero Impulse Time less than Impulse time on a time proportioning duration Increase impulse time or Equal to 0 adjusting output DAT output cannot be less than or equal to zero Incompatible Curve Type Al is custom type thermocouple class Reprogram curve so that for all n reference junction enabled but Y values are not Y gt Yna or Y lt Yna always increasing or not always decreasing ned 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 277 Error Messages Table 10 1 Error Messages continued Cases r ton Incorrect Input coordinates Incorrect Number of Parameters for function Incorrect Output Coordinates Invalid Algorithm Code Invalid Block Number Invalid Block Type Invalid Channel in Point spec Invalid Equation The Advanced Splitter CV was programmed with input limits for Output 2 A2 only or for Output 1 amp 3 A1 amp only or for Output 3 A3 only 2 amp 3 The function was not programmed with the minimum number of parameters for example the Math CV requires at least 2 inputs to function properly The Advanced Splitter CV was programmed with output limits for Output 2 A2 onl
197. at may or may not be an intuitively obvious internal parameter will depend on your level of process control expertise For the function block diagram built up so far internal parameters that can be presumed from the control strategy of Figure 3 15 are indicated in Figure 3 18 Here the function block has been labeled to show that its INPUT TYPE will be a Type J thermocouple with a measurement range between 0 RANGE LOW and 1000 F RANGE HIGH The label STANDARD has been used to indicate the type of control loop will be along with the notation SP 500 to show that the loop s set point will be 500 F The loop tuning constants of GAIN RESET and RATE have been initially indicated as 10 1 repeat minute and 0 minutes respectively As far as the AOI function block is concerned its input range has been defined between 0 IN LOW LIMIT and 100 IN HIGH LIMIT in anticipation of using LP1 s output to drive the 4 to 20 mA signal it will generate Note how 1 output range has been defined through use of the notation OUT LOW LIMIT 4 and OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 VPR amp VRX User Manual 61 Programming and Operating Concepts TYPE J OV THERMOCOUPLE LP1 OV 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT GAIN 10 IN HIGH LIMIT RESET 1 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 RATE 0 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 18
198. at least 2 coordinates X must increase by at least 0 00001 Y values are not limited except in the following 2 cases 1 If the incoming signal is from a thermocouple and reference junction compensation is on make sure that a b and c are all true a All Y s are increasing or all are decreasing b Y range includes 0 65 c Temperature units are F C K or R 2 If Online adjustment of the value is desired make sure that all Y s are increasing or all are decreasing MV OHMS VOLTS Reference junction compensation Emissivity compensation for emf input Use these prompts to plot a curve of up to 20 points where is the incoming signal in the electrical units selected and Y is its corresponding value in the temperature units selected Interpolation is straight line Units of the electrical signal LAG SAMPLE HOLD 0 seconds or OFF OFF discrete parameter 0 1 LAG is a time constant applied to the input measurement value This provides digital filtering LAG to the measurement Lag appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu Holds Input The input value is measured normally when this discrete is OFF 0 and holds its last value when the discrete is ON 1 Hold appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu Press Menu when entries are complete At the prompt
199. ata points The CV Output can be analog or discrete A CV can include other CVs in its calculations Once a CV is created it can be used by any function block as many times as desired Select CALCULATED VALUES on the Main Program Menu Select a CV to program then choose from the types shown in Table 4 16 ATTENTION e f you plan to program another function block using a Calculated Value as a parameter you must program the Calculated Value first e Once you change the type and press Enter the previous type s settings are deleted and cannot be recovered Table 4 16 CV Types Type Math Description Page Package CV Programmed ES PEAK PICKING 2 Picks maximum input value 107 SIGNAL SELECT 1 Selects signal per your criteria 108 COMPARE 1 Compares input and outputs result 109 COUNTER 1 Counts transitions of input status 113 MATH S Calculates math on 8 inputs using one operator 114 FREE FORM MATH 5 Calculates math on 8 inputs using several operators 115 LOGIC Ss Outputs logic of inputs 117 FREE FORM LOGIC S Outputs logic of inputs using custom equation 119 INVERTER S Inverts status of input 121 BCD S Binary Coded Decimal conversion 122 FUNCTION 2 Generates custom y f x curve 124 GENERATOR INTERVAL TIMER 1 Counts time in minutes 126 PERIODIC TIMER 1 Generates periodic pulse 127 MASS FLOW 2 Calculates mass f
200. be established for each process data type along with a file for diagnostic errors Each file will be distinguished by a file extension as indicated in Table 3 12 Table 3 12 Data Storage File Extensions Data Type File extension Trends LNT Unit Data LNU Alarm History LNA Discrete Event LNE Diagnostics LND You can specify which process data types are written to disk and whether or not diagnostic errors are stored by setting up data storage schedules accessible under a prompt entitled SET UP NEW SCHEDULES under the DATA STORAGE menu Up to seven files may be written to disk while the instrument performs Data Storage three trend files one unit data file one alarm file one event file and one diagnostics file SET UP NEW SCHEDULES lets you designate several other parameters such as the data storage rate 1 the distance in time between adjacent samples of a recorded process data parameter the eight character file names used to identify each process and diagnostic data file and whether or not the Data Storage takes place in continuous or batch modes Data Storage files may be configured to rollover after they have become full That is after the space on the disk for each file type has run out all of the oldest data on the disk is overwritten with the most recent data VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Initializing a disk To activate the new data storage
201. be suppressed at the source In most control cabinets the main sources of noise are motor starters contactors relays and switching gear For this reason many manufacturers of these devices supply surge suppressors which mount directly on the noise source for example on the coil of a control relay or motor starter For those devices that do not have accessory surge suppressors resistance capacitance RC circuits and or voltage limiters such as metal varistors may be added when and where needed This can be broken down into two categories namely inductive loads for example relay switch in series with a relay coil and contacts Inductive coils Metal Oxide Varistors MOVs are recommended for transient suppression in inductive coils An MOV is connected in parallel with the coil and is as close as physically possible to the coil see Figure Appendix B 2 MOV devices listed in Table Appendix B 2 are recommended for general purpose applications Table Appendix B 2 lists part numbers for recommended MOV devices Table Appendix B 2 MOV Devices Part Number 30732481 501 30732481 502 Maximum AC 130V 275V Energy Pulse Rating 10 Joules 15 Joules Supplier General Electric V130LA10A V275LA15A Continued on next page 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 299 Inductive coils continued Figure Appendix B 2 is an illustration of transient suppression in inductive coils
202. ble 11 1 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 19 Installation 2 5 Wiring This section describes all wiring requirements and procedures CAUTION All wiring must be done by qualified technicians and must conform to national or local electrical codes Do not exceed maximum voltage limits given in Table 1 1 Which terminals to connect to 20 There are 4 main input output hardware types Analog Input through AI12 Analog Outputs AO1 through AO4 Discrete Input DI through DI16 and Discrete Outputs DO1 through DO 24 your instrument may have fewer depending on options ordered Table 2 3 gives typical applications for each type Before wiring your process you must decide which terminals to connect to your process The terminals you connect to correspond with the software in the instrument For example the device you connect to will be seen by the instrument s software as If you connect your PV to then you must remember that is your PV the instrument s software has a labeling feature that lets you identify each component by a name of your choice Your instrument has the terminals shown in either Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 or Figure 2 5 Table 2 3 shows typical applications for the various devices that you connect to the terminals Table 2 3 Terminal Designators And Their Associated Applications Terminal designator Typical application 24V e Power a transmitter e Powerrelay s
203. bled N Disabled Figure 7 1 Data Storage Status Display VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Replaying stored data Data stored on floppy disks can be retrieved and displayed online at any time whether data storage is active or not All data is stored as individual files and is retrieved by filename To retrieve a file from disk follow the procedure in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Data Storage Replay Procedure Action 1 Insert the disk containing the desired file into the instrument 2 Select DATA STORAGE and then REPLAY FROM DISK A list of filenames of all the files on the disk will appear The filename extension identifies the type of data in the file Note Events can only be replayed with SDA data analysis software LNT Trend LNA Alarms LNE Events LND Diagnostics LNU Unit Data Select a start time within the first and last times Data replay will begin at this time For trends select horizontal or vertical replay format and screen size timebase 4 Select Replay to view the data ATTENTION If you are replaying data from a non current disk keep in mind that the instrument will continue acquiring data and holding it temporarily in its active memory RAM until you insert a proper disk for storage If you spend too much time replaying data the instrument could run out of active memory space If this occurs a storage full warning message will be displayed See Table 6
204. buttons Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to move the cursor and select a character See Table 3 1 for these buttons functions If you are entering several labels this method can be tedious because you must scroll through A Z and 0 9 to pick each character Consider using a keyboard or barcode reader instead Entering labels with a QWERTY keyboard Using a QWERTY keyboard is easier and faster if you are entering many labels See Section 3 7 for keyboard connection procedure To enter label with the keyboard 1 Select Enter Labels Select the function block whose label you want to change Select the label you want to change Table 4 3 Press Enter to move cursor to the right side of the display Qe Wiss ub Type in the new label with the keyboard The instrument accepts A Z a z 0 9 6 Press Enter to accept the new label Entering labels with a barcode reader 82 Using a barcode reader is easier and faster if you are entering many labels See Section 3 6 for barcode reader connection procedure To enter label with the barcode reader 1 Select Enter Labels Select the function block whose label you want to change Select the label you want to change Table 4 3 Press Enter to move cursor to the right side of the display Scan in the new label with the barcode reader Allowable characters are 0 9 A Z A cp do Press Enter to accept the new label
205. cenario introduced in the RATIO SETPOINT section suppose fuel flow is the wild variable that measured to be 60 With the RATIO SETPOINT prompt set to 0 5 the result will be 30 when the RATIO SETPOINT is multiplied by the fuel flow If the RATIO BIAS prompt is then set to 10 the actual set point that the ratio loop will use to control air flow will be 30 10 40 To make a ratio control loop s working set point equal to RATIO SETPOINT x Wild Variable value RATIO BIAS the loop s working set point must be toggled to SP2 using the SP Set Point select key while viewing the loop s ON LINE display Refer to Figure 4 1 96 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 10 Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition RATIO SETPOINT Enter a number will equal the ratio that the ratio control loop will maintain between its process variable and a wild variable The wild variable may be the Output Value of any analog input or calculated value function block over which the ration loop will have no control The RATIO SETPOINT menu choice is essentially a multiplier applied to the wild variable s value This multiplication s result will be a working set point for the loop that will ensure the desired process variable to wild variable ratio For example suppose you intend to use the ratio control loop to maintain a 50 fuel air ratio in the operat
206. cling of the output For example an impulse time of 150 seconds will cause the output to be on for 75 seconds and off for 75 seconds when the input source is at 50 SENSITIVITY Applies to PP type AO only This is a percentage value This value should be set to the highest number which does not cause drive motor oscillation POS ALGORITHM Applies to PP type AO only The PP and Auto algorithms require a feedback analog input The selection of Auto allows normal PP feedback positioning of a drive motor when the feedback input is good and defaults to DIAT operation if the slidewire feedback input fails Use of Auto requires that the loop type be DIAT The PP algorithm can be used with all other PID loop types Reset Totalizers 12 00 Select this item to display a list of all resettable Totalizers and their current values If the Totalizer is non resettable it will not appear You may use this display to reset one Totalizer or all at once Note that some or all Totalizers may be configured to be non resettable Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons to select an item from the list At the prompt RESET press Enter to reset the Totalizer To reset all Totalizers select the menu line RESET ALL TOTALIZERS and press Enter at the prompt All resettable Totalizers will be reset Only resettable totalizers are shown here VPR amp VRX User Manual 245 Online Operation Using Menus 7 6 Setpoint Profiles For i
207. configuration Figure 4 5 If itis part of a loop configuration the math operator cannot be ABSVAL SQRT or STDDEV Figure 4 5 Math CV Feedback Programming 114 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Free Form Math The output CVn OV is the result of a user specified equation QWERTY keyboard may be used for easier equation entry Table 4 23 describes the Free Form Math prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 23 Free Form Math Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT EQ See Table 4 24 Enter the equation using the QWERTY keyboard See Table 4 24 for allowable characters and functions Enter up to 64 characters upper or lower case Spaces are permitted Enclose a function s argument with parentheses Square root argument must be absolute value to prevent square root of a negative value Only whole numbers may be used as exponents Example To input this equation CN 5 OV X12 Ii AME AI 2 OV enter these settings INPUT A CN50V INPUT B 12 0 INPUT C INPUT D AI2OV EQ A B SQRT ABS C D 5 Note how constants can be entered through the Constant function block as in example s Input A assigned to an input as in example s Input B or entered directly in the equation as in example with 5
208. ction Interactive Page or view only Setpoint Profiles w 2 Bar Displays 2 Profiles data as bar graphs Interactive 221 Graphs Setpoint Profiles w 3 Bar Displays 3 Profiles data as bar graphs Interactive 221 Graphs Setpoint Profiles w 4 Bar Displays 4 Profiles data as bar graphs Interactive 221 Graphs Setpoint Profile Trend Displays a Profile as a Trend Interactive 221 Vertical Trend Displays up to 6 or 12 points trended Interactive 222 vertically Vertical Trend Digital Displays up to 6 or 12 points as trend and Interactive 222 digitally Vertical Trend Bar Display vertical trend with up to 4 bars Interactive 222 Horizontal Trend Displays up to 6 or 12 points trended Interactive 222 horizontally Horizontal Trend Digital Displays up to 6 or 12 points trended Interactive 222 horizontally Horizontal Trend Bar Displays up to 6 or 12 points trended Interactive 222 horizontally with 3 or 4 vertical bar graphs to the right BAR GRAPH1 Trend Point 1 BAR GRAPH2 Trend Point 2 BAR GRAPHS Trend Point 3 BAR GRAPH4 Trend Point 4 Panel Display Rotates through up to 12 points one at a time Interactive 225 Readable from 15 feet 4 6 meters 4 Panel Display Rotates through up to 12 points four at a time Interactive 226 Readable from 15 feet 4 6 meters Loop w Bar Graph Displays a loop s data as numbers and bar Interactive 227 graphs continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 219 Online Operations
209. ction block incorrectly the instrument tells you the problem Table 10 1 lists these error message along with a description of each one and what action to take Table 10 1 Error Messages me AH Block Phase Greater In Periodic Timer CV the phase start time is Change Period to greater than phase Than Block Period greater than the period For example the start Start Time or change Start Time to time is 8 00 and the period is 4 00 less than Period Channel Does Not Exist A channel was loaded that does not exist For Verify programming of affected example you loaded a dual loop configuration function block into a single loop instrument Circuit Limits Equal Indirect circuit low circuit high limits must be Change to unequal limits unequal Condition Type Out of Condition Type Compare Logic Free form Verify programming of affected Range Logic is out of range Probably caused by function block someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Desired FO Value Not In the F Sterilization CV desired F is not Change F value to greater than zero Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero Than Zero High Limit Outside of circuit Al circuit high limit is gt voltage limit of 5200 mV Change limit to within specified limits for that type High Output Limit Greater than 20 A current output CAT high output limit cannot be greater than 20 Decre
210. ctions Definition MONTH JAN DEC Enter the date and time DAY 1 31 YEAR Enter year HOURS 0 23 MINUTE 0 59 FORMAT USA MMDDYY Select clock format INTL DDMMYY IMPORTANT Resetting the clock can affect the storage schedule of a unit in service If the clock is set back more than 5 minutes the following actions will take place Data in storage buffers will be copied to the floppy disk and the buffers will then be cleared Data collection for storage will stop until the operator reinitializes the schedule If the clock is set back less than 5 minutes collection of data storage and trends will stop until the setback time elapses and the clock catches up with the original collection schedule A warning prompt will appear on the display before these actions occur You can then cancel the clock change if desired 166 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 23 Load Store Config Instrument configurations and calibrations can be stored to and loaded from floppy disk The front bezel must be closed Configurations have filename extension LNC Calibrations have filename extension LNL ATTENTION File types on a disk cannot be mixed The disk must contain only setpoint programs configuration and calibration files not data storage files Table 4 68 describes the Access Config Files prompts Table 4 68 Access Config Files Prompts Prompt Range Selec
211. d Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 CE conformity This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives 89 336 EEC the EMC directive and 73 23 EEC the low voltage directive Do not assume this product conforms with any other CE Mark Directive s Attention The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual v 1 vi 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 3 1 32 33 34 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 13 3 14 4 1 4 2 4 3 44 4 5 Contents INTRODUCTION eee 1 Three manuals 1n Lege e que el
212. d an c Qq v2in DO SI Dyas On DO D4 1241 Dd ee S S WX 100 S Due Dq 1 SEES D Xi qq A01 AI3 4 B Dd AO2 9 Al4 A OX AO2 8 05 x DOA A DA aca TB3B only or D qp Asie B Seetablers D c For 24VDC Input Power L1 L2 N Figure 2 4 Terminal Connections TB3A amp TB3B Table 2 5 Optional Cards for Term inal Boards TB3A amp TB3B Contents of cards 8 DI 8 Open 16 DI 16 Open Collector Outputs 8 DI 24 Open Collector Outputs Collector Outputs TB3B TB3A TB3B TB3A TB3B DI Dig DH DO9 DI DI2 DI10 DI2 DO10 012 DI3 0111 DI3 DO11 DI3 014 0112 014 DO12 014 015 0113 015 DO13 DI5 016 0114 016 DO14 DI6 DI7 0115 DI7 DO15 DI7 DI8 DI16 DI8 DO16 DI8 COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM COM DO1 DO17 DO1 DO17 DO1 DO2 DO18 DO2 DO18 DO2 DO19 0019 DO4 DO20 DO4 DO20 DO4 DO5 0021 DO5 0021 DO5 DO6 DO22 DO6 DO22 DO6 DO7 DO23 DO7 DO23 DO7 DO8 DO24 DO8 DO24 DO8 Note terminal label may contain options not installed on your instrument VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation 12 00 1 1 4 ies N TB2
213. de VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 2 character output code Type of Choices depend on type of function block function block Commonly used choices Choices OV Al Analog Input OS AL Alarm BC AO Analog Output See Table 3 5 for all choices CV Calculated Value CN Constant DI Discrete Input DO Di te Output LP Foon Canina Channel number of function block SP Setpoint Profiler Choices vary depending on type of SY System function block TL Totalizer Figure 3 13 Function Block Connection Format Before programming a function block s input parameter with a CV s Calculated Value output code you must program the CV first Otherwise the CV s output parameter will not be available for programming The function block SY System Parameter operates internally and cannot be programmed It automatically produces outputs which reflect the status of alarms data storage diagnostics and reference junction temperature These outputs can be used as inputs to function blocks How to program an input parameter with a number 12 00 Besides connecting an input parameter to another function block you can program an input parameter with a number The instrument will accept 999 999 to 9 999 999 Continuing with the previous example assume we want Loop 2 s Setpoint 2 to be a number Therefore we must program Loop 2 s Setpoint 2 parameter with a number sa
214. descriptive labels for parameters using instrument s buttons or a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader ANALOG INPUTS Program Analog Inputs CONTROL LOOPS Program Control Loops ANALOG OUTPUTS Program Analog Outputs DISCRETE INPUTS Program Discrete Inputs DISCRETE OUTPUTS Program Discrete Outputs CALCULATED VALUES Program Calculated Values ALARMS Program Alarms TOTALIZERS Program Totalizers PROFILERS Program Setpoint Profiles CONSTANTS Program Constants DISPLAYS Assign primary Online displays to the Display button FEATURES Enable disable certain menu items SECURITY Enable disable security on certain items SERIAL COMM Program Serial Communication COPY BLOCK Copy any function block to another channel CLOCK Set time and date LOAD STORE CONFIG Store and load configurations calibrations SCAN RATE Set scan rate of instrument LANGUAGE Select language of instrument VPR amp VRX User Manual 79 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 4 Frequently used programming prompts When programming the instrument you will see certain prompts repeatedly in different menus These are described in Table 4 2 rather than in each menu in which they appear Table 4 2 Frequently Used Programming Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition IN DECIMAL POS X XXXXX XXXX XX Select the decimal point position to be XX XXXX XXXXX X used for all inputs to the function XXX XXX XXXXXX Select X XXEXX to display the function
215. during instrument start up and maintenance procedures such as calibration Online operation is also monitored to detect both process faults and internal electronic errors If a diagnostic error occurs a record of it can be stored to a single diagnostic file The second category of stored data is configuration storage which is a single file comprised of the instrument s programming and configuration Configuration storage includes the programming of the instrument s analog input characteristics the configuration of its control loops or perhaps the programming of any math or logic functions The third category of stored data is Setpoint Program storage which is a single file a setpoint program containing one to four setpoint profiles depending on the instrument Recall that set point profiles are user specified plots of process values against time that are divided into ramp and soak segments of varying time lengths Setpoint programs may be stored to disk or to the instrument s memory The fourth category of stored data is calibration storage which is a file containing the instrument s analog input and output calibration This file may be used to restore calibration in the event that a full calibration using a calibration source and or meter cannot be performed VPR amp VRX User Manual 73 Programming and Operating Concepts 1 44MB disks are restricted to having files of the first category Data Storage stored on a d
216. e Suspend Auto MAN Auto Output Failsafe PV Manual amp SP2 SP2 amp PV Failure Working SP SP1 SP2 Select SP1 then SP2 PV Mode Manual Output Last value Auto amp SP1 SP2 PV Failure or Mode Suspend Auto AUTO Select Manual then MAN Auto Force Remote Manual Output Failsafe PV Failure or Output Tracking Failure or Feedforward Failure Manual amp SP1 SP2 PV Failure Mode Manual PV None required Output Last Value Auto amp SP1 SP2 see below Mode Suspend Auto AUTO None required Output Back Calc Value MAN Auto amp SP1 SP2 Force Remote Manual Mode Suspend Auto AUTO None required Output Tracking value Due to the abnormal condition the loop cannot be in Auto and therefore is in a temporary mode which forces the output as indicated If loop feedback is not connected to an AO of if loop type is ON OFF then MAN will be steady not flashing Status from a downstream function block indicates that there is no path to final output element For example the secondary control loop of cascade configuration was changed to manual mode 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 275 On Site Adjustments 276 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Error Messages 10 Error Messages Overview Sometimes errors occur while you are programming or loading a configuration into your instrument In most cases the instrument displays a descriptive error message For example if you try to program a fun
217. e s basic temperature control loop is operational Note that the output of the profiler function block will essentially be the set point profile From the cascade control strategy s explanation recall that all control loop function blocks within the instrument have a Setpoint 2 parameter that may be used as a remote set point input for connecting to the profiler s output in the function block diagram of Figure 3 20 will make use of SP2 s remote set point functionality so that a set point profiler s time varying set point may be applied to it Refer to Figure 3 28 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 69 Programming and Operating Concepts AO1 BC TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA SP2 INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 SP2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 GAIN 10 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 ETE OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 SP10V 5 1 Figure 3 28 Function Block Diagram Of Set Point Profile Control Of Figure 3 20 Figure 3 28 basically depicts all the components of the Figure 3 20 s control configuration with a set point profiler function block denoted by SP1 The profiler s output SP1 OV is connected to the remote set point input of LP1 Depending on the model number of the instrument up to four set point profiler function blocks SP1 through SP4 may be included within the instrument s feature
218. e 2 3 Terminal Connections TB3 Table 2 4 Optional Cards for Terminal Board TB3 Qontentsofcads O TB3 4 Mechanical 4 AC Solid 4 DC Solid Relays 3 State Relays State Relays Event Input 3 Event Input 3 Event Input Relays Relays Relays 011 011 011 DOeNC DI1 2 C 011 2 C 011 26 DO6 NO NO 012 DI2 DI2 DO5 e C DO5 eC DO5 6C DIS C DIS C DISC DO5 NC DI3 DIS 6 AC Solid 6 Mechanical 6 DC Solid State Relays Relays FormC State Relays DO5NO DO5NO DO5NO DO4NC DO4NC DO4NO DO4NO DO4NO DO4NO DO4NO DO4NO DO3S4C DOSAC DO3 4C Dos4C DOSAC DO3 NC DO3 NC DO3NO DO3NO DO3NO DO2 NC DO2 NC DO2 NO DO2NO DO2NO DO2NO DO2NO DO2 NO DO1 2C 1 2 DO1 2C 1 2 DOI 2C DO1 2C 4 DO1 NC DO1 NC DO1NO DO1NO DO NO DO1 NO 001 NO DO1 NO Note Terminal label may contain options not installed on your instrument 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 21 Installation 22 TBI wo E BA Dq DO D
219. e Eli erase reb reti 91 Loop Prompts eo etn UII RU ntn oria Grid ctn cette 93 Analog Output Types c ea a e eiie i ete ee eie edge teet er 100 Prompts For Analog Output Types sese nren nent nennen rennen eterne 100 Analog Output Prompls RODEO Ta Gt e ERE e ege 101 Discrete Input Prompts nietos epi e ecu tad perdete eripere e eeepc es 104 Discrete Output Prompts seisi 2 edo gt Rene ER ERE Rede 105 CV E De meses uehementer EROR 106 Peak Picking Prompts tette rh er ee chpessdueabasbud 107 Signal Select Prompts rele een Re eripe bete 108 Compare Prompts itt eec dU Sosa ceeds teks eere tei Ce IP e ER Ee aeo etes ee bees 109 Compare s Condition Type and Condition Time Prompts sess 111 Counter Prompts DO e eee arp OD Reg 113 petere od e ee cie altiore ree e e ee dte eee 114 Free Form Math Prompts eie te eto emeret tert er biete EE err ertt SED 115 Free Form Math Functions ceti EROR 116 Egi Prompts creer CR PERPE FR ERI RET TEE FU FRE PESO ren AA 117 LG B16 On I N 118 VPR amp VRX User Manual ix Table 4 27 Free 1 6 16 5 119 Table 4 28 AOR BAND Ae a hel eapite Td See Ble 120 Table 4 29 R
220. e Recomenda se um comutador na fonte de alimenta o principal pr ximo do equipamento ESPECIFICA ES DO EQUIPAMENTO Voltagem 85 265 1 50 60 Hz Pot ncia ou consumo de corrente 45 VA Fus veis 2 A 250 Vca cc CONDIC ES AMBIENTAIS N o operar o instrumento na presen a de l quidos ou vapores inflam veis A opera o de qualquer instrumento el ctrico em tal ambiente constitui um perigo para a seguranga Temperatura Ambiente 0 a 50 Armazenamento 20 a 70 Humidade 10 a 90 RH n o condensado 40 C Vibra o 5 a 15 Hz amplitude 1 mm 15 a 150 Hz acelera o 0 5 g INSTALA O DO EQUIPAMENTO O Registrador deve ser montado num painel para limitar o acesso do operador aos terminais traseiros NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD SP21 6047 Para reducir el riesgo de choque el ctrico el cual podr a causar lesiones personales seguir todas las indicaciones de este documento Este s mbolo previene al usuario de un riesgo potencial de descarga cuando se puede acceder a corrientes de tensi n peligrosas Terminal de tierra de protecci n Proporcionado para la conexi n de la tierra de protecci n del conductor del sistema de alimentaci n OAS e Si el equipo es utilizado de forma no especificada por el fabricante la protecci n suministrada con el mismo podr a resultar da ada e reemplazar ning n componente o parte no explicitamente especificado por el suministrador
221. e analog output Value entered is in terms of the AO s input source not in terms of the output as defined by OUTPUT LOW LIMIT amp OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Variable slew limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with IS or DS See Program Constants Section 4 16 Select failure action to occur on input signal loss If VALUE is selected enter the value desired in FAILSAFE VALUE The value at which the output will be held for failsafe This value is also the initial output of the loop on cold start If the value is set to OFF the output will go to 0 Value entered is in terms of the AO s input source not in terms of the output as defined by OUTPUT LOW LIMIT amp OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT IMPULSE TIME OFF or 2 1 The cycle time in seconds for On and Off time of the output For example a time of 150 seconds will cause the output to be on for 75 seconds and off for 75 seconds when the input source is at 50 Variable impulse time is available by programming a constant s Destination with IT Program Constants Section 4 16 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 101 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition MIN ON TIME OFF orz 0 The minimum on time in seconds for the output If the input source calls for the output to be on for less than this time the output will not turn on at all Example 1 Impulse Time 100
222. e eerie tete 216 Summary Viewing Procedure airnn e nennen trennen nennen trennen reete enne tenete 217 Segment Editing Procedure eene tease ewe tulo e eet ure perte 218 Displays Accessed With Display nennen nennen nennen nenne 219 Point Detail Men Prompts retire dee ee ta rete eye hein 223 Stop Panel Display Rotation Procedure essere trennen trennen 225 Resume Panel Display Rotation Procedure sees nennen rennen 225 Stop 4 Panel Display Rotation Procedure eneinio einiino 226 Resume 4 Panel Display Rotation Procedure eese 226 Interacting With Loop 1 227 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display 230 Messages and Symbols Elsewhere on Display eese nennen nennen rennen 231 Online Mode Metn enero arceri ee be IEEE OUR Ee Um b UI DUREE vet rhe 233 Floppy Disk Insertion Removal Procedure essere enne nennen rennen trennen 234 Disk Status ee tete cre nte re Dr ete rd HR ER UR D e e ride rhe i EEE 235 Storage Start Stop Controls 5 nei ane ed etait tuto de on Cen OR Odone 237 Data Storage Replay Procedure essere 239 Alarm Acknowledgment Procedure eeeeeeseseeee
223. e rre 1 EA 1 VRXI00 OVERVIEW eni reete te tete ir de HER eee ERST REPRE sis wees 2 VRX150 Overview uie obe i ed ee eee Ode e derer eae 3 UnpackIng ne ire eiie sess biet Eee eee ION PER SLE ERR e Een 4 Speci Cations oto e C t aL e Ro t domes 5 Modell NUmDBer uet e net abu t dtt ues tuta 13 INSTALLATION e 15 Installing optional DSU software esee enne ener entere 15 Site Preparation teer ei Renoir iti id e ree de IEEE 15 Location gene ee ee ei te tene e ope eee ciere eo 16 16 e AIO eae dee 20 PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING CONCEPTS AND PROCEDURES 31 OVELVIEW dg tes ete ene te Se OR Ae be teneret b e e Hie e e e bote pe 31 Quick Start Proerammine reeds caved cate del vase tete ee tere 31 Modes of Operations ien ere riore ie HER ee SE E REUS Dr Rud 31 Menu oe ote een eee dil dete o dte eet ie ee a eee 32 B tt n cee e eee suns pres pues 39 Text Entry From External Sources eese ener ene nr en eren entrent 44 Access to Floppy Drive Keyboard Barcode Reader Connection esses 46 Definition of Function Blocks redet tet ie E esi etes 48 Components of function 50 How t program inp
224. e same value as PV 1 196 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution continued Parameter name Definition by Triggered Conditions Result present FAST FORWARD 12 00 If Hot Start ON Profile starts at first intersecting point between profile and PV 1 Profile starts here Figure 5 11 Hot Start FAST FORWARD is a way to test for proper Level ON functioning of the profiler s events and outputs without having to wait for the profiler to execute at its normal speed When FAST FORWARD is ON the profiler will run at a speed determined by the TIME MULTIPLIER parameter The higher the time multiplier the faster the profiler will run Fast Forward is activated by a discrete input Example The Programmer is running at a 500 msec scan rate The TIME MULTIPLIER is set to 60 Therefore the profiler will run 60 times faster than normal The profiler will increment in 6500msec x 60 or 30 second increments Put another way every half second the profiler will advance 30 seconds See Figure 5 12 VPR amp VRX User Manual When in Run mode profiler runs at Fast Forward speed 197 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution continued Parameter n ame Definition Triggered Conditions Result by present SHUTDOWN 198 alues sampled at each
225. ean average CVn OV of the input over the specified Average Period A new sample of the input will be taken on every instrument scan cycle The block average is only updated at the end of the Average Period When the Reset Input is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the output is held until the Reset Input is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets Table 4 45 describes the 1 Point Block Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 45 1 Point Block Average Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter This parameter will be averaged number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When the Reset is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the output is held until the Reset is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets AVERAGE PERIOD 0 1 to 1440 Length of averaging period in minutes 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 139 Programming Function Blocks and Features Rolling Average Outputs a rolling mean average CVn OV of the input over the specified Average Period As new input samples are collected old samples are discarded The function will calculate a new average at equally spaced sample intervals Sample interval averaging period of samples Rolling Average samples of samples Example of sam
226. eases Use these prompts to plot a curve using 2 to 20 X Y FEEDBACK OFF analog parameter For valve characterization select BC to propagate the number back calculation BC value from a downstream Analog Output Also program the upstream loop s feedback with this CV s back calculation value CV BC See Figure 4 9 Attention If feedback is programmed to an analog parameter or a number the X and Y values must define a curve that is not bell shaped or complex That is all Y values must be increasing or decreasing 124 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 12 00 FUNCTION ov INPUT GENERATOR CV Figure 4 9 Function Generator Configuration For Valve Characterization Al Figure 4 10 Function Generator Configuration For Input Signal Characterization VPR amp VRX User Manual 125 Programming Function Blocks and Features Interval Timer This timer counts down from the preset value in minutes This time remaining is CVn OV The timer has a single discrete output CVn OS which is ON 1 when the timer is actively counting or when RESET RUN is ON 1 CVn OS is OFF 0 when the timer has timed out to zero An OFF to ON transition of RESET RUN resets the timer to the preset value and turns CVn OS on an ON to OFF transition starts the timer Table 4 34 describes the Interval Timer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 34 In
227. ed Prompt Range Selections Definition LOAD PROGRAM FROM DISK Files with LNS extension Select a program to load into the Setpoint Profiler function block Press Enter to load Existing profiles in the instrument will be replaced by the profiles in the program being loaded Example You are loading Program1 LNS which contains Profiles 1 2 and 3 These profiles will replace the profiles currently set up in the instrument Profile 4 will not be replaced LOAD PROGRAM FROM MEMORY PROGRAM NUMBER Select a program 1 96 to load into the Setpoint Profiler function block There are up to 96 slots allotted for program memory storage Depending on how many profiles your instrument has each program will contain a certain number of profiles See How programs are stored in memory on page 209 for details 12 00 Not dlowed Figure 5 14 Allowable and Non Allowable Program Storage VPR amp VRX User Manual 203 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RAMP TYPE VAL DUR TIME RATE See 4 types of ramp segments on page 186 EXTERNAL TIME UNITS SECS MINS HOURS Select the time units to be used by all segments EDIT SEGMENTS GUAR SOAK LO LIM GUAR SOAK HI LIM OFF or number OFF or number of the profile See Table 5 6 The profiler will Hold if PV 1 or PV 2 deviates more than this much be
228. ed and properly terminated to ensure a reliable network Table 2 8 shows the five connections per device Table 2 8 Communications Connections TX The positive signal of the transmitter TX The negative signal of the transmitter COM The shield of the communications cable RX The positive signal of the receiver RX The negative signal of the receiver We recommend using a conduit for each cable or at least separating them from high voltage lines or magnetic fields Table 2 9 shows the communications wiring procedure See Figure 2 12 Table 2 9 Communications Wiring Procedure Step Action 1 signals to the Master s RX terminals plus to plus and minus to minus Connect the Master s TX signals to each of the RX signals of the Slaves and all the Slave s TX 2 Connect instrument to instrument in a serial or daisy chain fashion with the Master instrument at one end and the last instrument at the other as shown in Figure 2 12 3 Set only the last instrument s termination ON All other slave instruments must be unterminated To change a termination setting see Setting The Communications Link Termination Jumper in Section 9 4 for instructions ATTENTION For CE compliance a triple shielded cable a shield around each of the twisted pairs which are tied together and connected to the com Terminal TB2 Pin 3 plus an overall shield the insulated outer shield is c
229. ed from probe output linearization Boolean value that determines whether the anti sooting factor output A1 will be based linearly on probe temperature SOOTING FACTOR ON or a constant value of 2 0 SOOTING FACTOR OFF If SOOTING FACTOR is ON a probe temperature of 1408 F or below limits C output to 0 75 and 2086 F or above limits C output to 2 0 PERCENTAGE HYDROGEN NUMBER OFF Number representing H that is used in the dewpoint calculation 130 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features O Probe Output LINEAR CARBON XXXXX X POTENTIA 0 0 CONTROL 1250 0 INDIRECT OV 0 0 mV 1250 0 mV Anti Sooting Factor SP HIGH C O Probe Temp CONSTANT CONTROL LP TYPE K typ x RMAN F SAFE DOWN Low Temperature Discrete F SAFE DOWN CO LINEAR Config as req d by CO analyzer Dewpoint CONSTANT Furnace Temperature FB PV FURNACE XXXXXX CONTROL LP F SAFE UP Figure 4 13 Typical Carbon Potential Control Configuration 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 131 Programming Function Blocks and Features Relative Humidity Outputs CVn OV relative humidity as a function of dry bulb temperature wet bulb temperature and atmostpheric pressure Table 4 39 describes the Relative Humidity prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Prompt RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH DRY BULB TEMP WET BULB TEMP ATM PRESS PA TEMPERATURE
230. ed in the ALTERN timebase then the storage Trend1 will be stored at the HIGH rate Trend2 behaves the same way NEW FILE Select to see the Replay From Disk menu from which you may select another stored file for replay Available for replay trends only TEMP7 1941 5 DEGF 500 0 2500 0 12 15 N Zoom cursor E Amount of magnification ALARM 1 HIGH Figure 6 4 Vertical Trend at 2X Zoom 224 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Panel Display VPR 100 VRX100 To stop the rotation of the panel display on a single point follow the procedure in Table 6 3 PRESSURE 3 PRESS 3 30 00 PSI Figure 6 5 Panel Display Table 6 3 Stop Panel Display Rotation Procedure Step Action Result 1 Press Tab key Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display 2 Press Tab key Displays the desired point Holds display on desired point An appears in the lower right of the display To resumes rotation through all points follow the procedure in Table 6 4 Table 6 4 Resume Panel Display Rotation Procedure m Press Tab key Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display Press Enter The disappears and rotation resumes 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 225 Online Operatio
231. eeeeeeee eene nennen nennen entente innen ener nennen 241 Diagnostic Acknowledgment 242 Delete All Diagnostics Procedute ere eed er ee e ei ttr e 243 Tune Loop Prompts 247 Stages Of ue oni name ate nam 250 Pr tune STOPPED Prompts ete eee ere SED GR PRI DR te Dn eig eere ES 250 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING Prompts eese nennen eene 251 Pretune COMPLETE Prompts iere e tute cte be ER ere Eit Ir re tote Ee hence ipea 252 Pr etune Abort Messages reed ee een mibi pedea eite 253 Maintenance Mode Meni nee nete T EHE E RON DR t REES ESEE Eni 255 Calibrate EMF Input Procedure dece rete pite pei n e ied pe reete e eee 257 Calibrate RTD Input Procedure tuere tret te re bet 258 Calibrate Analog Output Procedure nennen nennen nennen nenne enne 259 Offline Diagnostic Prompts re er et rper tree RE iei Ere eh rie e Eit este chee ree E 259 Database Services Prompts DRE er eiue d Oei Sune RGIS 260 Circuit Card Removal Procedure VPR100 amp VRX100 essere nnne 263 Circuit Card Replacement Procedure VPR100 amp VRX100O sese 264 Circuit Card Removal Procedure 150 nennen nennen 265 Circuit Card Replacement Procedure VRX150 esses enne enne en nennen 2
232. elect 0 99 When any data set reaches this of full capacity the instrument will display the DISK WARNING message VPR amp VRX User Manual 179 Programming Function Blocks and Features Preinitialize 120MB Zip disk with DSU On instruments with a 120MB and Zip drives preinitialize the disk using DSU software shipped on a separate disk Using DSU will save you hours of waiting when you Initialize Disk 1 44MB disk users skip to Initializing Disk ATTENTION LS120 Superdrive or Zip drive must be installed on your PC to run DSU a Data Storage Utility E Drive Letter Trend Groups E Status Exit Table 4 77 120MB Zip Preinitialization Procedure Step Action 1 Insert the 120MB Zip disk into your PC drive Run DSU The dialog box above appears 2 3 Click on Drive Letter to specify the drive on your PC A B etc 4 Click on Status to see amount of free disk space Each trend group requires 24MB so 2 trend groups require 48MB 3 groups require 72MB If your disk does not have enough free space delete some files before continuing 5 When your disk has enough free space click on Trend Groups to specify the number of Trend Groups the instrument will store data to 1 2 or 3 6 Click on Initialize to prepare the disk for storage Each trend group takes about two minutes 7 Exit DSU 8 Remove disk insert it into the instrument and initialize it
233. ent 2 causes incremental value Elapsed time change toward next soak Value Figure 5 6 External Ramp Type ATTENTION e External ramp type s TIME prompt is in engineering units of the PV not in time units seconds minutes or hours e Toincrement toward a lower soak value enter a positive TIME amount The Setpoint Profiler knows to increment or decrement this amount toward the next soak value 190 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Soak segment All soak segments have a beginning VALUE and a TIME during which that value is maintained This is true regardless of the ramp type used Guaranteed Soak Guaranteed soak will Hold the profile value if either PV to the profile typically a Control Loop s PV deviates specified amounts above or below the profiler output See Figure 5 7 For a guaranteed soak to occur the following conditions must be met 1 The GUAR SOAK 1 and GUAR SOAK 2 prompts for the segment ramps and soaks must be enabled set to ON and 2 The GUARANTEED SOAK discrete input to the profile must be enabled level high If either of these are disabled a guaranteed soak cannot occur even with excessive deviation between profile and PV Hysteresis 12 00 This parameter specifies the amount the deviation between profile and PV must be reduced before the profile resumes running after a guaranteed soak See Figure 5 7 After a guaranteed soak the profile will resume runnin
234. ent does not have a Display 2 key the Display key accesses Displays 2 10 On the VRX150 with no control option the Auto Manual key functions as the Display 2 key Table 4 63 describes the prompts for assigning displays to keys Table 4 63 Assign Displays To Keys Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition BLANKING TIME OFF 1 HOUR 30 MIN 15 This is a screen saver type function If enabled the screen MIN 5 MIN 1MIN will blank after time selected Screen will unblank if a key is pressed or an alarm diagnostic occurs DISPLAY KEY 0 1 OFF PARM By selecting PARM you can connect a discrete input parameter which will function as the Display key Each off to on transition of this discrete will behave as if the Display key were pressed Select 0 1 or OFF to disable this function BACKGROUND WHITE BLACK This sets the background color of displays to black or white COLOR Affects all Trend live and replay Bar Graph and Panel displays Does not affect Loop Unit Data Summary or menus SELECT PEN PEN 1 Assign a color to each of up to 12 points Affects points COLOR PEN 2 displayed on all Trend live and replay Bar Graph Loop and Panel displays Pen 1 corresponds to Point 1 Pen 2 corresponds to Point 2 etc Choices Green Cyan Yellow Purple Blue Brown Red PEN 12 Black White Attention A Yellow pen appears yellow on a black background and orange on a white background Caution Do not select a
235. ention method is to suppress the noise at its source This is the most effective but also the most difficult because it is not easy to identify all of the potential noise sources in a typical industrial installation Therefore suppression is usually a last resort for those extreme situations where the other methods are insufficient by themselves See Noise Suppression at Source which follows 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 295 B 4 Recommended Wiring Practices General rules e All wiring must conform to local codes and practices e Wires carrying similar types of signals Table Appendix B 1 may be bundled together but bundles with different types of signals must be kept separate to prevent inductive or capacitive coupling CE compliance Shielded wires are required on all Analog I O low level Discrete I O and Communications connections to meet CE compliance for emissions and immunity Shields must be connected to the Local Earth Ground such as the ground bus bar or a grounded panel General Wiring Recommendations All input signal wires including thermocouples and extension lead wire must be shielded and the shields connected to Earth Ground DO NOT connect shield to any other unit ground this will not provide adequate immunity protection Noise Grounding The shields for all cables must be connected to Earth Ground DO NOT connect shield to any other unit ground this will not provide adequate immu
236. eplacement Kit Position 4 in Figure 11 6 51404605 501 ae Base Board Replacement Kit Kit 10 in Figure 11 6 output 51404605 502 Analog Output Base Board Replacement Kit Kit 10 in Figure 11 6 2 outputs 51404605 503 Analog Output Base Board Replacement Kit Kit 10 in Figure 11 6 3 outputs 51404605 504 Analog Output Base Board Replacement Kit Kit 10 in Figure 11 6 4 outputs 51197801 501 DI DO Motherboard Printed Circuit Assembly Kit 11 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197803 501 Main Power Supply Replacement Kit Kit 12 in Figure 11 6 51404568 501 24 Vdc Power Supply Replacement Kit 33 in Figure 11 6 51197805 501 Dual Mechanical Relay Output Module Kit 13 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197808 501 Dual Solid State AC Discrete Output Module Kit 14 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197809 501 Dual Solid State DC Discrete Output Module Kit 15 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197810 501 Three Discrete Inputs PCA Module Kit 16 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 281 Parts Kit Part Number Kit Description See 51197811 501 Current Voltage Analog Output PCA Module Kit 17 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197812 501 RS 485 Serial Communications PCA Module Kit 18 in Figure 11 6 Replacement Kit 51197813 501 Isolated Analog Output Power Supply
237. ers 80 Set Mode 81 Enter Labels 82 Program Analog Inputs 85 Program Control Loops 89 Program Analog Outputs 100 Program Discrete Inputs 104 Program Discrete Outputs 105 Program Calculated Values 106 Program Alarms 144 Program Totalizers 146 Program Profiles 148 Program Constants 149 Copy Block 151 ji Program Displays 152 Enable Features 163 Program Security 164 Program Serial Communications 165 Set Clock 166 Configuration Calibration Store amp Load 167 Scan Rate 168 Select Language 169 Data Storage 170 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 77 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 2 Programming tips 78 See Section 3 for general programming procedures Before programming a function block s input parameter with a CV s Calculated Value output parameter you must program the CV first otherwise the CV s output parameter will not be available for programming The function block SY System Parameter operates internally and has no menu It automatically produces outputs which reflect the status of alarms data storage diagnostics and reference junction temperature These outputs can be programmed as inputs to function blocks See Table 3 5 in Section 3 Each function block can be labeled with custom descriptors and tags to identify the function on displays You can enter these labels under the menu item ENTER LABELS or within each function block s me
238. ers will correspond to actual menu settings that you program on the instrument As shown in Figure 3 17 the function block s input parameter will be the actual Type J thermocouple run from the furnace to the instrument s input terminals The block will process the thermocouple s millivolt signal to generate a temperature measurement AI1 s output value denoted OV will essentially be the furnace zone temperature The function block is shown for now with one input denoted by Here the control loop block will expect to find the data comprising its process variable The LP1 block s single output is the loop s main control output Denoted OV Loop 1 s Output Value it will range between 0 and 100 The value of LP1 OV at any given instant will be determined by the control loop function block s PID algorithm The last block in the diagram is the analog output function block AO1 Drawn at this point with just a single input and output its primary purpose will be to generate a 4 to 20 mA signal that linearly corresponds to whatever value is applied at its input For example if AO1 s input is defined as some value that ranges from 0 to 100 an input value of 0 will cause AOI to generate a 4 mA signal at the instrument s AOI output terminals A 12 mA signal will be generated in response to an input of 5096 while 20 mA will result when a 100 input value is applied 1 input paramete
239. essage Meaning BEZEL OPEN Disk use is not permitted while the front panel bezel is open The bezel must be closed and latched WRITE PROTECTED The write protect tab is set open on the floppy disk The tab must be closed to permit data storage DISK ERRORS The disk installed in the drive is faulty or is not a DOS formatted 1 44 Mb disk It must be formatted before it can be initialized Formatting can be performed on an IBM compatible PC or with the FORMAT DISK command in the Maintenance menu DISK IS MISSING No disk is installed in the drive Checking current storage setup To see what is being stored and when select DATA STORAGE then select REVIEW CURRENT SCHEDULES See Section 4 26 for description of schedules 236 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Starting and stopping storage Data Storage can be started and stopped three ways At the highest level the ENABLE STORAGE menu item enables or disables all data storage At the next highest level EXTERNAL ENABLE enables or disables storage for each file type Trends 1 3 Alarms Events Diagnostics Unit Data At the lowest level storage for each file type is started and stopped with one of two controls a menu item BATCH STATE or a discrete parameter BATCH CONTROL Table 7 4 describes each method of starting and stopping storage ENABLE STORAGE EXTERNAL ENABLE BATCH STATE Table 7 4 Storage Start Stop Controls Comments
240. essages The instrument executes diagnostic routines during instrument start up and during maintenance procedures such as calibration It also monitors online operation for both process faults and instrument errors Error messages Table 9 8 shows messages that may appear on the instrument displays if a diagnostic condition is detected along with the action you should take Table 9 8 Diagnostic Error Messages Message Description User action INPUT FAIL The analog input is either open shorted Check input devices for open or short The analog input has been exposed to See Section 2 for proper wiring electromagnetic noise techniques The analog input is out of range Each Al type uses one of four gain settings The maximum voltage normally supplied by the Al source determines which gain setting is used and therefore its measurable range Gain Low signal High signal 25mV 30mV 30mV 75mV 90mV 90mV 1V 200mV 1200mV 5V 300mV 5200mV Example Al1 is 1 to 5V range therefore gain is 5V therefore input failure if 300mV gt signal gt 5200mV FLOAT PT ERROR A floating point calculation error has Check Free Form Math and Math CV occurred divide by zero underflow inputs for division by 0 Also check for overflow input values producing a underflow or overflow error that is calculation is not between 1 10 and 3x10 or is not between 1 10 and 3x10 CHECKSUM ERROR An error was detected in the datab
241. esults of Logic Equation Using 120 Table 4 30 Inverter Prompts eee deer ee eres od recs di uidet ee bee ipee ted Penes 121 Table 4 31 BCD Promblts 52 nte RU UR iere iU tite per heo plebi bee ee Fe pie ert eu o ie ieget ud 122 Table 4 32 How Profiles Are Saved In Memory VPR only sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenee nennen nennen renes 123 Table 4 33 Function Generator Prompts etri trate bel EEEE E EEEn EEEE trier ieis 124 Table 4 54 Interval Timer Pronipts x oet prre ost re terere tete E iet i Hsc meet 126 Table 4 35 Periodic Timer Prompts nt ineat e ett deste detegere tert Ee hoe Eta dba 128 Table 4 36 Set Up Timer Prompts ebrei eeepc Pedir sperpee E aS 128 Table4 37 Mass Flow Promjpts een ihe Derese Gre pet DRE REIR ER S 129 Table 4 38 Carbon Prompts ione negent i o pto etr t edit ptos 130 Table 4 39 Relative Humidity Prompts ener nne en rennen enne tenete ne trennen enne en rennen 132 Table 4 40 Fo Sterilization Prompts eene nennen eene enne tene nene ene 133 Table 4 41 Advanced Splitter Prompts cete ete rap be pede bero erigens 135 Table 4 42 Standard Splitter Prompts 5e te Reto ton ie tete teen neue Re 136 Table 4 43 Scaling Prompts ce me fete e dece re re eee Ene eee dee eee reed 137 Table 4 44 Signal Clamp
242. ets to either zero or the residual total final total minus preset if one exists At each machine scan cycle an integration of the input is subtracted from the preset value When this result reaches or goes below zero the discrete output of the totalizer goes high and remains high for 1 scan cycle The totalizer then resets and starts again The value resets to either the preset or the residual total preset plus final total since final total is either zero or negative if one exists DEMAND CONTIN SEC MIN HOUR DAY On Demand Same as UP except executes only while the ON DEMAND INPUT discrete is ON 1 Input is ignored while ON DEMAND INPUT is OFF 0 Continuous Same as UP except the total ignores the PRESET value and integrates forever continuously Time units of the totalizer ON DEMAND INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Appears for Functions as the On Demand input for the DEMAND action Activates totalizer when ON 1 PRESET OFF analog parameter number Up totalizer counts up to this value Down totalizer counts down from this value ZERO CUTOFF OFF or number Represents the least value to be accumulated in the totalizer Input values below this value will be input as zero RESETTABLE RESET 12 00 YES NO OFF discrete parameter 0 1 VPR amp VRX User Manual If NO the Totalizer is non resettable and cannot be reset via the operator keyp
243. etune COMPLETE Prompts Prompt Definition STATUS Status Completed This is a read only prompt PB GAIN New Prop Band or gain determined by pretune This is a read only prompt RESET New Reset determined by pretune This is a read only prompt RATE New Rate determined by pretune This is a read only prompt INSTALL Select to install the new pretune values into loop s tuning parameters specified by TUNE SET in Table 7 11 ABORT Select to delete the new pretune values if you do not wish to install them 252 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Pretune Abort messages One of the following messages is displayed when an unusual event has aborted the pretune PTA means Pretune Abort Table 7 14 Pretune Abort Messages Message Meaning User action required PTA WARM START pretune A warm start occurred during pretune Repeat PTA WENT OFFLINE Repeat pretune Instrument went out of Online mode during pretune PTA LOOP STATUS Loop has PV that is bad i e failed sensor OR PV is aconstant value such as from an upstream block in manual OR Loop has back calculation value from a downstream block that is bad or is the result of the downstream block being in manual Repeat pretune PTA SP SEL CHNGE Loop was in automatic mode and an attempt was made to switch between Setpoint 1 and Setpoint 2 Repeat pretune PTA OUT
244. explanation of the function of each button appears in Section 3 5 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 33 Programming and Operating Concepts Getting familiar with the operating modes 34 To develop a feel for navigating between modes power up the instrument and perform steps 1 7 below 1 7 When powering up the instrument for the very first time the logo display will initially appear Press the Menu button several times until the ON LINE PROGRAM or MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENU is displayed Refer to Figure 3 5 Note Menus are shown with all possible options your menu may not have all options Once you have established which MAIN MENU you are on use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to verify each MAIN MENU choice as indicated in Figure 3 5 Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to find and highlight the menu s SET MODE prompt When the SET MODE prompt is highlighted press the Enter button Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons to switch the instrument to one of the other two instrument modes and press the Enter button Once within the mode selected in Step 5 scroll through the mode s MAIN MENU using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons Verify each menu choice as indicated in Figure 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for the last of the three mode selections possible Having completed the preceding exercise changing the instrument s mode should now be a simple task Furthermore a fundamental understanding of h
245. ff line Diagnostics The following table describes the prompts Table 8 5 Offline Diagnostic Prompts Prompt Function RAM SIZE KB Shows amount of RAM found during power up self test If less than 1024KB replace the CPU KEYBOARD TEST Select this to verify operation of each key When each key is pressed its name should appear onscreen An AT keyboard can also be tested if connected DISPLAY TEST Select this then press Enter to test each display color red green blue white black Any failed display pixels should be apparent DISK READ WRITE TEST Select this to verify read write disk function You must use a formatted disk Disk data is unaffected by this test 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 259 Maintenance 8 7 Database Services The following table describes the prompts Table 8 6 Database Services Prompts Prompt Function CLEAR CONFIGURATION Clears all setup and configuration data entered by the user Does not clear ONLY calibration CLEAR CALIBRATION Clears all analog data calibration values Does not clear configuration ONLY CLEAR ALL MEMORY Clears the Instrument memory of all programming tuning data setups etc and restores the original factory set default values for all parameters and functions and calibration FULL UPGRADE Upgrades all function blocks of the instrument from a disk file with LNF extension Overwr
246. g the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Rate Bad machine scan rate Re enter machine scan rate Invalid Machine Update Invalid Parameter Code Bad parameter code has been found Generally caused by transferring configurations between instruments with different software versions Verify programming of affected function block Invalid Parameter for Data Type Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Invalid Tag Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block 278 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Error Messages Table 10 1 Error Messages continued Error Description User Action Invalid Tag Request Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block A class of block was detected that is invalid for the product Invalid Type in Point Spec Verify programming of affected function block Lag or Delay Less than Zero Al lag or delay is less than zero or equal to zero Low Limit Outside of Circuit Al circuit low limit is lt voltage limit of 500 mV Change circuit
247. g when the deviation has decreased by this amount The following examples assume GUARANTEED SOAK is ON 1 and the example segment s GUAR SOAK 1 is ON 1 Example 1 Assume PV 1 is 20 units above the profile output GUAR SOAK HI LIM is 15 HYSTERESIS is 5 The profile will Hold because the deviation high limit is exceeded The profile will resume running when the PV 1 is 10 15 5 units or less above the profile output Example 2 Assume PV 1 is 20 units below the profile output GUAR SOAK LO LIM is 15 HYSTERESIS is 5 The profile will Hold because the deviation low limit is exceeded The profile will resume running when the PV 1 is 10 15 5 units or less below the profile output Guaranteed Soak Limit Check Guaranteed Soak Segment ON Profile Segment AND Guaranteed Soak Profile ON 4 Guaranteed Soak High Limit Hysteresis ee Re Setpoint VALUE of profile profile Process Variable 1 Hysteresis i 41 Guaranteed Soak Low Limit Returned below limit and hysteresis Profile resumes RUN Setpoint deviation still within hysteresis still on HOLD Excessive deviation Profile changes to HOLD State Figure 5 7 Guaranteed Soak and Hysteresis VPR amp VRX User Manual 191 Setpoint Profiler Segment Events Each segment contains 16 progra
248. gramming Function Blocks and Features Prompt INPUT SOURCE INPUT LOW LIMIT INPUT HIGH LIMIT Table 4 13 Analog Output Prompts Range Selections Enter OFF analog parameter number as the analog output source If the AO s input source is a PID control loop specify a high value of 100 and a low value of 0 For other input sources specify limits using the same units as the AO s input source Definition For a control loop this is typically set to a control output LP OV However it may be directed to any analog value such as a calculated value to retransmit the value to an external device Input limits Variable input limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with HS or LS See Program Constants Section 4 16 OUTPUT LOW LIMIT OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT INC SLEW LIMIT DEC SLEW LIMIT FAILSAFE FAILSAFE VALUE For CAT enter any output range within 0 20 mA For VAT enter any output range within 0 5V Enter OFF or 0 1 to 999 9 units minute units of the AO s input source NONE UP Upscale DOWN Downscale VALUE Enter a value between Input Low Limit and Input High Limit or analog parameter or OFF These limits scale the output to the input limits CAT A low limit of 4 and high limit of 20 will provide a 4 20 mA output range VAT A low limit of 1 and a high limit of 5 will provide a 1 5 output range Limits the rate of increase or decrease of th
249. h specifies which point will be monitored for an alarm condition One of the choices for the INPUT is PARM which lets you connect the INPUT to one of the output codes in Table 3 5 Therefore the INPUT is an input parameter because it receives its data from another function block Some function blocks can have multiple input parameters For example an Alarm function block has an INPUT and a SETPOINT both of which can be connected to other function blocks Discrete Input function blocks have no input parameters that is they have no inputs that can be connected to another block s output codes VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Function block parameter Outp A function block parameter s data is contained within the block When you are programming a function block and are not given a choice of PARM you are programming a function block parameter Typical choices when programming a function block parameter are NONE OFF any numerical value or a list of options for the parameter but not PARM See Figure 3 11 For example to program an Alarm function block s ALARM ACTION you select from a list of choices NONE LOW HIGH DEV LRATE HRATE Other function block parameters are an Analog Input s RANGE LOW and RANGE HIGH where you specify the voltage range or temperature range ut code An output code is the result of the function block s operations on the input parameters and function block
250. hat s in this section Section 5 explains the functions configuration and operation of the Setpoint Profiler Terminology is defined and all prompts are explained Overview of the Setpoint Profiler 183 Components of a profile 186 Parameters that control a profile s execution 194 How to set up a profiler 200 How to load and run a profiler 208 5 1 Overview of the Setpoint Profiler Definitions A profiler is a Setpoint Profiler function block This function block is what you interact with when you program and run a profile The profiler is analogous to a compact disk player on a stereo in that the profiler plays a profile Your instrument contains 1 2 3 or 4 profilers depending on the option ordered A profile is a series of ramp and soak segments along with any parameters associated with those segments such as segment loops events and guaranteed soak enables The setpoint produced by the profile is used by a control loop s Setpoint 2 A profile is also known as a curve or recipe A profile is analogous to a compact disc in that the profile is played by the profiler Your instrument contains 1 2 3 or 4 profiles depending on the option ordered A program is a set of one to four profiles depending on the instrument Programs in a single profile instrument contain 1 profile programs in a two profile instrument contain 2 profiles programs in a three profile instrument contain 3 profiles and
251. hat is the loop will neutralize the wastewater so that it can be safely released to the environment The wastewater pH which is assumed to be primarily acidic will be controlled by introducing a caustic reagent to the contents of the treatment vessel This will be done through use of a time proportioning relay signal that will pulse a pump connected to a caustic reagent source A function block diagram representing the control scheme of Figure 3 21 has been drawn in Figure 3 22 The same diagram method was used to produce Figure 3 20 AO1 BC CONNECT TO PUMP p RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 14 CIRCUIT LOW 1 TYPE STANDARD CIRCUIT HIGH 5 SP1 7 00 LOW Esso IN HIGH LIMIT 100 IMPULSE TIME 150 Figure 3 22 Function Block Diagram Of Figure 3 21 This drawing is similar to the temperature control application The analog input control loop and analog output function blocks and AOI have been used similarly The discrete output function block was added drawn as a circle at AO1 s apex and named DO1 Recall that any analog input control loop analog output or discrete output available may be used Up to 24 discrete outputs DO1 through DO24 are potentially available depending on the instrument s model number VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts From Figure 3 22 the instrument s function block will essentially process the 4 to 20 mA
252. he following formula for U S Units Of Measurement MF FACTOR 1 x SQRT DP INPUT x PRESSURE INPUT 14 7 TEMPERATURE INPUT 459 where FACTOR 1 is calculated by user DP INPUT is differential pressure in inches of water PRESSURE INPUT is in PSIG TEMPERATURE INPUT is in F Or Mass flow is calculated from the following formula for International Units Of Measurement MF FACTOR 1 569 x SQRT DP INPUT x PRESSURE INPUT 101 4 TEMPERATURE INPUT 273 where FACTOR 1 is calculated by user DP INPUT is differential pressure in KPASCALS PRESSURE INPUT is in KPASCALS TEMPERATURE INPUT is in C Table 4 37 describes the Mass Flow prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 37 Mass Flow Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT DP INPUT OFF analog parameter Differential pressure input number PRESSURE INPUT OFF analog parameter Pressure input in PSIG or KPASCALS number TEMP INPUT OFF analog parameter Temperature in C or F number UNITS OF MEASURE US or International Units of measure FACTOR 1 OFF analog parameter Flow factor for the particular installation number 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 129 Programming Function Blocks and Features Carbon Potential The Carbon Potential Control Function Block provides for weight percent wt control
253. hey can be programmed with numerical values only A Constant s DESTINATION overrides that numerical value with a live value variable provided by the Constant s VALUE For example suppose Loop1 s Gain 1 is programmed as the number 5 00 and Constant 1 s Value is CV 1 OV the output of Calculated Value 2 By programming Constant1 s Destination as LP1GN Loop1 s Gain 1 will no longer be 5 00 but will be continuously updated by the live value provided by CV 1 OV CN 1 LP 1 VALUE R GAIN 1 5 00 DEST LP1 GN CV10V Figure 4 18 Example of Constant Destination IMPORTANT Always be certain that the destination is compatible with its associated loop or analog output A mismatched destination can affect your output and can be difficult to diagnose Examples If destination is AO1 IT impulse time be sure that AO1 is programmed as a DAT If destination is LP2 IS be sure that Loop 2 is a type that has increasing slew limit on its menu ATTENTION f the destination is used the parameter being overridden by the destination cannot be accessed or changed For example Loop Gain cannot be tuned Online in the TUNE LOOP menu f you reprogram destination to another parameter NONE the original destination parameter maintains its last live value as determined by the constant s value If you want the destination s last live value to be zero or NONE 1 change the constant value to zero or NONE 2 change to Onl
254. ical Relay Normally Closed Mechanical Relay Normally Open A B External power DO1 2C C Be COMM any com n DO1 NC terminal DO 100mA max DO1 Solid State AC DC QO Open collector Figure 2 10 Discrete Output Connections Note Figure 2 10 shows example wiring for DO1 and should be used for any Discrete Output 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 27 Installation Position Proportional output connections Position Proportional type controls require two analog inputs PV Slidewire two discrete outputs INC DEC and one analog output Slidewire Power The analog output must be a voltage type VAT programmed to provide a constant V to power the slidewire feedback See Section 3 13 for sample PP feedback configuration TB1 L1 L2 N 24V 1 1 AO2 AO2 4 TB2 O000000000000000 TX TX COM RX RX 00000000 Do TB3 DO6 NC DO6 NO DO5 6 C DO5 NC 005 NO DO4 NC DO4 NO 003 4 C DO3 NC DO3 NO DO2 NC DO2 NO DO1 2C DO1 NC 009 0000000000000 TB4 AM A Alt C 11 2 Al2 A Al2 C Al3 A Al3 C AI3 4 B 4 A Al4 C 15 A AI5 C AI5 6 16 A 16 C Supply Voltage B PV B 0000000000000 F
255. igure 2 11 Position Proportional Typical Wiring DIAT output connections DIAT type control requires 1 analog input PV and 2 discrete outputs INC DEC This type of control doesn t require a slidewire TB1 L1 L2 N 24V 24V 1 1 2 AO2 AO3 AO3 AO4 AO4 0000000000000000 00000000 TB3 DO6 NC DO6 NO DO5 6 C 005 NC DO5 NO 004 NC 004 NO 003 4 C DO3 NC DO3 NO DO2 NC DO2 Ni DO1 2C DO1 NC DO 0000000000000000 TB4 AH C AM 2B Al2 A Al2 C C AI3 4 A Al4 C AIS AI5 C 5 6 B AI6 C PV 000000000 0000009 Supply Voltage 28 Figure 2 12 DIAT Typical Wiring VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Installation Communications The communications network is based on Honeywell protocols with a Master Slave relationship These are the two protocols available Binary and Modbus RTU This network is configured around the IEEE RS 422 485 multi drop standard The Master is a PC host running any software compatible with these Honeywell protocols A slave can be any instrument equipped with serial communications capability Refer to the product communications manual for additional details on the protocol Binary 51 52 25 54 and Modbus RTU 51 52 25 66 All communication equipment supporting the 422 485 differential drive must be correctly install
256. in any Data Storage mode In CONTINUOUS mode it will start as scheduled and collect START YEAR samples until stopped by manual command the ENABLE STORAGE in the Online Data Storage menu INTERVAL DAYS In BATCH mode the timer schedule will be started and INTERVAL HOURS stopped by an Online menu selection BATCH STATE by INTERVAL MINS the operator or by an optional discrete input designated as the BATCH CONTROL SELECT FILENAME FILE CYCLE DRYER Select a file name to identify the type of Unit data to be PROD RECORD TANK stored UNIT LOOP REACTR CONFIG KILN VESSEL CALIB WCHEM PRESS FURNCE DEMIN CONTRL BATCH FERMTR LEHR LINE STRLZR OVEN ZONE ATTENTION A maximum of 12 data points per second can be stored in Trends 1 2 3 and Unit Data combined 176 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Storage Allocation Choose STORAGE ALLOCATION under SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu to see the disk capacity and to allocate storage of each data type See Table 4 74 Prompt DISK CAPACITY TREND 1 LO RATE Table 4 74 Storage Allocation Prompts Range Selections Seconds 25 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 Minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50 Hours 1 Definition Displays total time available for non rollover trend storage based on the low storage rates programmed See Table 4 75 and Table 4 76 The disk capacity will display zeros if the stor
257. ine mode for 5 seconds to override the previous live value with zero or NONE 3 change back to program mode 4 re program constant s destination to NONE f you program multiple constants with the same destination only the highest numbered constant s destination takes effect For example if Constant 1 and Constant 5 both have destination AO2 IT then only Constant 5 s value is used by AO2 IT 150 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 17 Copy Block Use Copy Block to copy the setup of any function block to another channel of the same function block For example if you have programmed and want AI2 to have the same settings use Copy Block If desired you can make program changes to AI2 after the copy is complete If your instrument can run multiple profiles at the same time Copy Block is useful for copying the parameters of one profile to another For example if your instrument can run 2 profiles it may be useful to have both profiles use the same switches for starting holding and resetting After you program the first profile s parameters use Copy Block to copy Profile 1 to Profile 2 ATTENTION When copying Analog Output AO function blocks the calibration of that channel will also be copied You will have to recalibrate the destination AO channel s after the copy is complete See section 8 5 Table 4 53 describes the Copy Block prompts Table 4 53 Copy Block Promp
258. ing LP1 s output This will allow the generation an LP2 set point that will induce a process upset when the secondary loop is placed back in automatic mode Only after LP2 has been tuned can LP1 be tuned When tuning LP1 LP2 will be kept in automatic mode throughout the entire time is exercised Since the tuning of LP2 will have already been established tuning LP may be approached by first mentally blocking out the secondary control loop s existence and visualizing LP1 s output as connected to a sort of virtual analog VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts output function block In this light tuning the overall cascade control configuration becomes the considerably simpler matter of tuning a single control loop Set Point Profile Implementation By definition set point profiles are essentially user specified plots of process values against time These plots are characterized by segments which are a series of intervals of varying time lengths that divide the plots into several segments Within each segment process values are typically drawn as straight lines that ramp up or down or stay constant at predetermined levels An example of a simple five segment set point profile is shown in Figure 3 27 Set point profiles with up to 63 segments can be specified using the instrument Note that when a segment depicts the process value as sloping up or down it is referred to as a ramp The term
259. ing a profile or selecting a control loop s Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2 among many other possibilities The Program Discrete Input menu item will appear if an optional DI DO card is installed Select a discrete input to program then program the prompts in Table 4 14 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 14 Discrete Input Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition ACTION STATE NORMAL INVERT Determines whether the input will be normally closed or normally open when ON 1 To select closed when ON 1 enter NORMAL not inverted To select closed when OFF 0 enter INVERT inverted DELAY TIME Number of seconds When the DI is placed in its ON 1 state the DI function will wait for the specified delay time before indicating the ON 1 condition as an output If the DI ON state changes before the delay time expires no ON output will be indicated EVENT ENABLE NONE RISING FALLING Determines whether changes DI s status can be recorded BOTH as events in data storage NONE status changes are not stored RISING OFF 0 to ON 1 changes can be stored FALLING ON 1 to OFF 0 changes can be stored BOTH Both changes can be stored ATTENTION To change to 16 DI s and 16 DO s or to 8 DI s and 24 DO s see Section 9 4 104 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 11 Program Discrete Outputs Discrete Output function blocks control the relay or open collector out
260. ion of a furnace If the loop will be directly controlling air flow i e air flow will be the loop s process variable and fuel flow will be used as a wild variable to generate the ratio loop s working set point the RATIO SETPOINT menu choice will have to be set to 0 50 Hence if fuel flow is measured to be 60 the working set point that will be used in the ratio loop s control of air flow will be 60 x 0 50 30 To make a ratio control loop s working set point equal to the product of RATIO SETPOINT and a specific wild variable value the loop s working set point must be toggled to SP2 using the SP Set Point Select key while viewing the loop s ON LINE display Refer to Figure 4 1 SETPOINT SELECT OFF discrete parameter 0 1 When the DISCR VS KEY SEL discrete is ON 1 this parameter takes the place of the On Line Tune Loop menu s Toggle Setpoint Source prompt SETPOINT SELECT ON 1 Setpoint2 SETPOINT SELECT OFF 0 Setpoint1 When DISCR VS KEY SEL is OFF 0 SETPOINT SELECT has no effect SETPOINT 1 amp SETPOINT 2 Setpoint 1 can be a number only Setpoint 2 can be a number an analog parameter or OFF Setpoint 1 and 2 are independent setpoints Either may be the active setpoint for the loop When viewing a live ON LINE mode control loop display a loop may be switched between SETPOINT 1 and SETPOINT 2 by accessing the Tune Loop menu and selecting TOGGLE SETPOINT S
261. ired For CAT calibration a precision milliammeter or a precision resistor and voltmeter is required N WARNING Disconnect power to all terminals before connecting or disconnecting calibration leads Hazardous voltage is present on the mains terminals and may be present on other terminals More than one switch may be required to de energize the unit before servicing ATTENTION Time stamp and description of successful calibrations are stored to disk in the Event File ATTENTION If you are calibrating an analog output that was changed from a CAT to a VAT or vice versa make sure you put the instrument online for several seconds before calibrating 258 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Maintenance Table 8 4 Calibrate Analog Output Procedure 1 Connect the meter to the output 1 terminals 2 Select CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS Select OUTPUT 1 LOW The menu will disappear and the meter will read approximately 4 mA CAT or 1 volt VAT Use the Increment and Decrement buttons to adjust the meter reading to the exact low value of 1 volt or 4 mA Press Enter when done Select OUTPUT 1 HIGH The menu will disappear and the meter will read approximately 20 mA CAT or 5 Volts VAT Use the Increment or Decrement buttons to adjust the meter reading to the exact high value Press Enter when done Repeat steps 1 6 to calibrate other CAT or VAT outputs 8 Press Menu to restore the main Maintenance menu 8 6 O
262. iscrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Hold on page 196 ADVANCE Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Advance on page 196 HOT START Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Hot Start on page 196 FAST FORWARD Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Fast Forward on page 197 SHUTDOWN Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Shutdown on page 198 RAMP INCREMENT Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See External Ramp Type on page 190 GUARANTEED SOAK Discrete parameter 1 0 or OFF See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 HOLD LEVEL EDGE LEVEL or EDGE Select LEVEL to Hold the profiler while the Hold discrete is Level ON and resume Run when the Hold discrete is Level OFF Select EDGE to Hold the profiler after the Hold discrete changes from OFF to ON and resume Run after the Start discrete changes from OFF to ON 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 201 Setpoint Profiler Setpoint Profiles Menu in Online mode This menu lets you define profile ramp and soak segments and associated parameters and store and load programs to and from floppy disk or memory See Figure 5 14 for allowable and non allowable storage To access the Setpoint Profiles menu Press the Menu button until a main menu is displayed 2 Select Set Mode and change the mode to Online 3 Select Setpoint Profiles 4 Select a profile 1 through 4 to program Table 5 4 Table 5 5 and Table 5 6
263. isk dedicated to that category and not stored on disk with the other categories of storage Files of the other three categories configuration set point program and calibration may occupy the same disk 120MB disks can have multiple types of data stored on them Performing Data Storage 74 Configuring the instrument to store the first category Data Storage process and diagnostic data is done through an Online menu entitled DATA STORAGE aspects of preparing a DOS formatted disk to accept process and diagnostic data information are managed through this menu s selections Process and diagnostic data may be stored on the same disk but not along with other storage types 1 configuration setpoint programs or calibration The four types of process data are 1 Trends Data comprising the classic horizontal or vertically oriented time varying traces that represent process parameters 2 Unit Data Process parameter information collected and displayed in tabular or datalog format 3 Alarms A record of any alarms that activated while the instrument was monitoring and or controlling your process 4 Events record of any discrete events that might have occurred while the instrument was monitoring and or controlling your process Discrete events may occur for example in the instrument s execution of a set point profile When the instrument is On line and performing Data Storage a separate and distinct disk file will
264. ites all function blocks Executes Clear All Memory after this service INCREMENTAL UPGRADE extension Does not affect existing function blocks or configuration SOFTWARE UPGRADE Upgrades product software from disk Upgrades the instrument with the desired options from a disk file with LNI 8 8 Reset Unit Select this item to reboot the unit after making changes to Mains Frequency This function does not clear memory 8 9 Product Information Select this item to display the product identification software version number PROM part number and serial number 8 10 Mains Frequency Select either 50 Hz or 60 Hz Afterward you must select RESET UNIT to activate this change 260 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Maintenance 8 11 Warm Start Time The instrument will start up in one of three modes based on the length of time power is off First Time Start First time start occurs when the unit is being powered up for the first time or when the memory clear services maintenance routing is executed All configuration and calibration is cleared and all parameters are set to factory defaults See DATABASE SERVICES Section 8 7 Cold Start Cold start occurs when the unit is without power for a period longer than 90 minutes or if the reset unit maintenance routine is executed See Section 8 8 Reset Unit In cold start operation all RAM buffers storage and display are cleared and accumulated values of some functio
265. itter Note A third output CVnA3 is displayed Online and should be ignored 100 CV A2 Figure 4 16 100 Deadband CV A1 0 100 PID Output Standard Split Output Function Table 4 42 describes the Standard Splitter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 42 Standard Splitter Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input source Typically this is the output value OV of a number Split Output type of loop FEEDBACK 1 Aon BC LPn BC CVn BC Enter an AO LP or CV for the back calculation value BC of the analog output assigned to the A1 output FEEDBACK 2 Aon BC LPn BC CVn BC Enter an AO LP or CV for the back calculation value BC of the analog output assigned to the A2 output OUTPUT OFF or number Deadband up to 10 of the input span In this range both DEADBAND split outputs will remain at zero 136 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Scaling The output CVn OV is a linear scaling of the input using the specified limits Table 4 43 describes the Scaling prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 43 Scaling Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition IN LOW LIMIT OFF or number Enter limits of input to be
266. l Outputs can be triggered by Alarms Program Status Diagnostics Math Result Logic Result or DAT Control Outputs Performance Capacities Math Calculations Standard Math includes 8 Calculated Values along with the following Math functions Free Form Math Math Operators x Absolute Value Square Root Std Deviation Free Form Logic Logic Operators AND OR XOR Inverter Flip Flop One Shot Periodic Timer Logic gates can accept up to 8 inputs VPR100 only Math Level 1 includes 16 Calculated Values with the functions from Standard Math along with the following types of pre packaged algorithms Signal Select Compare Signal Clamp Interval Timer Counter Relative Humidity Standard Splitter Scaling Math Level 2 includes 32 Calculated Values with the functions and algorithms from Standard Math and Math Level 1 along with the following types of pre packaged algorithms Peak Picking Function Generator Rolling Average Carbon Potential Mass Flow FO Calculation Multiple Input Average Single Point Average Advanced Splitter Continuous Emissions Block Average and Rolling Average Constants Up to 16 Alarms Up to 16 Totalizers Up to 3 optional VPR100 up to 12 optional VRX100 amp VRX150 Control Loops 12 00 Number Up to 4 Type PID On Off Cascade Split Output Ratio DIAT VPR amp VRX User Manual 9 Introduction Communications optional
267. lace profiler in Hold by performing Profiler See Profiler Hold procedure in Table 5 14 holding procedure Table 5 14 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Profiler advances to the shutdown phase Shutdown Press Enter To resume running the profiler select Start Profile resumes running from the beginning of the shutdown phase 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 215 Setpoint Profiler How to view event status Table 5 18 Event Viewing Procedure Action Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Table 5 13 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Events Press Enter How to view profiler details Result Notes Profile menu is displayed Live On off status of all 16 events are displayed If Events change status they do so at the beginning of the segment and Hold the status during the entire segment EVENTS Table 5 19 Details Viewing Procedure Action Perform steps 1 and 2 from Start procedure Table 5 13 Press Down Arrow button to move cursor to Detail Press Enter Result Notes Profiler menu is displayed Shows e Elapsed time since profile was started including time spent in Hold e Segment time remaining e Profile length in seconds e PV4Z2value PV 2 538 67 ELAPSED TIME 1 10 56 STIME REMAIN 0 09 10 LENGTH SECS 3900 216 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler How to view profiler summary display Table 5 20
268. larm processing is 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 145 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 14 Program Totalizers The optional totalizer integrates an analog value over time With the input being viewed as a flow rate the function outputs a running total TLn OV over time ATTENTION Totalizers which exceed the value 999 999 may only be displayed on the dedicated Totalizer Display If the value is programmed on other displays or stored to disk when it exceeds the programmed limits the value may be truncated and the value will flash Select a Totalizer to program Table 4 51 describes the Totalizer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts 146 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Prompt INPUT SOURCE OUTPUT LOW LIMIT OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Table 4 51 Totalizer Prompts Range Selections OFF analog parameter number OFF or number Definition Input source to be totalized The range outside which the displayed output will flash unclamped Useful for warning operator of unusual condition ACTION TIME UNITS UP DOWN At each machine scan cycle an integration of the input is added to the running total When this total reaches or exceeds the preset value assumed to be in eng Units the discrete output of the totalizer goes high and remains high for 1 scan cycle The totalizer then resets and starts again The value res
269. lays tabs cursor to next s 40 loop data field for adjustment VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 1 Button functions continued Symbol Name Function Operating mode in which function applies Program Online Maint Display For instruments with the control option Y Y From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 2 Repeated presses accesses displays 3 through 10 then wraps around to display 2 again For instruments without the control option From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 3 Repeated presses accesses displays 4 through 10 then wraps around to display 3 again See Table 4 63 on page 161 for more information on the Displays Display 1 From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 1 See Table 4 63 on page 161 for more information on Displays Display 2 This button is only available on non control instruments From any display or menu pressing this button changes the instrument to online mode and accesses the display programmed as Display 2 See Table 4 63 on page 161 for more information on Displays Note Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing
270. lector Outputs 16 015 16 DOs Open Collector Outputs 8 015 24 DOs Open Collector Outputs Type Dry contact actuation Input Level 24 Vdc 15 mA internally supplied Isolation 30 volts point to ground Type Form C Max Switch Current 14 5 NO NC Amps 120 Vac resistive Max Switch Voltage 265 Vac Max Switch Power 200W dc 2000 VA ac Max Carrying Current 2 Amps 250 Vac 5 Amps 120 Vac 2 Amps 24 Vdc VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction Solid State AC Outputs Solid State DC Outputs Open Collector Table 1 1 Specifications continued Discrete Inputs Outputs continued Type Form A contacts Max Output Current 2 Amps Voltage Range 12 280 Vac Minimum Current 20 mA Switchbase Zero crossing Type Form A contacts Max Output Current 2 Amps Voltage Range 5 60 Vdc Minimum Current 20 mA Open transistor collector output rated at 30 Vdc max 100 mA max User must provide a Outputs relay for each output along with external 24 Vdc power supply for the relays Digital Input 3 8 or 16 Digital Inputs Capability Digital Inputs capable of Run Hold Reset Jump Segment Advance Guaranteed Soak Switch to Second input PV Channel Select Auto Manual Select Batch Start Stop Event mark of data Fast Forward PV Hot Start Remote Program Selection Can be used in logic operators Digital Output Capability 4 or6 Relay Outputs 8 16 or 24 Open Collector Outputs Digita
271. lem During calibration if the input reference voltages supplied by the technician are outside acceptable limits a CALIB FAIL message will be generated VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments Internal error messages In addition to diagnostic messages error messages are presented to indicate an internal fault To correct the problem Table 9 9 lists suggested actions you should take in the order you should take them To acknowledge or clear the error message see Section 7 4 Access Summaries Error message NONV RAM ERROR PROCESSOR EXCEPTION Table 9 9 Internal Error Messages Suggested Action Reduce the configuration by eliminating function Call service provider Reset unit Clear configuration and reload If message recurs replace CPU PROCESSOR RESET TASK INIT FAILURE C N N Reset unit Clear configuration and reload If message recurs replace CPU Reset unit Clear configuration and reload If message recurs replace CPU QUEUE READ FAILURE RESPONSE FAILURE C N O N Reset unit Clear configuration and reload If message recurs replace CPU Reset unit Clear configuration and reload If message recurs replace CPU REQUEST FAILURE A O N Reset unit Increase scan rate to higher time for example from 500 msec to 1 second Clear configuration and reload it If message recurs replace
272. lock Parameter Designators continued Function Function Block Output Parameter Name Parameter Block Name code Type Type SP Setpoint Profiler OV Output Value Analog Al Auxiliary Output Value Analog PV Process Variable Guaranteed Soak PV 1 Analog SN Segment Number Analog SH Hold Status Discrete SE End Status Discrete SA Active Status Discrete Sl Active or Hold Status Discrete SR Ready Status Discrete F1 Event 1 Output Discrete thru thru E9 Event 9 Output EA Event 10 Output v EB Event 11 Output thru thru EG Event 16 Output Discrete AL Alarm PV Process Variable alarm s input Analog S2 Compare Point of Deviation alarm Analog OS Output Status Discrete CN Constant OV Output Value Analog PV Process Variable Constant s input Analog CV Calculated Value OV Output Value Analog Process Variable Analog A n Analog Output n Analog BC Back Calculation Analog S2 Auxiliary input link to totalizer preset Analog D n Discrete Output Discrete OS Output Status Discrete CV output codes are available for programming only if the CV has been programmed For example you cannot program an input parameter with CV1 OV unless CV1 has been programmed Input to the following CV types Peak Pick 1 Point Block Avg 1 Point Rolling Avg Scaling Signal Select TL Totalizer OV Output Value Analog PV Process Variable Totalizer s input Analog OS Output Status Discrete S2 Preset Value Analog
273. lock parameter A function block parameter s data is contained within a function block and cannot be connected to another function block When you are programming a function block and are not given a choice of PARM you are programming a function block parameter Typical choices when programming a function block parameter are NONE OFF any numerical value or a list of options but not PARM Programming procedure Here is the procedure for programming a function block parameter It is an example using a specific function block parameter but the keystrokes used will apply when you are programming any function block parameter Continuing with the example from Figure 3 12 assume we want Analog Output 1 to default to its lowest value if the input source LP2 OV fails Therefore we must program Analog Output 1 s failsafe parameter with the appropriate selection The following procedure shows how Table 3 9 Example Function Block Parameter Selection Procedure Step Action 1 In the Program Analog Output menu select ANALOG OUTPUT 1 2 Consult the Program Analog Output section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely FAILSAFE Press the Down Arrow button to move the cursor down to FAILSAFE Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for FAILSAFE are Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until DOWN is displayed 6 Press Enter to select DO
274. low the profiler output See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 for details The profiler will Hold if PV 1 or PV 2 deviates more than this much above the profiler output See Guaranteed Soak on page 191 for details HYSTERESIS OFF or number See Hysteresis on page 191 for details BATCH FIRST 0 63 Specify the first segment of the batch phase SEGMENT Prior segments are the start up phase A value of 0 indicates a single phase profile See Two types of profiles on page 185 for details BATCH LAST 0 63 Specify the last segment of the batch phase SEGMENT Segments after this segment are the shutdown phase A value of 0 indicates a single phase profile See Two types of profiles on page 185 for details 204 VPR amp VRX User Manual continued 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 5 Edit Profile Prompts continued Prompt AUTO CYCLE AUTO CYCLE COUNT 0 254 Range Selections OFF ON Definition Select ON to have the profile or batch phase if defined repeat AUTO CYCLE COUNT times Automatically re runs the profile when ON The parameter AUTO CYCLE COUNT controls the number of additional cycles through the profile When AUTO CYCLE is ON and AUTO CYCLE COUNT is zero 0 the profile will cycle forever For a single phase profile the profiler must progress to the END state before cycling back to segment 1 Once the profiler is ENDed the automatic cycling function will change the profiler
275. low with square root 129 CARBON 2 Generates value 130 POTENTIAL RELATIVE 1 Calculates relative humidity 131 HUMIDITY STERILIZATION 2 Calculates F Sterilzation 133 ADV SPLITTER 2 Splits input into 3 outputs 134 STD SPLITTER 1 Splits input into 2 outputs 136 SCALING 1 Scales input to output 137 SIGNAL CLAMP 1 Clamps input to specified values 138 1PTBLOCKAVG 2 Averages one input 139 ROLLING AVG 2 Computes rolling average of one input 140 MULTIPLE AVG 2 Averages multiple inputs 141 CEM BLOCK AVG 2 Averages one input over specified intervals 142 CEM ROLLING AVG 2 Computes rolling average of one input over specified intervals 143 S Standard Math package 1 VPR Math Level 1 package includes Standard Math package 2 VPR Math Level 2 package includes Standard Math and Math Level 1 packages VRX100 150 Advanced Math package Refer to the page shown for the desired CV programming procedures Press Enter when the PRESS ENTER TO SAVE prompt appears to save your entries made during the session 106 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Peak Picking This type monitors the input and determines a peak value reached during the specified time interval in minutes The peak can be chosen to be a maximum minimum average or standard deviation At the end of the time interval the output CVn OV steps to the value of the peak and h
276. m defined 183 Program Analog Inputs 85 Program Analog Outputs 100 Program Calculated Values 106 Program Control Loops 89 Program Discrete Inputs 104 Program Discrete Outputs 105 Program mode defined 31 Program mode menu 79 Program Security 164 Programming and Operating Concepts and Procedures 31 Programming Procedure 90 Programming tips 78 Proportional Band 95 R Removing the Circuit Card Assembly 263 Replaying stored data 239 RESET 126 Reset Input 107 Reset Unit 260 resetting profile 214 review programming 254 Routine Maintenance 257 Safety Grounding 24 Scan Rate 168 security program 164 Select Language 169 Serial Communications 165 Set Clock 166 Set Mode 81 Set Up Bar Graph 1 159 Set Up Bar Graph 2 159 Set Up Panel Display 159 Set Up Unit Data Display 159 setpoint adjust 247 toggle 247 Setpoint Trend Display interacting with 221 shutting down profile 215 Site Preparation 15 Software Version Number 260 Split Output Loop 89 90 Standard algorithm prompts 85 starting profile 213 T totalizer reset by pressing a key 51 Totalizer program 146 Totalizer Reset 245 trend display logarithmically 156 Trend changing timebase 224 detail 223 find 223 hold 223 new file 224 scroll 223 Selecting Profiles to be displayed 160 Set Up Trend 1 155 Set Up Trend 2 159 zoom 223 Trend interacting with 222 U unpacking DSU 4 Unpacking 4 Update value
277. matic of the Setpoint Profiler function block Inputs Outputs PV Event 1 START HOLD Event 16 RESET RUN ADVANCE Setpoint output value SPn OV SHUTDOWN Ready Run Hold At End Figure 5 1 Setpoint Profiler Schematic 184 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Two types of profiles 12 00 A single phase profile is the simpler of the two profile types It does not contain startup and shutdown segments It runs from Segment to the last segment A multi phase profile divides the profile into three phases the startup phase the batch phase and the shutdown phase With a multi phase profile you can rerun the batch phase multiple times known as AUTO CYCLING or skip to the shutdown phase The batch phase of a multi phase profile is specified by the BATCH FIRST SEGMENT and BATCH LAST SEGMENT prompts See Figure 5 2 Single Phase Profile END Multi Phase Profile la Suns L4 3 Batch Segments Sg ohutdown Segments Segments END batch END shutdown A A BATCH FIRST SEGMENT 3 BATCH LAST SEGMENT 6 Figure 5 2 Single and Multi Phase Profiles VPR amp VRX User Manual 185 Setpoint Profiler 5 2 Components of a profile Two PVs available Each profile can monitor up to 2 process variables The second PV is for monitoring a second variable related to your process The value of each PV is compared with
278. may be added for extra protection Figure Appendix B 3 is an illustration of a resistor and capacitor connected across a contact to eliminate electrical noise Inductive load A C supply 20781 Figure Appendix B 3 Contact Noise Suppression For large load currents a rule of thumb is to size the capacitor so that the number of microfarads equals the number of amperes in the load current and the resistor has the same resistance value as the load The objective is to eliminate the visible arc Either discrete resistors and capacitors or packaged RC networks may be used An RC network 47 ohms and 0 1 microfarad is available from Honeywell as part number 30371852 001 Similar RC networks are available from Electrocube Inc part number RG1782 3 and from Industrial Condensor Corporation Continued on next page 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 301 In DC circuits the power dissipation under steady state condition can be eliminated by placing a diode in series with a resistor in parallel with the load see Figure Appendix B 4 The value of R should be less than or equal to the DC resistance of the inductive load Figure Appendix B 4 is an illustration of DC load noise suppression hes D C coy MM i gt H supply Inductive i load 20782 Figure Appendix B 4 DC Load Noise Suppression 302 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00
279. me function blocks namely Analog Input Analog Output Discrete Input and Discrete Output interface with the hardware that is they are the link between the instrument and the input or output hardware The Analog Input and Discrete Input function blocks convert the incoming process data like the process variable or any discrete on off signals from a switch into information usable by the instrument This incoming information is processed according to the entire function block configuration in the instrument and it is ultimately passed on to the output function blocks The Analog Output and Discrete Output function blocks convert this output information into a voltage or current which is fed to the corresponding output hardware like a current output or relay Other function blocks are not directly seen by the hardware they are purely software They can be thought of as the middle of the process described in the previous paragraph For example a Standard Splitter Calculated Value can split a control loop s output into 2 values one for heating and one for cooling These 2 values can be passed on to the Analog Output function block which ultimately controls the amount of output current or voltage Flow of information 48 The flow of information from the input hardware to the input function blocks to the function block configuration to the output function blocks to the output hardware can be likened to a river flowing from
280. meter s e Output Figure 3 11 shows the function block Alarm 1 s components Alarm 1 Function Block Function block parameter WBe ALARM ACTION Select High Low Dev LRate HRate ram Function block parameter IN DECIMAL POS Select input decimal position Input parameter J INPUT Select OFF Number or PARM AL 1 OS Alarm state Input parameter SETPOINT Select OFF Number PARM AL 1 52 Compare point of Input parameter COMPARE POINT Select OFF Number or PARM Deviation alarm only Function block parameter STERESIS Select OFF or Number AL 1 PV Value of alarm s INPUT Function block parameter DELAY TIME Select OFF or Number Figure 3 11 Alarm 1 Function Block Components Input parameter 50 A function block s input parameter can be configured to be OFF a number or it can receive its data from outside the block from another block s output codes These output codes are shown in Table 3 5 That is an input parameter is any menu item that can be programmed as connected to one of these output codes These output codes are grouped under the menu choice PARM When you are programming a function block and one of your choices is PARM you know you are programming an input parameter See Figure 3 11 For example suppose you are programming an alarm function block One of the alarm s menu items is INPUT whic
281. mmable discrete event outputs whose ON OFF states specified by you can be used to trigger other discrete functions The segment s event states are activated at the beginning of the segment and are maintained unless changed by the next segment in the profile See Table 5 1 The last segment s event states are maintained after the profiler is ended Table 5 1 Example of Segment Events Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Event 1 State 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF Event 2 State 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF Event 3 State 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON To activate events in the middle of a ramp segment replace the desired segment with 3 segments a ramp a very short soak and another ramp Program the second and third segment events as if they were the middle of the segment Ramp segment Same events as short soak 4 To activate events here Program this Short soak segment with desired events Program both ramps with same slope Figure 5 8 Activating Events In Mid Segment 192 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Segment Loops You can program up to four segment loops within a profile A segment loop is one or more consecutive segments which must repeat a selected number of times before proceeding to the next segment outside of the loop Segment loops are specified by the parameters REPEAT COUNT FROM SEGMENT and TO SEGMENT
282. monstrations It causes the instrument to display a series of simulated values ATTENTION Never turn the demo on in an instrument that has already been configured to support its true application without first saving the instrument s configuration to floppy disk Selecting DEMO will reconfigure Analog Inputs 1 through 4 and Discrete Input 1 When DEMO is turned off the demo s function block configurations are still used but their inputs are tied to the hardware and are no longer simulated 262 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments 9 On Site Adjustments 9 1 Removing the Circuit Card Assembly Remove the circuit card assembly only when doing the following procedures 1 Changing an analog output from CAT to VAT type or from VAT to CAT 2 Terminating or unterminating an instrument in a serial communications link 3 Changing numbers of Discrete Inputs Discrete Output combinations on the open collector output cards Avoid opening the instrument unless absolutely necessary Damage to the instrument can result unless proper procedures are followed ATTENTION e Contact your service representative before attempting service Unauthorized repairs of an instrument may void the warranty e Before removing the chassis assembly be sure to take proper safeguards against electrostatic discharge such as wearing an approved grounding strap ATTENTION Time stamp and description of successful calibrations are
283. mp OFF or number Limits will be imposed on the working setpoint value SP HIGH LIMIT regardless of source A setpoint value above or below the limits will be entered into the loop at the limit value OFF entry will assume process variable limits Variable limits are available by programming a constant s Destination with HS or LS See Program Constants Section 4 16 SP1 TRACKING SP2 NONE A selection of Setpoint 2 will cause the Setpoint 1 value to be set to the Setpoint 2 value on a transfer from Setpoint 2 to Setpoint 1 Setpoint 1 adjustment may be made after the transfer SUPPRESS YES NO This parameter set to YES limits overshoot of the Setpoint OVERSHOOT SP by the Process Variable PV after a disturbance in the process such as a load or SP change Through fuzzy logic the working SP of the control loop is dynamically modified by the control algorithm to reduce or eliminate overshoot ATTENTION Regardless of the setting of this SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT selection overshoot is not suppressed when the process disturbance causes an initial deviation PV SP value between 0 7 and 0 7 engineering units Consequently overshoot may not be suppressed in applications which require numerically small control loop PV ranges such as carbon potential where this range is typically 0 0 to 2 0 engineering units WILD VARIABLE Enter an analog input Aln OV or calculated value CVn OV parameter that represents a second input signal
284. mp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Loop Menu Items Table 4 10 alphabetically describes every loop menu item See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 10 Loop Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition APPROACH HIGH Enter a value 0 1 to 100 or OFF This function affects the process variable approach to setpoint when the process variable value is less than the setpoint value The value entered is the percent of span deviation from setpoint at which a recalculation of the loop integral value will occur Enter a starting value equal to the proportional band value 1 gain value x 100 if Gain is used or OFF at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning This function is useful for batch startup from a cold condition to control excessive overshoot when setpoint is reached APPROACH LOW AUTO MAN SELECT CHG ACTION INPUT CONTROL ACTION Enter a value 0 1 to 100 or OFF OFF discrete parameter 0 1 OFF discrete parameter O 1 Reverse REV or Direct DIR Acting Control Affects the process variable approach to setpoint when the process variable value is greater than the setpoint value This parameter takes the place of the
285. n Time 3 seconds Condition Type Re triggerable Pulse If Result is 4 sec ON 1 for CONDITION TIME then OFF 0 Then CVn OS is 112 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Counter Counts the number of OFF 0 to ON 1 transitions of the input This number is output as CVn OV When this number reaches the Preset value a discrete output parameter CVn OS goes ON 1 until Reset occurs Table 4 21 describes the Counter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 21 Counter Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s trend display limits Output is not clamped RANGE HIGH or flashed when it exceeds these limits INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Input source 1 RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 When Reset is level high output state OS is ON and the 1 counter resets to zero if counting up or to the Preset value if counting down from it When Reset is level low counter resumes counting PRESET OFF analog parameter The number of input transitions after which the CVn OS number output will go ON 1 To count forever set to OFF If OFF CVn OS will not be triggered COUNT DOWN YES or NO Select NO to count up from zero to the Preset value YES to count down from the Preset value to zero If Preset is OFF Count Down must be NO 12 00 VPR
286. n blocks Calculated Value timers totalizers and control loop integral are reset to initial values The cold start operation retains the loop operating status of auto or manual and setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 The loop output will be set to zero 0 unless configured to use a Failsafe value for the analog output No Data collected and stored to floppy disk before the onset of cold Start is lost Data storage is automatically resumed after a Cold Start a maximum of minute of buffered data will be lost due to a Cold Start If a new disk was inserted into the floppy drive while power was off you must initialize the new disk to resume data storage Warm Start 12 00 If power is off for less than 90 minutes a warm start will be used during power up All buffered data prior to power loss is retained and accumulated values in Calculated Value timers and totalizers are retained Control loop output values are also retained Setpoint Profilers resume where they left off If power is off for more than the warm up start time a cold start operation will occur Warm start times available in minutes 1 2 3 4 5 10 15 20 30 60 90 None Note that all data storage schedules that have been initialized or started via the ON LINE mode DATA STORAGE SETUP menu will automatically resume their execution upon the occurrence of a Warm Start VPR amp VRX User Manual 261 Maintenance 8 12 Demo This item is intended primarily for sales de
287. n from OFF to ON rising edge or from ON to OFF falling edge The changing status is what triggers the action not the status itself Some discretes such as START are rising edge sensitive only and are not affected by a falling edge When START s discrete goes ON the profiler starts to run when the discrete goes OFF the profiler continues running Level sensitive means that one action occurs while the discrete is ON and another action occurs while the discrete is OFF The status is what causes the action not the changing status Fast forward s discrete is level sensitive that is the profiler will run in fast forward while the discrete is ON but not while it is OFF Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution Parameter name Definition Triggered Conditions by present START Starts Profiler from Ready Hold or End state Rising Profiler in Profiler Activated by operator menu or by discrete edge Ready or End starts to input May be connected to the START F1 key state Run SY1F1 RESET RUN The behavior of this parameter depends on Rising Start is Profiler START If the START discrete input is edge programmed changes programmed with a discrete then switching with a discrete to Ready RESET RUN from OFF to ON resets an parameter amp and goes Ended Hold or Ready profiler to the starting profiler is in to value of segment 1 Ready or Hold Segment or End 1 START is not programmed
288. n the logic is not true Result is then processed according to the specified condition type and condition time The final output is a discrete pulse CVn OS See Figure 4 6 Inputs CONDITION TYPE LOGIC Result amp CONDITION TIME ToOmTmmoou2z Figure 4 6 Logic Signal Flow Table 4 25 describes the Logic prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 25 Logic Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OPERATOR AND OR XOR RESET SET FF See Table 4 26 TOGGLE FF ONE SHOT PASS INPUT A OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Program at least 2 inputs Only inputs programmed with parameter 1 or 0 are processed with the operator INPUT B INPUT C INPUT D INPUT E INPUT F INPUT G INPUT CONDITION NONE DELAY EXTEND PULSE See Table 4 20 on page 111 RT PULSE CONDITION TIME OFF or number Enter number of seconds of condition time See Table 4 20 on page 111 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 117 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 26 Logic Operators Definition if this is true then Result is For this operator If all programmed inputs are ON All programmed inputs ON 1 Result is ON ON 1 If at least 1 programmed input is ON At least 1 programmed ON 1 Result is ON input is ON 1 Uses Inputs A and B only Input A is ON 1 and Input ON 1 B is OFF 0
289. nction Generator Curve essessssssseeeseseeee eene eene en een ne tenete enne ene 124 Figure 4 9 Function Generator Configuration For Valve Characterization 125 Figure 4 10 Function Generator Configuration For Input Signal Characterization eee 125 Figure 4 11 Interval Tuer sue eno ht tt re sige sch oi e pra ed to ert 126 Figure 4 12 Periods s uiii am E ene e E MERE EU IEEE 127 Figure 4 13 Typical Carbon Potential Control Configuration eren 131 Figure 4 14 Advanced Splitter Default Outputs essent enne tenete nein innen 134 Figure 4 15 Heat Cool Configuration eee ert utt e RU oto pod niet rl aie 134 Figure 4 16 Standard Split Output Function nenne neret enne 136 Figure 4 17 CEMS Rolling Average nennen nennen eene enne tete tenete entente entree 143 Figure 4 18 Example of Constant Destination sss enne nennen trennt tent teen teen trenes enne 150 Figure 4 19 Displays Accessible by the Display Buttons eese nee enne nennen 152 Figure 4 20 VRX150 Displays Accessible By The Display Button esee enne 154 Figure 5 1 Setpoint Profiler 5 treten trennen rennen ens 184 Figure 5 2 Single and Multi Phase Profiles 185 Fig
290. nity protection Communications Wiring and Grounding All communication wires must have a triple shield a shield around each pair for TX and RX and an isolated overall shield The shields for each twisted pair are to be tied together and connected to COM on the communication terminal block The outer shield must be connected to Earth Ground DO NOT connect shield to any other unit ground this will not provide adequate immunity protection Wire bundling 296 Table Appendix B 1 shows what wiring should be bundled together to prevent inductive or capacitive coupling VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Table Appendix B 1 External Wiring Wire Function Bundle No Are Shielded Twisted Wires Recommended No Type HIGH VOLTAGE 1 NO 1 Line Power 2 Earth Ground 3 Line Voltage Digital I O ANALOG I O 2 YES 4 Process Variable RTD Thermocouple dc Millivolts 5 Low Level lt 100V 4 20 mA dc 1 5 Vdc DIGITAL I O 3 YES 6 Low Voltage lt 100V 7 Computer Interface Additional rules 12 00 Please observe these additional rules for wire bundling For distances over five 5 feet and when shielding is recommended use a separate metal tray or conduit for each bundle Where conduits or trays are not practical use twisted wires with a metal overbraid and provide physical separation of at least one foot Tray covers must be in continuous contact with the side rails of the trays
291. ns llap xera yia o v son pe TIPOOTATEUTIKNS YEIWONS TOU Of gt Edv o amp orAicu gc xpnoiporroine rp rro Trou Sev TIPOBAETTETAI AT TOV KATACKEUAOTH IAKIV UVE ETAI TAPEXOMEVN rov EFOTTAIOUO Mny avriKkaraoT oeTE Kav va amp rou oro ou avTiKaTdoTaon Sev TTPOBAETTETAI TOV KATACKEUCOTH OG oi NAEKTPIKES EYKATAOTAOEIS TIPETTE e var CUU WVES HE EUTTEIDOUS TEXVIKOUG e To ESAPOUS va OUVOEETAI am amp GAAN oUVoeon Kal va OITOGUVOEETAOI TEAEUTAIO e ATAITE TAI vag SIAKOTITNS NAEKTPIKH EYKATAOTAON NAEKTPIKOU Kovr OTN OUOCKEUN XAPAKTHPIZTIKA EZOIIAIZMOY ioxtog 85 w 265 V ac dc uxv rnra 50 60 Hz lox g pe parog 45 VA 2 0 A 250 V ac dc 2YNOHKE NEPIBAAAONTOX AiroQgUyere Tr Aerroupy a TOU Kovr og EUMAEKTA uyp a pia orroiac r jmrore OUOKEUNS oe TETOIO TIEDIBGAAOV eKO TEI CE K vOuvo TNV OepyoKkpacia NMepiBaddovtos 0 w 50 C Atro rkeuonsg 20 wo 70 C Yypao a 10 w 90 RH un ouutruKvwoiyn 40 5 15 Hz METEOO 1 DD
292. ns Frequency 260 Warm Start Time 261 Demo 262 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Maintenance 8 2 Routine Maintenance Calibrate the instrument routinely to ensure conformity to specifications Calibration is to be performed by qualified service personnel only Clean the front panel with a damp cloth If needed use a detergent containing no abrasives Always clean the front panel with the bezel closed Do not use solvent cleaners 8 3 Set Mode Select this to change the operating mode to Online or Program ATTENTION Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance change to online mode through SET MODE instead of through the Display buttons 8 4 Calibrate Analog Inputs Select an AI for calibration Only one Analog Input is needed for calibration regardless of the number of inputs present A Disconnect power to all terminals before connecting or disconnecting calibration leads Hazardous voltage is present on the mains terminals and may be present on other terminals More than one switch may be required to de energize the unit before servicing ATTENTION Time stamp and description of successful calibrations are stored to disk in the Event File Calibrating EMF Inputs Table 8 2 Calibrate EMF Input Procedure Connect an adjustable precision 25 mV 5 V voltage s
293. ns Using Primary Displays Interacting with 4 Panel Display VRX150 To stop the rotation of the 4 panel display on any 4 consecutive points follow the procedure in Table 6 5 PRESS 3 ZONE1 TEMP2 ZONE2 Figure 6 6 Four Panel Display Table 6 5 Stop 4 Panel Display Rotation Procedure Press Tab key Displays menu item SET HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display 2 Press Tab key Each press advances through the points one at a time After one press Displays points 2 5 After two presses Displays points 3 6 Etc Holds display on desired points An H appears in the lower right of the display To resumes rotation through all points follow the procedure in Table 6 6 Resume 4 Panel Display Rotation Procedure EN Press Tab key Displays menu item REL HOLD at the lower right hand corner of the display Press Enter The disappears and rotation resumes 226 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Interacting with Loop Displays LP1 LP2 LP1 LP2 LP3 000 00 1500 00 1000 00 1500 00 1200 00 0 00 d 0 00 i 0 00 0 00 PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 PV 623 00 SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 405 00 SP 1040 00 SP 622 0 OUT 15 0 OUT 10 0 OUT 15 0 OUT 10 0 OUT 90 A SP1 A SP2 A SP1
294. nstructions on this menu see Section 5 4 How to set up a profiler Tables 5 4 and 5 5 For instructions on common operator tasks with the Setpoint Profiler see Section 5 5 246 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus 7 7 Tune Loop This option lets you tune change various loop parameters online These tunable parameters depend on the loop type in use and are described in Section 4 8 Program Control Loops Also the following menu choices are available Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition LOOP TYPE STD ADV SPLIT ON OFF STD Standard CAS P CAS S RATIO ADV Advanced DIAT SPLIT Split Output ON OFF On Off CAS P Cascade Primary CAS S Cascade Secondary RATIO Ratio DIAT DIAT PV Number Value of PV OUTPUT 100 to 100 Loop output 96 SETPOINT SOURCE SP1 or SP2 Indicates which setpoint is being used by the loop SP1 must TOGGLE SETPOINT Bold items are read only be a number SP2 may be a number or a value from a function block remote setpoint SP1 SP2 Press Enter to change the Setpoint Source from SP1 to SP2 SOURCE or vice versa SETPOINT 1 Number Enter the new value of SP1 SETPOINT 2 Number or parameter Enter the new value of SP2 If SP2 is a remote setpoint you cannot change the value here PROP BAND 1 GAIN 1 12 00 See Gain 1 Enter a value of 0 1 to 200 for Gain or 0 5 to 1000 0 for Prop
295. nstrument can run 4 profiles at a time and can store in its internal memory up to 3 programs each containing 4 profiles Suppose the BCD bits are programmed as follows Bit 2 0 Bit 1 1 Bit 0 0 This sequence of bits equals the number 2 and is the value of CVn OV When the Enable discrete is triggered ON 1 the profiles in Program 2 will be loaded from internal memory into the function blocks for Profiles 1 through 4 where they can be edited or run 122 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 1 programmer instrument 1 Profile per Program Table 4 32 How Profiles Are Saved In Memory VPR only 2 programmer instrument 2 Profiles per Program instrument 3 programmer 3 Profiles per Program T T oa oa A 4 programmer instrument 4 Profiles per Program This Program contains these Profiles This contains This contains This Contains Program this Profile Program these Program these Profiles Profiles 1 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 2 1 3 4 1 2 2 1 5 1 3 1 2 5 7 1 4 1 3 1 9 1 5 1 3 10 1 2 4 1 11 1 6 1 2 12 1 2 3 e e e 93 47 94 1 2 32 1 95 48 1 2 96 1 2 3 po 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 123
296. nt 5 Any other value will cause segment 5 to be a ramp since the value will ramp up or down from segment 5 s value to segment 86 s value 2 Setthe TIME to OFF VPR amp VRX User Manual 187 Setpoint Profiler Time Ramp Type Each ramp segment s TIME is the time allotted for the profiler output to reach the next soak segment s VALUE The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used Ramp Type Tme Frstandlast segments mustbe soaks Noconsecutiveramps or soaks Time time needed to reachnext soak segmentValue Value not used ramp segments Segment 3 _ Value Time duration of soak Value value of soak Segment 1 Value Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Time Time Time Figure 5 4 Time Ramp Type 188 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler 12 00 Rate Ramp Type Each ramp segment s TIME specifies the rate at which the profiler output will reach the next soak segment where the rate is specified by the prompts TIME TIME UNITS The ramp segment s VALUE prompt is not used Ramp Type Rate First and last segments must be soaks Noconsecutive ramps orsoaks Time rate atwhich next soak Value will bereached in PV units Time Unis Example Time 3 Time Units Seconds PVunits degrees F Therefore profile will ramp to next soak Value at 3 degrees F per second Values not usedwith ramp segments
297. ntal or vertical trend See Table 4 55 for prompts Set Up Trend 3 VRX 150 only Set up a third group of up to 6 or 12 points that will be displayed as a horizontal or vertical trend See Table 4 55 for prompts Set Up Bar Graph 1 Table 4 59 describes the prompts for setting up Bar Graph 1 Table 4 59 Set Up Bar Graph 1 Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition POINT 1 POINT 6 OFF analog parameter Select up to 6 analog points each to be displayed as a numbers vertical or horizontal bar graph Point 1 Point 3 are used for 3 point bar graphs Set Up Bar Graph 2 See Table 4 59 for prompts For Point 1 Point 6 enter a second group of up to 6 points that will be displayed as horizontal or vertical bar graphs Set Up Panels Table 4 60 describes the prompts for setting up a Panel Display and Panel Meter Display Table 4 60 Set Up Panel Display Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition POINT 1 POINT 12 Analog or discrete Select up to 12 analog or discrete points On the Panel parameters Display these points will be displayed one at a time at a specified rotation rate and can be seen from 15 feet 4 6 meters on the VRX150 they are displayed 4 at a time and are visible from the same distance On a Panel Meter Display these points will be displayed all at once Set Up Unit Data Table 4 61 describes the prompts for setting up a Unit Data Display Table 4 61 Set Up Unit Data Display Prompts
298. nu item See Section 4 4 Frequently used programming prompts All Program mode menu items and settings can be reviewed but not changed in the Online mode by selecting REVIEW PROGRAMMING on the main Online menu See Enable Features Section 4 19 We recommend you save the instrument configuration to a disk after you have completed programming the instrument See 4 23 Load Store Config Prior to programming and configuring the instrument for its intended application it is highly recommended that a copy of the instrument s factory calibration be stored to floppy disk To do this place a formatted high density 1 44 MB 31 2 disk into the unit s disk drive and access the PROGRAM main menu Choose LOAD STORE CONFIG and then select STORE CALIB TO DISK Keep this disk in a safe place and use it to restore the instrument s calibration to factory settings if the need arises VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 3 The Program mode menu 12 00 Program mode is an off line mode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all outputs are frozen Table 4 1 shows the top level of the Program Mode menu with all available options Your instrument may have a reduced menu if options are not present or if features have been disabled Table 4 1 Program Mode Menu Promp Function SET MODE Change operating mode of programmer LABELS Enter
299. nu item FORMAT DISK 1 44MB disk only Maintaining a stock of several formatted disks is recommended to minimize maintenance time on the instrument For 120MB or Zip disks it is recommended you preinitialize them using DSU See Data Storage in section 4 26 for more information Disks are inserted and removed from the front panel as described in Table 7 2 Table 7 2 Floppy Disk Insertion Removal Procedure Press the button on the underside of the bezel to release the latch The latch will release easily if you press the bottom of the bezel back towards the panel to compress its gasket as you press the button Pull the bottom of the bezel outwards slightly away from the panel and then lift it gently up to fully open it 3 Insert the disk into the slot until it catches in place 4 To remove the disk press the rectangular button next to the slot Be sure to label the contents of each disk 5 To close the bezel lower it until it is almost closed Engage the top edge of the bezel first and then swing the bottom inward Press the bottom in firmly until the latch clicks into place Be careful to fully close the bezel or the unit will not function normally 234 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus How data is stored To provide continuity of storage when the disk is removed the data storage feature buffers data internally for a period of time based on the storage rate and amount of storage data
300. ny other disk is placed in the drive this message will appear The message will disappear when the current disk is inserted or a new disk is initialized The disk in the drive has its write protected tab set to the protect position Data storage is enabled but no disk is installed in the disk drive 230 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 8 Messages and Symbols at Bottom of Display continued Message Symbol Color Description GENERAL ERROR Yellow This message will appear if the instrument encounters any error not mentioned above Yellow Located in bottom right of display Indicates storage is active data is being collected on disk or in the instrument s internal buffer White Located in bottom right of display The display s upper and lower limits are zoomed on a smaller range Disappears when Zoom is turned off H White Located in bottom right of display Indicates the display is held ona single data point and is not rotating through all data points Disappears when Point Hold is removed Table 6 9 Messages and Symbols Elsewhere on Display REVIEW REPLAY Trend Replay Review Adjacent to detailed point information scoreboard on the screen Indicates that the trend on the display is from historical data and does not represent the current state of the process REVIEW means that the data for the trend are from c
301. nzionare l apparecchio in presenza di liquidi o gas infiammabili in quanto questo potrebbe essere estremamente pericoloso Temperatura Ambiente da 0 a 50 Stoccaggio da 20 a 70 Umidit relativa Da 10 a 90 UR non condensata a 40 Vibrazioni Da 5a 15 Hz ampiezza 1 mm Da 15 a 150 Hz accelerazione 0 5 g INSTALLAZIONE DELL APPARECCHIO Il apparecchio deve essere montato su un pannello per limitare l accesso ai terminali posteriori SIKKERHETSKRAV NO2I 6047 F lg alle retningslinjene i dette dokumentet slik at du reduserer risikoen for elektrisk stot og mulige personskader Dette symbolet advarer brukeren om tilgjengelige terminaler med farlige spenninger og en potensiell fare for elektrisk stet Jordingsterminal kabelen for jording av systemet skal tilknyttes til denne terminalen E e Dersom utstyret benyttes en mate annerledes enn spesifisert av produsent kan utstyrets beskyttelsesgrad forringes Ingen komponenter eller deler skal skiftes ut dersom de ikke er uttrykkelig spesifisert som utskiftbare av din forhandler e Det er p krevet med en hovedstremsbryter i n rheten av utstyret e All kabling ma utf res i henhold til gjeldende forskrifter og installeres av autoriser og erfaren installat r e Jord m tilknyttes f r all annen kabling og frakobles sist UTSTYRSPESIFIKASJONER Str mtilforsel 85 til 265 V AC DC Nettfrekvens 50 60 Hz Kraftforbruk 45 VA Sikringst rrelse 2 A 250
302. o continue storing the same data storage schedule on this disk select the online DATA STORAGE menu select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE CURRENT SCHEDULES The instrument will display a prompt asking for a yes or no response to initialize the disk Initializing will destroy all existing information on a 1 44MB disk With this prompt you can remove a disk inserted by mistake or deliberately re use an old disk containing useless information If you answer YES the current schedule will be established on the new disk buffered data will be stored to the disk and if any storage files are in batch mode the batch counter will be reset to zero 0 Initializing a disk using a new storage setup For 120MB or Zip disks it is recommended to preinitialize the disk using DSU See Data Storage in section 4 26 for more information If you change any part of data storage schedule as described in Section 4 26 and you want the changed new schedule s data to be stored select the online DATA STORAGE menu select INITIALIZE DISK then select USE NEW SCHEDULES All data that was buffered since the previous disk was removed is lost See Data Storage in Section 4 26 If you change the schedule but initialize using the current schedule the changed new schedule is not stored 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 235 Online Operation Using Menus Initialization errors If an initialization error occurs one of the following messages may appear Error m
303. ode for programming configuring the instrument In this mode all outputs are frozen Online mode Online Mode enables full use of the instrument with its inputs outputs and internal programming In this mode it is fully interactive with all externally connected elements Maintenance mode Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper and complete functioning of the instrument Functions include calibration off line diagnostic testing and various setups for operation In Maintenance Mode all outputs are frozen ATTENTION Note Changing to ONLINE mode by pressing any of the Display buttons can cause incorrect values to be displayed The values will correct themselves in a few seconds To avoid this potential annoyance change to online mode through SET MODE instead of through the Display buttons 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 81 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 6 Enter Labels Overview Labeling lets you use the front panel buttons a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader to assign custom text identifiers to most data and functions to make them easily recognized on displays Labeling items makes programming and operation easier but is not required You can assign all labels here or at each individual programming menu that is at Program Analog Inputs Program Alarms etc For the latter you must enable labeling under ENABLE FEATURES in the main Program menu Entering labels with the front panel
304. oder Teil die das nicht ausdr cklich vom Lieferanten als ersetzbar angegeben ist e Die gesamte Verkabelung mu den rtlichen Normen entsprechen und von zugelassenem erfahrenem Personal durchgef hrt werden e Die Erde muf vor allen anderen Kabeln angeschlossen und zuletzt abgeklemmt werden e Inder N he der Ausr stung mu ein Schalter in der Hauptstromversorgung vorhanden sein AUSR STUNGSDATEN Netzspannung 85 bis 265 VAC Frequenz 50 60 Hz Nennleistung 45 VA Sicherungswert 2 A 250 VAC UMGEBUNGSBEDINGUNGEN Betreiben Sie das Ger t nicht in Gegenwart entflammbarer Fl ssigkeiten oder D mpfe Der Betrieb elektrischer Ger te in solchen Umgebungen stellt ein Sicherheitsrisiko dar Temperatur Umgebung 0 bis 50 C Lager 20 bis 70 C Feuchtigkeit 10 bis 90 RH ohne Kondensation 40 C Vibration 5 bis 15 Hz Amplitude 1 mm 15 bis 150 Hz Beschleunigung 0 5g ANBRINGUNG DER AUSR STUNGEN Der Regler mu in ein Pult eingebaut sein damit der Bediener nicht zu oft auf die hinteren Anschl sse zugreifen muf A2OAAEIAD GR21 6047 Ma atropuyr rou KIVOUVOU NAEKTPOTTANEias Tou 8a vd TIPOKAAECE TTPOOWTTIKO TPAUUATIOUO AKOAOUBEiOTE OAES UTTOSEIEEIS AUTWV TWV OSNYIWV To aur TO xprjorr NAEKTPIKO KivGuVO TEP TTWON ETTAPNS ue erik vouva YEON TNG ouokeuric lpocrarguriK TEPYATIKO yEeiwo
305. olds this value until the end of the next time interval If the Reset Input turns ON 1 the output is held and the time interval restarts Table 4 17 describes the Peak Picking prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 17 Peak Picking Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input source whose peak is picked number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 Holds output and restarts time interval 1 ACTION NONE MIN MAX AVG Type of peak pick MIN selects the minimum MAX selects STDDEV the maximum AVG selects the mean average STDDEV selects the standard deviation over the time interval PERIOD MINUTES 0 999 999 9 Number of minutes in time interval 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 107 Programming Function Blocks and Features Signal Select Selects one of eight inputs based on the action and outputs it as CVn OV Table 4 18 describes the Signal Select prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Prompt OUTPUT LOW LIMIT OUTPUT HIGH LIMIT Table 4 18 Signal Select Prompts Range Selections OFF or number Definition Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded INPUT 1 INPUT 8 OFF analog parameter number Up to 8 input sources to be selected from according to
306. oltage would be placed on the RTD mV or volt source me mV or volts Thermocouple ATTENTION For these expanded input ranges 0 to 10V 0 to 20V 10V to 10V 20V to 20V you must 1 change jumper settings on the AI circuit board 2 program the selected accordingly See section 9 2 Changing Analog Input Ranges source Figure 2 6 Analog Input Wiring Connections VPR amp VRX User Manual 25 Installation Analog Output Connections Analog outputs may be Current Output CAT Voltage Output VAT Time Proportion Output DAT or Position Proportional Type PP For CAT or VAT wiring see Figure 2 7 For DAT wiring use general purpose output relays or open collector outputs For Position Proportional wiring see Figure 2 10 See Discrete Output Connections See Table 1 1 Specifications for output signal specifications for output circuit card modules Figure 2 7 or VAT Wiring Connection Discrete Input Connections See the Specifications section for input specifications for circuit card modules Connect the wires according to Figure 2 8 if your instrument has TB3 or Figure 2 9 if it has TB3A or TB3B For TB3A and TB3B you can connect to any COMM terminal on the terminal board DI O pic 7 Figure 2 8 Discrete Input Connections TB3 2 EO cou 2 Figure 2 9 Discrete Input Connections on amp TB3B 26 VPR amp V
307. omparison is true and OFF 0 when comparison is not true If hysteresis is given a value then Result will not go OFF 0 until hysteresis value is exceeded Result is then processed according to the specified condition type and condition time The final output is a discrete pulse CVn OS COMPARE Input i CONDITION Input 2 OPERATOR Result amp CVn OS L 99 amp m NDITION HYSTERESIS co ES Figure 4 3 Compare Signal Flow Table 4 19 and Table 4 20 describe the Compare prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 19 Compare Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition INPUT 1 OFF analog parameter Input sources to be compared INPUT 2 number OPERATOR EQ GT LT GTE LTE NEQ The Result will be set to ON 1 when the comparison is true Input 1 OPERATOR Input 2 where OPERATOR is EQ GT gt LT lt GTE gt LTE lt NEQ The Result will be set to OFF 0 when the comparison is false HYSTERESIS Number OFF Applies to all operators except EQ and NEQ If givena value hysteresis determines when Result goes OFF 0 after the comparison becomes false Operator Hysteresis Function GT Result goes OFF when Input 2 Input 1 gt Hyst GTE Result goes OFF when Input 2 Input 1 gt Hyst LT Result goes OFF when Input 1 Input 2 gt Hyst LTE Result goes OFF when Input 1 Input 2 gt Hyst See Figure 4 4 CONDI
308. on PHASE NONE DAILY WEEKLY Select the timer format Remaining prompts will vary per MONTHLY phase selected PERIOD HOURS 0 23 Number of hours in the period PERIOD MINUTES 0 59 Number of minutes in the period PERIOD SECONDS 0 59 Number of seconds in the period RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Phase NONE only When this discrete is ON 1 timer stops and resets to beginning of period When discrete is OFF 0 timer begins again START DAY MONDAY For Phase WEEKLY select the day of the week to start the TUESDAY SUNDAY timer For Phase MONTHLY select the day of the month to start 1 31 the timer If this number exceeds the number of days in any given month then the discrete switches ON 1 the last day of that month START HOURS 0 23 Hours of the Start time START MINUTES 0 59 Minutes of the Start time START SECONDS 0 59 ATTENTION The Start Time s value cannot exceed the Period 8 00 00 and a Period of 4 00 00 for example Seconds of the Start time An error message is displayed if you enter a Start Time of 128 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Mass Flow By compensating for variations in fluid temperature and pressure Mass Flow is used to obtain a more precise fluid flow measurement from an orifice plate developing a differential pressure The output CVn OV is mass flow and is calculated from t
309. on Software You do not need a live instrument to create a configuration file using SCF Once stored to disk the instrument configuration file may be downloaded into other instruments that have an identical model number This helps to greatly reduce the amount of time required to program and configure multiple units sharing the same application Having the instrument configuration on disk can also drastically minimize down time in the event of an instrument failure The file can be used to program and configure a replacement unit within seconds As far as the calibration file of the instrument is concerned it can be used to restore analog input and output calibration if use of a calibration source and or meter is not possible or an inconvenience Performing Set Point Program Storage Refer to Section 5 of the manual for a detailed explanation of how Set Point Program Storage is accomplished 76 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 How To Program Function Blocks and Features 4 1 Overview This section describes all the programming procedures to get your instrument up and running except Profiles which are discussed in Section 5 It describes the entire Program Mode menu and some items from the Online Mode menu What s in this section The following topics are covered in this section Topic Page Programming Tips 78 The Program Mode Menu 79 Frequently used programming paramet
310. only after contacting Honeywell in advance Carefully remove the instrument and remove any shipping ties or packing material Follow the instructions on any attached tags or labels and then remove such tags or labels DSU floppy disk If you ordered the optional 120MB or Zip disk drive look for the floppy disk labeled DSU DATA STORAGE UTILITY See Section 2 for installation instructions 4 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction 1 6 Specifications Specifications are the same for the VPR100 VRX100 and VRX150 unless noted otherwise Table 1 1 Specifications Physical Enclosure VPR100 amp VRX100 Drawn aluminum case with high impact resistant polycarbonate plastic bezel and abrasion scratch resistant lens With the proper panel mounting with the required gasketing and with the front bezel firmly close the VPR100 and VRX100 meet the criteria for NEMA Type 3 Enclosure for protection from rain and sleet as described in NEMA Standard 250 1991 Sec 6 4 2 2 VRX150 Drawn aluminum case with high impact resistant polycarbonate plastic bezel Mounting Panel 1 52 mm to 19 05 mm 0 06 to 0 75 thickness Dimensions VPR100 amp VRX100 Bezel 144 mm H x 144 mm W x 43 mm D 5 67 H x 5 67 W x 1 69 D Case 137 mm x 137 mm W x 295 mm D 5 39 H x 5 39 W x 11 61 D VRX150 Bezel 295 mm W x 279 mm x 44 45 mm D 11 61 W x 10 98 H x 1 75 D Case 137 mm H x 1
311. onnected to TB2 Pin 6 which is then connected to TB1 Pin 1 earth ground The recommended cable of this type is Belden 8728 80C DO NOT connect the outer shield to the internal shield ground This will not provide adequate immunity protection Required for CE application but recommended for general use 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 29 Installation 30 PC HOST 4 Wire Binary and Modbus RTU RX RX SHLD ao TX TX TX TX SHLD RX TX TX SHLD RX Master Slave address Slave any address Slave any address Last slave must be terminated 2 Wire O O odbus RTU onl TX TX SHLD RX RX TX TX SHLD RX RX TX TX SHLD RX RX Slave any address Slave any address Slave any address Last slave must be terminated Figure 2 13 Network Data Cable Connections VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 Programming and Operating Concepts and Procedures 3 1 Overview This section explains the instrument s programming and operating concepts and procedures Read and understand this section before attempting to program and operate your instrument 3 2 Quick Start Programming If you need to get your instrument up and running quickly you can skip reading the entire
312. ons and enabled features see Enable Features in Section 4 19 Edit Alarm Setpoints Select this item to display a list of alarms and their setpoints If the setpoint is a numeric value it can be changed on this display using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons If it is programmed as a parameter it cannot be changed here Edit Constants Select this item to display or change a list of all constants in the instrument To change a value use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons Force Discrete Inputs Outputs Select either of these items to display or force the status of any discrete The STATE indicates ON or OFF FORCE RELEASE indicates if the discrete is forced or released unforced To force a discrete select FORCE ON or FORCE OFF To release a forced discrete select RELEASE Adjust with Up Arrow and Down Arrow Press Enter to enter the changes Press Menu to leave the menu Adjust Analog Inputs Select this item to display a list of all the analog inputs presently configured Analog Input Adjust may be applied or removed from any AI on the list If the AI point has been configured with a pyrometer range the Input Adjust is applied as a multiplier equal to the newly entered value divided by the actual measured valued at the time that the adjustment is entered In this case the Value Adjust is referred to as an emissivity adjustment If the AI point has been configured with any other range the value adjust is applied as
313. ortional Band Enter OFF to allow integral only control Gain is the proportional gain entry for the control loop The value entered here is the gain applied to the error signal to determine the loop output For example a 10 change in process variable with respect to the input range from a balanced condition will result in a 10 change in output when a gain of 1 0 is used Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning If an indirect source is specified as in an adaptive gain configuration the value can only be altered at the Source Variable Gain1 or PB1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with GN or PB See Program Constants Section 4 16 Gain and Proportional Band are interchangeable values Proportional Band 100 Gain For loops with dual tuning Gain 1 is the gain for the first set of tuning parameters Gain 2 is for the second set VPR amp VRX User Manual 247 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition RESET 1 0 005 99 99 repeats minute Determines the period of time for a repeat of the proportional gain output Enter a starting value at initial configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Reset 1 is the time for the first set of tuning parameters Reset 2 is for the second set Variable Reset1 is a
314. ource to the terminals of the selected TC or EMF input 2 Adjust the source to 25 mV Select the calibration voltage 25 mV and press Enter to calibrate the selected range A message CALIBRATING will appear until calibration is complete If it fails a failure message is displayed 3 Repeat for 75 mV 1 0V and 5 0V 4 Press Menu to restore the Main Maintenance Menu when finished 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 257 Maintenance Calibrating RTD Inputs Table 8 3 Calibrate RTD Input Procedure 1 Perform the appropriate EMF calibration as described above Using the same input connect a precision variable resistor to the RTD input Figure 8 1 The A and B leads must be of equal resistance length 3 For standard inputs set the resistor to 100 ohms Select RTD CALIBRATE 100 OHMS and press Enter The message CALIBRATING will appear until the RTD low range calibration is complete Repeat this step using 500 ohm resistor and RTD CALIBRATE 500 OHMS 4 For 10 ohm copper inputs set the resistor to 10 ohms Select RTD CALIBRATE 10 OHMS and press Enter The message CALIBRATING will appear until the RTD low range calibration is complete Repeat this step using 25 ohm resistor and RTD CALIBRATE 25 OHMS 5 Press Menu when AI calibration is complete to return to the main Maintenance menu Figure 8 1 RTD Calibration Connection 8 5 Calibrate Analog Outputs For VAT calibration a precision voltmeter is requ
315. out of Online Mode See SET MODE SET MODE Set to Yes to secure changing from Online mode to Program or Maintenance modes OPERATOR SEC 3 digit number Enter a non zero operator security code value a value of zero CODE offers no security Secures the following items if set to Yes AUTO MANUAL Set to Yes to secure Online changes between a loop s Auto and Manual modes SP1 SP2 Set to Yes to secure Online changes between a loop s SP1 and SP2 SETUP PARAMETERS Set to Yes to secure changes to e Online Data Entry menu items Alarm Setpoints Analog Input Adjust e Online Tune Loop menu REVIEW PROGRAM Set to Yes to secure Online access to Review Programming via REVIEW PROGRAMMING menu DATA STORAGE Set to Yes to secure access to any part of data storage via Online DATA STORAGE menu Does not affect access to Online DATA STORAGE STATUS display PROFILER Set to Yes to secure access to all Setpoint Profiler menus and displays 164 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 21 Serial Communications Serial Communications is an optional feature that lets the instrument exchange data with a host device a PC running Honeywell or other compatible software on an RS422 485 data link Using Honeywell protocols Binary or Modbus RTU this link can be used to transfer configurations and data Set up the link as follows Table 4 66 describes the Serial Communications prompts
316. ow the Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter buttons work should now be at your fingertips VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts PRODUCT INFO S N YXX XX XXXXX XXXXX X PART NUMBER XXXXXXXX VERSION X X Product info Display MAIN MENU ONLINE p SET MODE p DATA STORAGE I ACCESS SUMMARIES DATA ENTRY t SET POINT PROFILES REVIEW PROGRAMMING 4 TUNE LOOP MAIN MENU PROGRAM SET MODE LABELS I ANALOG INPUTS CONTROL LOOPS 1 CALCULATED VALUES TOTALIZERS ALARMS ANALOG OUTPUTS 0 DISCRETE INPUTS 4 DISCRETE OUTPUTS PROFILERS L CONSTANTS DISPLAYS FEATURES L SECURITY SCAN RATE LOAD STORE CONFIG 4 CLOCK COPY BLOCK I SERIAL COMM SCAN RATE MAIN MENU MAINTENANCE SET MODE CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS gt OFFLINE DIAGNOSTICS MAINS FREQUENCY PRODUCT INFORMATION j RESET UNIT I DATABASE SERVICES WARM START TIME DEMO Figure 3 5 Menu Navigation Guide Through ON LINE PROGRAM and MAINTENANCE mode MAIN MENUs 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 35 Programming and Operating Concepts Getting familiar with the menus 36 Now use the Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow
317. p VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 14 Data Storage A unique feature of the instrument is its handling of data storage to 1 44 MB or 120 MB disks The unit s front bezel must be closed for any disk drive operations to take place 1 44 MB disks may be formatted in the instrument or on a PC Read this overview thoroughly to understand the fundamentals behind the instrument s data storage capabilities Categories of Stored Data 12 00 There are four categories of disk storable data Each category of data is stored in its own unique file The categories are 1 Data Storage Configuration Storage 2 3 Setpoint Program Storage 4 Calibration Storage Data Storage Process Data Trends Unit Data Configuration Setpoint Program Calibration Diagnostic Data Alarms Events Figure 3 32 Categories of Stored Data The first category of stored data Data Storage is comprised of two types of data process data and diagnostic data When the instrument stores these data types it is essentially functioning as a recorder Process data is comprised of up to six files containing historical information on the process that the instrument is monitoring and or controlling such as the temperature trend or a log of a furnace over time Process data also includes any alarm or discrete event information Diagnostic data is the result of the instrument s execution of diagnostic routines
318. p for storage of TREND 1 is exactly as shown If the message is SETUP IS NOT CURRENT then the TREND 1 setup has been changed since a disk was last initialized To make a NOT CURRENT setup CURRENT you must initialize the disk using new schedules Set up Trend Data 1 as described in Table 4 71 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 171 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 71 Prompts For Storage Setup Of Trends Alarms Events Diagnostics Prompt STORAGE MODE COPY DISPLAY SETUP POINT 1 POINT 6 VPR100 amp VRX100 POINT 1 POINT 12 VRX150 Range Selections CONTIN BATCH or NONE Analog or discrete parameter Seconds 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 Definition Continuous storage becomes active immediately upon initialization Batch storage is controlled by a discrete parameter see BATCH CONTROL or by start stop batch menu item Batch data may be started and stopped several times in a single file until the file is full Batch start increments a batch number that is stored along with the data The batch number may be used for data retrieval and analysis using SDA data analysis software Select this to copy the following Trend 1 or 2 Display data to Trend 1 or 2 Storage data Point 1 6 set display limits timebase high rate selector Once setup is copied it can be altered Select the data points for the trend LOW RATE Enter data collection rate This is how often the data points 7
319. parameter set to YES limits overshoot of the Setpoint SP by the Process Variable PV after a disturbance in the process such as a load or SP change Through fuzzy logic the working SP of the control loop is dynamically modified by the control algorithm to reduce or eliminate overshoot Pretune calculates optimum values for a loop s Proportional Band Gain Reset and Rate by analyzing the reaction of the loop to a step change in setpoint or output After these new tuning values have been calculated you have the option of applying installing or not applying them to a preselected tune set of the loop You can pretune a loop while another loop is pretuning See Pretune Loop on page250 Enter the timebase for the time axis of the tuning trend display VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 9 Tune Loop Prompts continued Prompt Range Selections Definition DISPLAY TUNING Select this to display the actual tuning trend with PV and TREND setpoint Figure 7 2 Data collection for this trend display will continue as long as the display shows either the trend or the Loop Tuning Menu Use this display to help find the optimal tuning parameters Note If you access this display through a loop display by Tabbing to and selecting the loop tag name at the top of any loop display the trend data is not buffered when you leave and return to this tuning trend display Therefore if you wish to adj
320. ped and stored in the event file LNE on the disk Barcode Reader Recommendation e barcode reader should output ASCII keyboard data e reader should be capable of Code 39 barcode input e The connector should be able to connect to the Keyboard connector located under the bezel CAUTION While the barcode reader is installed data storage is to a buffer NOT disk 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 45 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 7 Access to Floppy Drive Keyboard Barcode Reader Connection VPR100 amp VRX100 Access To connect a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader to remove or install a floppy disk or to access the inside of the instrument open the front bezel as described in Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Front Bezel Open Close Procedure Step Action While pressing the bottom of the bezel inward press the button on the underside of the bezel to release the latch Pull the bottom of the bezel outwards slightly away from the panel and then lift it gently to fully open it as shown in Figure 3 9 3 Close the bezel by releasing the bezel release lever and lowering the bezel with the bottom held slightly out Engage the top edge of the bezel first and then swing the bottom inward toward the panel Press the bottom in firmly until the latch clicks into place Close the bezel securely or storage to disk will not operate properly N QWERTY Keyboard Connector Figure 3
321. ple To support this application a 4 to 20 mA control loop with a thermocouple process variable must be configured Three function blocks one for specifying a thermocouple analog input a second for a standard PID control loop and a third defining a 4 to 20 mA analog output are needed to produce this control strategy s function block diagram Each function block should first be arranged as in Figure 3 16 Analog input and output function blocks are represented by right pointed triangles Control loop function blocks are represented by right pointed parallelograms ANALOG INPUT CONTROL LOOP ANALOG OUTPUT Figure 3 16 Basic Function Blocks Required For Control Configuration Of Figure 3 15 2 Label input parameters 60 Properly label each function block First assign to each function block a name that identifies it within the hardware and feature capacities of the instrument being worked with You may assign any of the analog inputs control loops and analog outputs that your instrument has to the blocks comprising the function block diagram drawn For simplicity AI1 LP1 and AOI will be used in this example Refer to Figure 3 17 Note that AI5 LP2 and AO2 could just as easily have been used VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 Label output parameters The second part in labeling each function block is to denote the blocks major input and output parameters Each of these paramet
322. ples 10 Average Period 30 minutes The first average will appear after 30 minutes then will be updated every 30 10 or 3 minutes after When the Reset Input is ON 1 all accumulated samples are discarded and the output is held until the Reset Input is OFF 0 then the averaging period resets Table 4 46 describes the Rolling Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 46 Rolling Average Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter This parameter will be averaged number RESET OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Resets average OF SAMPLES 1 60 Number of samples taken during average period AVG PERIOD MINS OFF or number Number of minutes in average period 140 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Multiple Input Average Multiple Avg The output CVn 1 is the instantaneous average of the assigned input points The average is calculated every scan cycle Table 4 47 describes the Multiple Average prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 47 Multiple Average Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT INPUT 1 INPUT 8 OFF analog parameter
323. point Select SET HOLD and press Enter An H appears in the lower right display The HOLD will remain in effect until deliberately removed with REL HOLD To HOLD a different point press the Tab key until the desired point is shown then press the Display button To release the HOLD select REL HOLD DETAIL Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to move the line cursor forward or backward in time The value of the displayed point will change to its value at the new time If desired press Tab to change to the next point on a multi point trend Press the Menu button to restore the Point Detail menu The trend display will remain at the chosen point Press the Display button to restore the primary display and cancel DETAIL feature FIND Lets you display the trend from a certain time A list of times will appear on the display as shown FIRST is the oldest time available in the trend LAST is the most recent time available FIRST JAN 1 1999 12 00 LAST JAN 5 1999 13 00 FIND JAN 1 1999 12 00 Select month day year hour and minute To cancel the search press Display Menu Display1 or Display2 buttons When the data has been found the selected time date will appear in the center of the trend area The Point Detail menu will also appear ZOOM Lets you magnify zoom the displayed scale Press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to select the amount of magnification shown in the lower right corner of the display Note that the
324. preteen ee Se e peret 69 Figure 3 28 Function Block Diagram Of Set Point Profile Control Of Figure 3 20 sse 70 Figure 3 29 Discrete Inputs Controlling Execution Of Set Point Profiler Function Block essss 70 Figure 3 30 Up 16 Discrete Events May Be Programmed Per Step Of A Set Point Profile 71 Figure 3 31 Tying A Profile Function Block s Discrete Events With Discrete Output Hardware 72 Figuie 3 32 Categories of Stored Data eite eroe bett UR NI eU reete A uere te bb redes 73 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual xiii Figure 4 1 Function Block Configuration of a Typical Ratio Control Loop eee 99 Figure 4 2 Function Block Configuration of a Position Proportional Function Block for One Position Proportional Control Lo0p niter eee the e RR DERE 103 Figure 4 3 Compare Signal FIOW sd oa o ESEE EO EEES ES oe nee 109 Figure 4 4 Compare s Greater Than Result With 1 110 Figure 4 5 Math CV Feedback Programming eese nennen enne 114 Figure 4 6 Logic Signal Flow eie eite et ein RR ter Reli DH rhe Obr e EE ED Ee ek epe e EEEE 117 Figure 4 7 Free Form Logic Signal Flows no ere tren bei teen REIR US 119 Figure 4 8 Fu
325. programmed per segment See Figure 3 30 PROCESS VALUE IN ENGINEERING UNITS TIME SEGMENT SEGMENT SEGMENT SEGMENT SEGMENT 1 2 3 4 5 SP1 EVENT ON OFF ON ON OFF 1 1 16 Figure 3 30 Up 16 Discrete Events May Be Programmed Per Step Of A Set Point Profile Discrete events whose ON or OFF states depend on the step number of the profile they are associated with may be externalized using the discrete output hardware available in the instrument Figure 3 31 features the function block diagram elements that represent how to program the instrument s discrete outputs so that their states coincide with those assumed by a profile s discrete events 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 71 Programming and Operating Concepts AO1 BC TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA External INPUT TYPE J Switches RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 500 IN LOW LIMIT 0 01 OS SP2 SP1 OV IN HIGH LIMIT 100 OUT LOW LIMIT 4 BAIE OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 SP1 E16 1 1 gt 72 Figure 3 31 Tying A Profile Function Block s Discrete Events With Discrete Output Hardware Refer to your instrument s model number to verify its complement of discrete input and output hardware The available combinations of discrete inputs and outputs are featured in the Specifications section VPR am
326. programs in a four profile instrument contain 4 profiles Guaranteed soak is a set of parameters that hold the profiler when the deviation between the generated setpoint and either PV is larger than a configured limit Event outputs are discrete output parameters of the Setpoint Profiler function block They may be tied to other function blocks such as Discrete Outputs Profile features Each profile has the following features e A second PV is available Each PV is monitored for excessive deviation from the profile value in which case the profiler can be automatically put on Hold e Menu or discrete control of profile resetting starting holding advancing shutting down or fast forwarding through the profile 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 183 Setpoint Profiler e Discrete input for starting the profiler at the current value of the process variable Known as hot start e Discrete input for enabling disabling guaranteed soak over the entire profile e Guaranteed soak configurable per segment e Discrete outputs to indicate profile state including Ready Run Hold In Progress and At End e Upto 16 Discrete outputs Events programmable per segment e Four user selectable methods for ramping e Automatic recycling of the profile e Up to four levels of looping within profile e Jumping to another segment e Batch operation including shutdown profiling activated through a discrete input or online menu Sche
327. put hardware The Program Discrete Outputs menu item will appear if the optional Discrete Outputs are installed ATTENTION If a discrete output has been assigned to a time proportioning output DAT it will not be programmable here See OUTPUT RELAY in Table 4 13 Select a DO to program then program the prompts in Table 4 15 See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 15 Discrete Output Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition ACTION STATE NORMAL INVERT Determines whether the relay will normally be energized or de energized when the DO s Input is ON 1 To select energized when ON enter NORMAL not inverted To select energized when OFF enter INVERT inverted INPUT OFF discrete parameter 0 Source of the Discrete Output 1 EVENT ENABLE NONE RISING FALLING Determines whether changes in DO s status can be recorded BOTH as events in data storage For storage to occur Data Storage must also be programmed to store Events NONE status changes are not stored RISING OFF 0 to ON 1 changes can be stored FALLING ON 1 to OFF 0 changes can be stored BOTH Rising and falling changes can be stored ATTENTION To change to 16 DI s and 16 DO s or to 8 DI s and 24 DO s see Section 9 4 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 105 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 12 Program Calculated Values A Calculated Value CV is a data point whose value is derived from calculations involving other d
328. put value deviates aboveow compare point value by an amount gt setpoint value HRATE High Rate Alarm when input value increases at rate gt setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate LRATE Low Rate Alarm when input value decreases at rate setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate NONE No alarm action INPUT OFF analog parameter Input source monitored by alarm number SETPOINT OFF analog parameter Point at which alarm occurs alarm set point 144 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 50 Alarm Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition HYSTERESIS OFF or number Hysteresis affects only the point at which an alarm clears A high alarm will clear when the input is less than the setpoint minus the hysteresis value A low alarm will clear when the input is greater than the setpoint plus the hysteresis value A deviation alarm will clear when the input is less than the setpoint minus the hysteresis value DELAY TIME OFF or number If the alarm condition clears before the delay time in seconds expires no alarm will be indicated SAMPLE HOLD 1 OFF discrete parameter 0 disabled and the output is held When this parameter level 1 ON the a
329. puts Taggin __ ___ None Additional Analog Outputs Linen 0 Nore 1 output per Programmer __S___ Stainless Steel 1 1 additional Analog Output _2 2 additional Analog Outputs Approvals ___ __ None ___C__ CSA ___D__ Mark Compliant Additional Control Loops ___E__ CSA plus CE Mark Compliant 0__ None 1 Control Loop per Programmer 1 1 additional Control Loop 2__ 2additional Control Loops 3 3 additional Control Loops Standard 8 CVs Math 0 1 2 Totalizers 0 None __1 1 Totalizer __2 2 Totalizers 3 S Totalizers Advanced Math Package Level 1 16 CVs Advanced Math Package Level 2 32 CVs Communication 0 None C RS485 Binary Modbus RTU Software Support _ B SCF and SDA Software Packages C SCF configuration software D SDA data analysis software for PC Case Mountin 0 Standard Case Mounting P Portable Case R Rear Cover 12 00 Figure 1 5 VPR Model Number VPR amp VRX User Manual 13 Introduction VRX100 150 Model Number Key Number Table Table 11 Table III Table IV 5 0 TT Input types 0 Std _A 10 ohm Cu Std 100 ohm RTD B 0 10V Std E 10to 10V Std Discrete Inputs Outputs O None A 6DC Solid State Relay B 6 AC Solid State Relays C 6 Mechanical Relays
330. r EDIT PROFILE n SEGMENT n NEXT SEGMENT PREVIOUS SEGMENT VALUE 100 00 AUX VALUE 50 00 TIME 20 000 The profile and segment numbers whose value and time you are editing are shown 3 Use Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons to move cursor to value or time Press Enter to access the numbers shown Change the numbers with the Up Arrow and Down Arrow buttons Press Menu button when finished editing segments Numbers are changed to their new values The Profile Trend is displayed with the new segments 218 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 6 1 Overview Online operation using primary displays consists of using the buttons to view and interact with the displays that were assigned to the buttons Display Cand Display 1 The VRX 100 can have an optional Display 2 button 2 To assign displays to these buttons see section 4 18 Program Displays On the VRX150 with no control the Auto Manual key functions as the Display 2 key Press these buttons to change to online mode and access the displays assigned to this key Available displays are shown in Figure 4 19 and Figure 4 20 and are described in Table 6 1 In the following table interactive means the Tab button can be pressed to access various functions on the display Table 6 1 Displays Accessed With Display Button Display Fun
331. r Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 5 Button functions In all modes use the front panel buttons to view and select items from menus and displays Table 3 1 describes each panel button and its functions Table 3 1 Button Functions Symbol Name Function Operating mode in which function applies Program Online Maint Menu Accesses Online Mode Menu from v online primary display Backs cursor out of a menu to next 4 A higher menu level Use when finished looking at or changing menu items Y Y Y Up Arrow A Previous If changes were made and you are prompted to PRESS ENTER TO SAVE press to exit menu without saving changes Moves cursor up a menu or list of Y Y Y choices Immediately after selecting a menu item i7 to change repeatedly scrolls through NONE or OFF PARM parameters 0 9 of most significant digit of a number minus sign Once you move the cursor off a number s most significant digit then only 0 9 are choices You can change a number to a parameter NONE or OFF only while the cursor is initially on the most significant digit When selecting most significant digit of Y a number scrolls through 0 9 minus sign and OFF or NONE if available For other digits scrolls through 0 9 When entering a label such as a DESCRIPTOR or TAG scrolls through A Z 0 9 period hyphen slash plus asterisk blank In loop display
332. r Program 2 programmer instrument 2 Profiles per Program 3 programmer instrument 3 Profiles per Program 4 programmer instrument 4 Profiles per Program This contains This contains This contains This Contains Program this Profile Program these Program these Program these Profiles Profiles Profiles 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 4 1 2 2 1 4 3 2 2 6 1 2 3 2 7 4 3 1 3 8 1 2 2 4 5 E 3 3 1 10 1 2 4 1 2 ET 6 2 12 1 2 3 4 e e e 93 1 47 IEEE 24 1 94 1 2 32 1 2 95 1 48 1 2 3 96 2 3 4 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 209 Setpoint Profiler 210 Table 5 8 Procedure To Load A Program From Memory Using Online Menu VPR100 VRX150 only Action If instrument is not in online mode press the Display button to change to online mode Press the Menu button to display the online menu Press Down Arrow button to highlight Setpoint Profiles Press Enter Result Notes An online display is shown Online menu is displayed Cursor moves down Setpoint Profiles menu is displayed Press Down Arrow button to highlight Load Program From Memory Prompt is highlighted Press Enter Load Program sub menu is displayed Cursor moves to the right
333. r VAT Figure 9 3 Locations Of AO DIP Switch S1 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 267 On Site Adjustments 9 4 Changing number of DIs DOs To change the number of Discrete Inputs and Discrete Outputs remove the circuit card as explained in Section 9 1 Refer to Figure 9 4 and Table 9 7 for DIP switch location and settings 16 32 POINT DISCRETE I O Enlarged view of 1 DIP switches Figure 9 4 Location Of DIP Switch S1 On Discrete I O oooooo00o00000000000 oooooo00o00000000000 Figure 9 5 Instrument s Rear Terminals 268 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments Table 9 7 DIP Switch Settings For DI DO Combinations Use these S1 DIP switch settings S1 1 ON S1 1 OFF S1 1 OFF S1 1 ON S1 2 OFF S1 2 0N S1 2 OFF S1 2 ON For these DI DO combinations on TB3A and TB3B 16 DI 16 Open Collector 16 01 16 Open Collector 8 01 24 Open Collector 24 DI 8 Open Collector Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs TB3A TB3B TB3A TB3B TB3A TB3B TB3A TB3B DI9 DI DO9 DH DO9 DI DI9 DI DI10 012 DO10 012 DO10 012 DI10 012 0111 DI3 DO11 DI3 DO11 DI3 DI11 DI3 0112 014 0012 014 DO12 014 0112 DI4 0113 015 DO13 015 DO13 DI5 DI13 015 0114 DI6 DO14 DI6 DO14 DI6 0114 DI6 DI15 DI7 DO15 DI7 DO15 DI7 DI15 DI7 0116 DI8 DO16 DI8 DO16
334. r by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Requires a Deviation Deviation alarm does not contain deviation Parameter Program alarm with deviation Requires Input Parameter Alarm does not contain an input Requires Setpoint Parameter Alarm does not contain a setpoint Program alarm with input Program alarm with a setpoint RJ Not in Curve Al is custom type class thermocouple RJ Y values must contain 0 65 degrees enabled but curve does not contain 0 65 C 32 149 degrees F degrees C 32 149 degrees F 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 279 Error Messages Table 10 1 Error Messages continued Error Description User Action Temperature Constant FO Sterilization CV Temperature constant is not Program Temperature constant with Not Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero value greater than or equal to zero Than Zero Temperature Input Not FO Sterilization CV Temperature Input is not Program Temperature input with Programmed or Less programmed or is less than zero value greater than or equal to zero Than Zero Temperature Reference FO Sterilization CV Reference Temperature is Program Reference Temperature Not Programmed or Less not programmed or is less than zero with value greater than or equal to Than Zero zero Trend Has Too Many Data Storage cannot store more than 3 points Change number of points
335. r is denoted IN with its output parameter labeled to identify it as the physical 4 to 20 mA signal detectable at the pair of instrument rear terminals dedicated to AOI TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA Figure 3 17 Labeling Each Function Block s Name And Major Inputs And Outputs 4 Label function block parameters 12 00 Finally label each block s internal parameters Internal parameters may also be referred to as function block parameters As in the case of input and output parameters internal parameters associated with each block correspond to actual menu settings you program in the instrument While input and output parameters constitute either data exchanged between function blocks or physical signals exchanged between the instrument and the outside world internal parameters are settings that uniquely define the operation of the function block they are associated with Use of a function block s internal parameters is for the most part limited to within the operations of the function block itself It is not always possible or even practical to draw every internal parameter that a function block has or might need Therefore as a rule of thumb for starting out you should first think of internal parameters as simple labels that further define and clarify the internal operation of the function block With this rule of thumb in mind internal parameters become items that are hopefully intuitively obvious At this point wh
336. r ptr RC Regest UR etie aiieeiee cit RE 224 Figure 6 5 Panel Displayz itid tte e IM aon rte e Ide E he 225 Figure 6 6 Four Panel Display iiie ebbe tee tbe aderit eer eterer tiene eres 226 Figire 6 7 Loop Displays neto tnendeetesemenc ome DU e ORO EUR DERE e 227 Figure 6 8 Alarm Summary Display eese enne neret een nennen nennen tren tette teen tenete eterne sees 228 Figure 6 9 Example of Primary 1 1 229 Figure 7 1 Data Storage Status 1 1 238 Figure 7 2 Control Loop Tuning Displ y eene ierit eher tbe ee SEEE TE rI EE EE enne 249 Figure 821 RED Calibration ende pe RUE eR RUE RD el ERE 258 Figure 9 1 Circuit Card Removal VPR100 amp VRX100 essen enne nennen nennen enne eren nnne 264 Figure 9 2 Circuit Card Removal 150 nennen entente entente innen ennt entere nnne nne 265 Figure 9 3 Locations Of AO DIP Switch 51 teste tette terrier colere Pe te ESENE EREC 267 Figure 9 4 Location Of DIP Switch S1 On Discrete I O nee 268 Figure 9 5 Instrument s Rear Terminals siisi eseese onrein eeen ee e EEEE EEE SEEE E SKEE 268 Figure 9 6 Location of Jumpers W2 and
337. r reete ret 2 Figure 1 4 VRX 150 Video Recorder oet oe Ret eet Rent ueteri miei 3 Figure 1 5 VPR Model Number ce Idee i e e ee eibi ee bots ceste e bene edge ies 13 Figure 1 6 VRX100 VRX150 Model Number esee nennen nennen 14 Figure 2 1 VPRI00 amp VRX100 Mounting tete tiet et 18 2 2 VRXT30 Mo ntin secun re Orte ti apad pente tei deus ae et ns 19 Figure 2 3 Terminal Connections TB3 ccsssssscccnsssssscccnsessrscconsessrscoonseessscvonsessnsevenseessevenssosssesnecesensevensessnes 21 Figure 2 4 Terminal Connections TB3A amp 22 Figure 2 5 Terminal Connections TB3A amp 23 Figure 2 6 Analog Input Wiring entren reete enne 25 Figure 2 7 CAT or VAT Wiring enne 26 Figure 2 8 Discrete Input Connections on 3 nennen nein entren eren enne 26 Figure 2 9 Discrete Input Connections on TB3A amp TB3B sessi nennen nenne 26 Figure 2 10 Discrete O tp ut Connections essesi esseen 27 Figure 2 11 Position Proportional Typical Wiring 28 Figure 2 12 DIAT Typical
338. r the stop and the entire assembly can be removed There are no cables that need to be disconnected Remove screws and retainers Pull handle to remove assembly M 6 wire connector Sub bezel PC Molding Figure 9 2 Circuit Card Removal VRX150 Table 9 4 Circuit Card Replacement Procedure VRX150 1 Place the rear of the card cage assembly into the opening Lift it up and over the limit stop then push it all the way back into the housing 2 Press the unit back to fully engage the rear card edge connectors and until both front latches snap into place and the PC molding is flush with the sub bezel See Figure 9 2 3 Re connect the cables and wires by reversing steps 1 3 of Table 9 3 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 265 On Site Adjustments 9 2 Changing Analog Input Ranges Expanded input ranges are available by changing jumper settings on the AI card in Slot 4 leftmost card as you face the front of the instrument and programming the AI prompts as shown in Table 9 5 Table 9 5 Settings for expanded Al ranges Input Range Make these Under Program menu jumper settings program the selected Al as follows A B Standard Closed Open Standard range 0 10V Open 1 2 Range low 0 Range high 10 Indirect Circuit low 0 Circuit high 2 5 Electrical Units Volts 0 20V Open 1 2 Range low 0 Range high 20 Indi
339. rage To All Trend Files trend file Table 4 76 Capacity of 120 Megabyte Disk Estimated Disk Capacity 1 sec 5sec 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 10 min 30 min 1 hour 13 5days 2 2 mos 4 5 mos 1 1 yrs 2 2 yrs 22 2 yrs 66 8 yrs 133 7 yrs 8 1 days 1 3 mos 2 7 Mos 8 1 mos 1 3 yrs 13 3 yrs 40 1 yrs 80 2 yrs 59days 298 1 9 mos 5 9 mos 11 9 9 8yrs 294 yrs 58 8 yrs 48days 244days 1 6mos 4 8 mos 9 7 mos 80yrs 24 0 yrs 48 1 yrs 10 3 7 days 189days 1 2mos 3 7 mos 75mos 62 yrs 18 7 yrs 374 yrs 12 3 2 days 162days 1 0mo 3 2 mos 6 5 mos 5 3 yrs 16 0 yrs 32 1 yrs Batch Control Specify a discrete parameter as the START STOP switch for all data types whose storage mode is set to BATCH ATTENTION If no BATCH CONTROL parameter is defined here batch storage is started stopped instead through the menu item BATCH STATE If a parameter is defined here BATCH STATE menu item is disabled Format Disk Place a 1 44 megabyte floppy disk in the drive select this line and press Enter The message PRESS ENTER TO FORMAT will appear Press Enter to format or press Menu to cancel formatting The message FORMATTING DISK will appear until formatting is complete Press any button to cancel formatting When formatting is complete the message FORMAT COMPLETE will appear 120 megabyte disks can not be formatted with this prompt Warning Level 96 12 00 S
340. ramming Function Blocks and Features 4 26 Data Storage Overview Data Storage lets you store trends unit data alarms events and diagnostics in separate files on a floppy disk for later analysis and review replay Data can be reviewed onscreen or on a PC with SDA data analysis software Setpoint Programs instrument configurations and calibrations are not part of the Data Storage feature Setup and configuration of Data Storage is described in this section Online operation is described in Section 7 4 Data Storage menu The Data Storage menu items appear in the following order DATA STORAGE DATA STORAGE H gt ENABLE STORAGE HP STATUS Lp REPLAY FROM DISK Lp INITIALIZE DISK LisTDISK FILES p SETUP NEW REVIEW CURRENT SCHEDULES gt SCHEDULES BATCHNUMBER 4 BATCHSTATE 4 wARNINGLEVEL 4 FORMAT DISK Setup procedure Data Storage setup is performed Online to avoid interruption of current storage The steps are described briefly Table 4 70 Table 4 70 Data Storage Setup Procedure Step Action 1 Access DATA STORAGE Online Insert a formatted 1 44MB or 120MB disk into the disk drive If necessary format disk using FORMAT DISK see page 179 See Opening Closing the Front Bezel in Section 3 6 Only 1 44MB floppy disks can be formatted on the instrument 120MB disks must be formatted on a PC 2 Select ENABLE STORAGE See Enable Storage below
341. re for values of process variable or setpoint UNITS which will appear on Online loop displays FEEDBACK OFF analog parameter Provides verification to the loop that the loop output request number LP OV was achieved by the analog output module AO Feedback sources are typically pointed to the associated Back Calculation Value BC of an analog output module Feedback inputs must have a span equal to the loop output span when they are not pointed directly to analog output modules FEEDFORWARD OFF analog parameter Modifies the control loop output independent of the PID number calculation The range of the value should not exceed 0 to 100 units Feedforward is typically used to provide an output change in anticipation of a change to the loop process variable FEEDFORWARD 10 00 to 10 00 Applies gain to the feedforward input value GAIN FORCE REMOTE OFF discrete parameter 0 When discrete is ON 1 forces loop from automatic mode to MAN 1 remote manual mode In remote manual loop output is determined by the OUTPUT TRACKING value and the local Down Arrow and Up Arrow buttons for manual output adjustment are disabled In remote manual the automatic indicator AUTO of the display will flash Selecting Manual mode from the Auto Manual button will override remote manual operation When the loop s Setpoint 2 is programmed as the Setpoint Profiler SPn OV Force Remote manual should be programmed as OFF GAIN PROP BAND
342. rect Circuit low 0 Circuit high 5 Electrical Units Volts 10V Open 2 3 Range low 10 Range high 10 Indirect Circuit low 75 Circuit high 75 Electrical Units mV 20V Open 2 3 Range low 20 Range high 20 Indirect Circuit low 150 Circuit high 150 Electrical Units mV To identify jumpers for each Al locate jumper labels at rear of Al card nearest terminals and cross reference to the corresponding Al below For this Al Use these jumpers A W3 B W4 Al2 A W5 B W6 Al3 A W7 B W8 Al4 A W9 B W10 Al5 A W11 B W12 16 A W13 B W14 266 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 On Site Adjustments 9 3 Changing the CAT VAT Setting S1 DIP switch settings determine whether an analog output is CAT type or VAT type Table 9 6 Table 9 6 S1 DIP Switch Default Settings 51 1 51 2 51 3 51 4 VAT ON ON OFF OFF Circuit card slot 1 contains the S1 DIP switch for each analog output See Figure 9 3 for switch locations To gain access to the circuit cards see Section 9 1 ATTENTION After changing an S1 DIP switch s settings you must recalibrate the analog outputs Also make sure you put the instrument in online mode for at least several seconds before you calibrate the analog output Location Card Slot 1 DIP switch S1 for DIP switch S1 for DIP switch S1 for one CAT or VAT 3rd CAT or VAT 2nd CAT o
343. rocessed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate LRATE Low Rate An alarm programmed with delay will not activate before its delay time An alarm programmed with Alarm when input value decreases at rate gt setpoint value in units per minute Negative rate setpoints are processed as positive values May take up to 30 seconds to activate hysteresis will clear after its hysteresis delay The alarm will remain active as long as the conditions causing it remain When the conditions no longer exist the alarm will be cleared automatically Clear means that the indicators for the particular alarm on all displays will be removed and the alarm will be removed from the Alarm Summary list VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Online Operation Using Menus What happens during an alarm e A flashing red alarm indicator appears on the bottom of all screens The alarm must be acknowledged to stop the flashing On displays where the alarm point appears the value is red and a red indicator appears e The alarm is entered into the active alarm summary which can be viewed at any time The alarm summary contains the point identification a description of the alarm the sense high low rate etc the time of occurrence and the current value of the point e When the alarm clears the time of occurrence and the time of clearing will both be entered into the Alarm History which is an ongoing record of
344. rofiler is in Run or Hold Holds a profiler at its current position Profilers Elapsed Time continues but Segment Time stops until Profiler is started again Hold is activated by online operator menu or by a discrete input May be connected to HOLD F2 key SY1F2 Advances a profiler on Hold to the starting Rising Profiler is in value of the next segment If the profile is on edge Hold the last segment it advances to the ending value of the last segment If the profile is on the ending value of the last segment of the batch then it advances around to the starting value of segment 1 or to the first segment of the batch phase as defined by BATCH SEGMENT FIRST If within a loop advances to next segment in the loop Advance is activated by online operator menu or by a discrete input When HOT START is ON and the profiler is Level ON Profiler is in started the profiler begins to run at the point Ready in the profile where the current value of PV 1 first occurs Hot Start makes the profiler skip over unneeded segments Hot Start is activated by a discrete input Example If PV 1 is 100 and the profile contains the value 100 in Segment 4 and Segment 6 HOT START forces the profiler to start running at Segment 4 at 100 not at Segment 1 or Segment 6 See Figure 5 11 Profiler is put in Hold Profiler is put in Hold Profiler advances When profiler changes from Ready to Run profiler jumps to th
345. ronic device measuring low level electrical signals Proper site preparation and installation practices are important in achieving a trouble free system Our experience indicates that many problems are the result of improper installation Follow the procedures and recommendations in this section to ensure a successful installation Consider the following items for each installation e Physical mounting and location e Power line mains conditioning e Grounding for personal safety e Grounding for noise immunity e Suppression of noise from electrically connected loads e Suppression of noise from nearby not connected sources e Proper connections and terminations of communications links 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 15 Installation 2 3 Location Install the instrument in a control panel located in a control room or in a relatively clean factory environment It should not be installed in offices or residential locations The front of the instrument is gasketed and will provide reasonable protection from dust and moisture when properly installed in a panel The instrument must be panel mounted and terminals must be enclosed within panel to maintain safety compliance 2 4 Mounting Figure 2 1 illustrates how the instrument is attached to a panel Make the panel cutout as shown in Figure 2 1 Note that the panel may be up to 19 05 mm 0 75 thick To mount the instrument to the panel follow the procedure in Table 2 1 Note For
346. s X XXEXX values in exponential notation Example 1 23E4 means 1 23 x 10 OUT DECIMAL POS Same as IN DECIMAL POS selections Select the decimal point position that will be used for all outputs of the function ON LABEL OFF ON FILL DRAIN Select the discrete function s ON 1 state UP DOWN EMPTY FULL label START STOP IN OUT LOW HIGH OPEN CLOSED RESET RUN HOLD ACTIVE TRUE FALSE READY ABORT LEFT RIGHT ALARM NORMAL DECRS INCRS AUTO MANUAL LOAD UNLOAD SP1 SP2 COOL HEAT NO YES PAUSE OFF LABEL Same as ON LABEL selections Select the discrete function s OFF state label DESCR Enter up to 16 characters Usually appears as a header or title on some displays and reports For alarms this is the actual alarm message TAG Enter 7 characters maximum Identifies the point or function on most displays and reports Each tag must be unique UNITS Default choices Shows units of measure for analog values PSI DEGR on most displays and reports These 25 BAR K choices can be changed See Table 4 4 MW MV GPH V GPM GPS HZ Prompt does not appear if labeling is disabled under ENABLE FEATURES 80 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 5 Set Mode Select this item to change the operating mode of the instrument to Online Program or Maintenance The top of the display will show which mode you have changed to Program mode Program mode is an off line m
347. s Frequency 260 Maintenance 255 Maintenance mode defined 31 Math Operator 114 messages 229 Messages location 229 Messages and Symbols description 230 Minimum On and Off Time 102 Modes of operation 31 mounting seismic 17 Mounting 16 Mounting adjacent instruments 17 N Network 29 Noise Suppression 24 Number how to enter 55 O Off line Diagnostics 259 Online mode defined 31 Online Operation Using Menus 233 Online Operations Using Primary Displays 219 Online summaries accessing 240 On Site Adjustments 263 operating mode setting 234 Panel display interacting with 225 226 Parts 281 Power Connections 24 PP type output 103 Preset Output Value 147 Pretune Abort messages 253 COMPLETE menu 252 IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING menus 251 STOPPED menu 250 Pretune Loop 250 primary display example 229 Process Variable 89 Product Information 243 Product Information 260 profile advance 196 auto cycle 205 defined 183 event 192 fast forward 197 guaranteed soak 191 Hold 196 hold multiple profilers simultaneously 194 hot start 196 jump 205 loop 193 multi phase defined 185 process variables 186 ramp types 186 reset run 195 shutdown 198 single phase defined 185 start 195 synchronize multiple profilers 194 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 307 Index time multiplier 206 Profile running 2 or more at once 151 start by pressing a key 51 progra
348. scaled IN HIGH LIMIT RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s scaling values and display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH INPUT OFF analog parameter Input to be scaled according to the limits number 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 137 Programming Function Blocks and Features Signal Clamp If input is between Low Select and High Select the output CVn OV equals the input If the input exceeds these two limits the output equals the preset value Table 4 44 describes the Signal Clamp prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 44 Signal Clamp Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT LOW SELECT OFF analog parameter If input goes below this number the output will equal the number preset value Otherwise the output equals the input HIGH SELECT OFF analog parameter If input goes above this number the output will equal the number preset value Otherwise the output equals the input INPUT OFF analog parameter Input to be clamped number PRESET OFF analog parameter Output will go to this value when the input exceeds the number low or high select values 138 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features 1 Point Block Average 1 Pt Block Avg Outputs a block m
349. set Unit siot de ta p RR o eth e es 260 5 9 Product Informations sce er Eee o epe ite diee geek 260 9 10 Mains Fregene y etc coe eoe teh etre ep i e rah te ee rti eto Pe ene see prece 260 8 11 Warm Start Time dede ie eee e ee ee dee Suey ened 261 8 12 DEMO ries e tb ae io e i e eo 262 9 ON SITE ADJUSTMENTS 5 inesiscsescuscsssascinsuG acus scusa kein esiucud 263 9 1 Removing the Circuit Card nennen nennen nene 263 9 2 Changing Analog Input Rangs i ineine arien eee EEEE nennen rennen eren entente 266 9 3 Changing the CAT V AT Setting retener Ig ere hr ere ge ree i ER e tie 267 g4 Changing number of DIS DOSs 5 nee het eee ier beer e Eee 268 9 5 Setting The Communications Link Termination Jumper eene 270 9 6 Diagnostic Messages stereo ge Ete e eee ret ERE EE LEE HE EO UH HO E HIS ERE Hue Pe 271 977 EGop Brror Indicators aio eet e e e eed e e ced ote e cedet 275 10 ERROR 5 5 i nag c CO ayuu ERU oU EO RE n DIA REN ERR oa RUE CER 277 Wie I PABIS nia uio an adde oe Elect EB cec Cavi dde ax Gavin D e ua Ed 281 APPENDIX 291 Security Bypass Procedure eie eee Le PLUR Hd
350. size of the Zoom cursor changes accordingly See Figure 6 4 OFF uses point s trend display limits turns Zoom off 2X uses half of point s trend display limits 4X uses one fourth of point s trend display limits FULL uses point s programmed limits not its trend display limits Press the Tab key to select the point trace to be zoomed magnified Press Enter to display the magnified trend The Point Detail menu is displayed to allow further analysis Press the Display button to restore the primary display with the ZOOM limits A Z appears in the lower right of the display continued 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 223 Online Operations Using Primary Displays Table 6 2 Point Detail Menu Prompts continued Prompt Definition TIMEBASE Lets you change the timebase of the trend Choices are NORMAL use the trend s normal timebase ALTERN Alternate use the trend s alternate timebase Move the cursor box to the desired timebase and press Enter The trend will be redisplayed in the new timebase An arrow points to the current timebase Timebases are specified in the program mode Available for live trends only If a storage trend s CHANGE WITH KEY is set to YES then changing the timebase will also change the storage rate of the storage trend That is if the live Trend1 is displayed in NORMAL timebase then the storage Trend1 will be stored at the LOW rate If the live Trend1 is display
351. stored to disk in the Event File Circuit Card Removal and Replacment Procedures VPR100 amp VRX100 Table 9 1 Circuit Card Removal Procedure VPR100 amp VRX100 1 Open the front display assembly by pressing the button underneath the bezel to release the latch and then pulling the bezel forward and up Press the bottom edge of the bezel as you press the button and the latch will release easily 2 Lift the front bezel up and out until it locks in the open position With your palm face up insert 2 fingers into the 2 loops of the bottom bail linkage Some instruments have a single loop See Figure 9 1 4 With your free hand one at a time push each latch toward the center of the instrument while gently pulling with the other hand on the bail linkage You may have to gently jiggle and pull on the bail linkage to help release the latches 5 Once the latches are free of the sub bezel pull on the bail linkage to slide the circuit card assembly out of the instrument 6 The sub chassis will strike a stop when it is almost all the way out Lift the back end of the card cage to clear the stop and the entire assembly can be removed There are no cables which need to be disconnected 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 263 On Site Adjustments 264 EN RE Palm face up insert three fingers Bail linkages here and pull out sub chassis eae i
352. t Range Selections Definition 12 00 SAMPLE HOLD FAILSAFE CLAMPING OFF discrete parameter 0 1 For thermocouples only Upscale UP Downscale DOWN or None LO RANGE clamps input at the RANGE LOW value HI RANGE clamps the input at the RANGE HIGH value RANGE clamps input over both the low and high range values NONE gives no clamping Holds Input The input value is measured normally when this discrete is OFF and holds its last value when the discrete is ON 1 Hold appears on menu only if EXPANDED INPUT is enabled under Enable Features in the Program menu Determines whether or not failsafe is active and if so which direction Clamps input at specified value ATTENTION Clamping is not recommended for process variable inputs to control loops VPR amp VRX User Manual 87 Programming Function Blocks and Features Custom algorithm prompts Table 4 7 describes the custom algorithm prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts These prompts appear only if CUSTOM INPUT is enabled under FEATURES See Section 4 19 Range Selections EMF TC or RTD Table 4 7 Custom Algorithm Prompts Prompt INPUT SIGNAL Definition Selects the input hardware RJ ENABLE EMISSIVITY ENABLE Xn Yn ELECTRICAL UNITS Select Yes for reference junction compensation NO for no compensation Select Yes for emissivity compensation for emf input You must input
353. t 2 an analog parameter to a number You can also connect a discrete parameter to a number A discrete parameter such as an alarm s input source can be connected to any discrete parameter type in Table 3 5 or it can be programmed with a 0 to signify the off state or with a 1 to signify the on state Enter a value of or 0 For example if you program an alarm s input source Figure 3 11 with a value of 1 the alarm s output ALI OS will always be on To program a discrete parameter with a or 0 perform the following procedure The procedure uses Alarm1 s Input source as the parameter being programmed Table 3 8 Example Programming Discrete Input Parameter with a Number 1 In the Program Alarms menu select ALARM 1 Consult the Program Alarm section of this manual to learn about the menu item yo wish to change namely INPUT SOURCE 3 Press Down Arrow to move the cursor to INPUT SOURCE 5 Press Up Arrow until 1 or 0 is displayed Press ENTER to select The cursor moves to the left and the display indicates your choice of 1 or 0 has been made 56 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts ATTENTION Note the difference between programming a discrete parameter with OFF and programming it with a 0 OFF means not connected 0 means off state 3 11 How to program function block parameters The second type of programmable parameter is a function b
354. t Each output holds its OUT HI LIM value when the input gt the IN HI LIM value for that output Output limits OUT LO LIM amp OUT HI LIM cannot exceed 100 but can be negatively sloped OUT HI LIM OUT LO 100 A1 2 OUTPUT VALUE 0 0 30 60 90 100 INPUT SOURCE VALUE Figure 4 14 Advanced Splitter Default Outputs FEEDBACK 1 SPLITTER INPUT CV FEEDBACK 2 Figure 4 15 Heat Cool Configuration Table 4 41 describes the Advanced Splitter prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts 134 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features RANGE LOW RANGE HIGH INPUT FEEDBACK 1 FEEDBACK 2 FEEDBACK 3 OUT 1 IN LO LIM OUT 1 IN HI LIM OUT 1 OUT LO LIM OUT 1 OUT HI LIM OUT 2 IN LO LIM OUT 2 IN HI LIM OUT 2 OUT LO LIM OUT 2 OUT HI LIM OUT 3 IN LO LIM OUT 3 IN HI LIM OUT 3 OUT LO LIM OUT 3 OUT HI LIM 12 00 Table 4 41 Advanced Splitter Prompts Range Selections OFF or number OFF analog parameter number OFF Aon BC LPn BC OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number OFF or number Definition Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits Input source Typically this is the output value OV of a Split Output type of loop Select the back calculation value BC of the analog output
355. t eet eta ena eases 106 Program Alarms iii deiecit oe qeett iHe geo aee cete 144 Program TOtalizers e A e eie d eec e uat t eet 146 Program Profiles Hg gen Sen Ue Uie 148 Program Constants eerte E terere eee e Wise dee Ped oe aes 149 Block c 151 Prosram bDisplays ite tele e e ee reet a eH Eb e teeth re Eta Dose 152 Enable Features ele ree eee eiut em eine ER Pete iD tert iode es 163 Program Security 32 3 0 HEU Rio E Eod dte e pte ed idiota 164 Serial Communications per ele eae edet eee pea 165 SEU CLOCK E EE 166 Load Store Contig eni pede EC ER eed te pet bg 167 Scan Rafe emake 168 select angtiage Ee ege aeo e 169 Data Stora geneei E 170 SETPOINT PROFILER ii cexka ipio aqu qd cuc UR C CU Cua LA SCR Cu an 183 Overview of the Setpoint Profiler leer 183 Components of a profe tuner dE deze edens 186 Parameters that control profile s execution 194 How to set up a profile tdt e ertet ee ie oed os 200 How to load and ru a proliler e aee e eee eee te 208 ONLINE OPERATIONS USING PRIMARY DISPLAYS 219 OV er
356. tact your service provider before attempting any service or repair of this instrument Maintenance Mode is an off line mode for maintaining proper operation of the instrument and setting defaults Enter Maintenance Mode by selecting MAINTENANCE on the SET MODE line of any main menu Remember that this mode is an off line mode Table 8 1 Maintenance Mode Menu Menu as displayed Function SET MODE Changes operating mode of instrument CALIBRATE ANALOG INPUTS Calibrates Analog Inputs CALIBRATE ANALOG OUTPUTS Calibrates Analog Outputs OFF LINE DIAGNOSTICS Runs diagnostic tests to check various instrument functions DATABASE SERVICES Clears the configuration and or calibration from the instrument memory Upgrades software features RESET UNIT Resets instrument to recognize changes to Main Frequency or Scan Frequency PRODUCT INFORMATION Displays product information MAINS FREQUENCY Sets the power supply frequency 50 or 60 Hz WARM START TIME Sets warm start time DEMO Enables simulated input values For demonstration purposes only VPR amp VRX User Manual 255 Maintenance What s in this section 256 The following topics are explained in this section Routine Maintenance 257 Set Mode 257 Calibrate Analog Inputs 257 Calibrate Analog Outputs 258 Off line Diagnostics 259 Database Services 260 Reset Unit 260 Product Information 260 Mai
357. terval Timer Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition PRESET OFF analog parameter Timer counts to zero from this number of minutes number RESET RUN OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Controls the operation of the timer See description above RANGE LOW OFF or number Enter the output s display limits Output is not clamped or flashed when it exceeds these limits RANGE HIGH Preset Value CVn OV 0 CVn OS RESET RUN Time Figure 4 11 Interval Timer 126 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Periodic Timer Generates a discrete output pulse CVn OS which is ON 1 for 1 machine cycle 250ms 500ms 1 sec at specified Start time and repeated at a specified Period thereafter Use this to activate a discrete parameter at a particular time and at regular intervals lt P Period Start Time of first pulse Hours Min Sec Day Hour Min Sec CVn OS pulses ON at Start Time and at every Period Figure 4 12 Periodic Timer Table 4 35 describes the Periodic Timer prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 127 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 35 Range Selections Periodic Timer Prompts Definition SET UP TIMER See Table 4 36 for prompts Selects the timer format Table 4 36 Set Up Timer Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definiti
358. tette leet etg 291 APPENDIX HOW TO APPLY DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION IN SEVERE ELECTRICAL NOISE ENVIRONMENTS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnns 293 Bul OVERVIEW esa eet eh tede t ge ted ERE get Pe teg ut 293 B 2 Potential Noise SOUEFCOS etn idee rette ie e repete eee e 294 B 3 Pr vention Methods x EE cetero HER eo 295 B 4 Recommended Wiring Practices 296 5 Power Source Considerations ciiin eite tbt bete eene Lae a cete eina 298 B 6 Noise Suppression at the Source rennen eren trennen 299 B 7 Ferrite Clamp Installation 303 MULTILANGUAGE SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS viii VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 1 4 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 5 Table 2 6 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 2 9 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 4 17 Table 4 18 Table 4 19 Table 4 20 Table 4 21 Table 4 22 Table 4 23 Table 4 24 Table 4 25 Table 4 26 12 00 Tables Specifications E E
359. the ACTION ACTION ANALOG SELECT HIGH LOW Selects the highest valued input Selects the lowest value input AVG MIDDLE Averages the input values Selects the middle median input value If the number of inputs is even selects the sum of the middle two input values divided by 2 F GOOD ANA SW DIS SW OFF analog parameter number First Good If inputs fail selects the first good input to the function block For example if inputs 1 and 2 fail then input 3 is selected Analog Switch Selects an input equal to the value of the ANALOG SELECT parameter Discrete Switch Selects Input 1 or 2 according to state of DISCRETE SELECT Example if ASEL 3 then Input 3 is selected If ANALOG SELECT lt 1 Input 1 is selected The value of ANALOG SELECT is truncated to a whole number For example if ANALOG SELECT is 3 55 the value is truncated to 3 and Input 3 is selected DISCRETE SELECT 108 OFF discrete parameter 0 1 Selects Input 1 when DISCRETE SELECT is off 0 selects Input 2 when DISCRETE SELECT is ON 1 Inputs 3 8 are unused VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features Compare Compare can be used instead of an Alarm s output to control a relay It can also provide on off control with hysteresis Compares 2 inputs Call the result of this comparison Result Result is a pulse that goes ON 1 when c
360. the BCD prompts See Table 4 2 for additional prompts Table 4 31 BCD Prompts Prompt Range Selections Definition OUT LOW LIMIT OFF or number Displayed output value will be clamped and will flash when these limits are exceeded OUT HIGH LIMIT BIT 0 OFF discrete parameter 0 The binary coded decimal represented by the states of these 1 discretes will be converted into an unsigned integer BIT 7 is through the most significant bit and BIT 0 is the least significant bit BIT 7 ENABLE OFF discrete parameter 0 On the VPR when this discrete transitions from off 0 to 1 on 1 the specified program s profile s will be loaded from internal memory to the Profile function block s See Table 4 32 VPR Example 1 loading a 2 profile program You are programming a 2 programmer instrument According to Table 4 32 a 2 programmer instrument can run 2 profiles at a time and can store in its internal memory up to 6 programs each containing 2 profiles Suppose the BCD bits are programmed as follows Bit 2 1 Bit 1 1 Bit O 0 This sequence of bits equals the number 6 and is the value of CVn OV When the Enable discrete is triggered ON 1 the profiles in Program 6 will be loaded from internal memory into the function blocks for Profile 1 and Profile 2 where they can be edited or run VPR Example 2 loading a 4 profile program You are programming a 4 programmer instrument According to Table 4 32 a 4 programmer i
361. the occurrence and clearing of all alarms e If so configured the alarm occurrence will also be logged on a summary list stored on floppy disk see Data Storage section 4 26 e If so configured the alarm triggers a discrete output relay The relay returns to normal state only when the alarm is cleared Acknowledging alarms When an alarm occurs it must be acknowledged by the operator to stop its indicator from flashing Acknowledging an alarm does not clear the alarm See Table 7 6 for procedure Table 7 6 Alarm Acknowledgment Procedure Step Action 1 Select ACCESS SUMMARIES from online menu Select DISPLAY ALARM SUMMARY to display a list of active alarms Up to 4 pages 12 alarms can be listed Unacknowledged alarms will be flashing Display Alarm Summary can also be accessed by pressing the Display button if the Alarm Summary display was assigned to that button See Section 4 18 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button and a cursor will appear on the display Use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow button to position the cursor on a flashing alarm and press Enter to acknowledge the alarm The flashing will stop and the cursor will disappear If you do not press any button for a period of 5 seconds the cursor will disappear This is a safety feature because while the cursor is visible on the display the display is temporarily disabled and a new alarm will not be shown 4 If there are more flashing alarms press the Up Arrow
362. the oil is done by an electric heating element driven by a 4 to 20 mA controlled SCR and external power source In this application the instrument controls the temperature of the chemical reaction chamber through control of the heat emitted by the jacket tank oil The instrument must provide a single 4 to 20 mA control output to govern the voltage switched by the SCR and hence the heat applied to the entire system Temperature is monitored with thermocouples The function block diagram of the required instrument configuration is featured in Figure 3 26 Note that this diagram illustrates the classic cascade arrangement of two control loops that defines the cascade control strategy The first control loop LP1 is designated as the primary cascade loop by the notation CAS P The notation CAS S indicates LP2 s designation as the secondary cascade loop Note how both control loops are joined together In addition to the back calculated feedback path set up between the two LP2 BC LP1 s output is connected to an input on LP2 that at this time must be introduced Denoted as SP2 this input is LP2 s remote set point input 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 67 Programming and Operating Concepts 68 LP2 BC AO1 BC REACTION OV FB VESSEL All PV LP1 OV FB THERMOCOUPLE Po 4 TO 20 mA gt CAS P 5 1 12345 CAS_S Al2 OV Al2 OIL THERMOCOUPLE NOTE 1 SP1 is
363. the specified limits a ferroresonant transformer for voltage resolution should be used Independent AC source For protection against noise the AC source for the digital electronic equipment should be independent of all other loads especially when switching loads are involved For example it should not provide power for air conditioning convenience outlets lighting motors or similar noise generating devices To obtain e see Figure Appendix B 1 a separate transformer is required to supply power to the digital equipment For additional noise and transient rejection shielded primary and secondary windings may be required And if necessary power line filters may be added to attenuate noise signals that have a higher frequency than the power line frequency Transformer for digital equipment 298 Figure Appendix B 1 is an illustration of a separate transformer required to supply power to digital equipment Power source To digital 120 240 Vac electronic single phase equipment N 20779 Figure Appendix B 1 Transformer for Digital Equipment VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 B 6 Noise Suppression at the Source Introduction Generally speaking when good wiring practices are used with well designed digital electronic equipment no further noise protection is necessary However in some severe electrical environments the magnitude of the electrical noise is so great that it must
364. the value of the profile If the difference between either PV and the profile value exceeds specified amounts the profiler will Hold soak if enabled to do so Number of segments Up to 63 segments may be in a profile Time Units All segments use the same time base seconds minutes or hours 4 types of ramp segments There are four ramp types selectable at the RAMP TYPE prompt 1 Value Duration 2 Time 3 Rate 4 External 186 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler 12 00 Value Duration Val Dur Ramp Type This is the only ramp type that allows consecutive ramps or soaks VALUE is the beginning value of the segment TIME is the time needed to reach the VALUE of the next segment Ramp Type Value Duration Albws consecutive ramps or soaks First segment can be a ramp or soak Time time to reach next segment Value Time duration of soak Value beginning value of current segment Value value of soak Segments 4 amp 5 Value Segment 3 Value Segments 1 amp 2 Value Segment 41 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4 Segment 5 Time Time Time Time Time Figure 5 3 Value Duration Ramp Type To properly terminate a Val Dur profile you must program the segment beyond the last segment with the following 1 The value you want the program to end with Looking at Figure 5 3 the last segment is a soak thus the Value of segment 6 should be set to the same value used in segme
365. tics continued Characteristic What to be aware of Split output programming requirements A splitter output type Standard or Advanced calculated value is used to send the Split loop output to 2 or 3 different analog output AO functions In this case program the control loop to receive a feedback from the back calculation output of the splitter calculated value In other words loop Feedback CVn BC where CVn is a Splitter type calculated value and BC is its output Program the splitter calculated value to accept the back calculation values BC of each analog output function block AO as its feedback source In other words CVn FB AOn BC Cascade primary loop Miscellaneous loop characteristics Programming Procedure Be sure to scale the cascade primary loop s output limits to match the process variable range of the secondary control loop Note Output scaling is only available on the cascade primary type of control loop The primary loop feedback should be connected to the back calculation value of the secondary control loop Other parameters affecting loops are latching and reset limit These are described in the loop prompt table To program Control Loops select PROGRAM CONTROL LOOPS in the Main Program Menu Select a loop to program Table 4 9 illustrates the menu selections for the various loop types See Table 4 10 for an alphabetical listing of these parameters descriptions Enter
366. tion Re program X Enough Generator and if X does not increase by at least 0 00001 Y Axis Not Increased Appears if Al is custom type or CV is Function Re program Y Enough Generator and if Y does not change by at least 0 00001 280 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Parts 11 Parts All replacement parts for the instrument are consolidated into the replacement parts kits shown in the list that follows The parts comprising each kit are pictured in the referenced figures To obtain a particular replacement part order the appropriate Kit Part Number Parts apply to all products unless otherwise noted Table 11 1 Parts Kit Part Number Kit Description See 51197787 501 Case Assembly Replacement Kit Kit 1 in Figures 11 2 11 7 11 8 Rear Terminal Block Kit Kit 43 in Figures 11 2 11 7 11 8 51404680 501 VRX VPR100 Video Display Replacement Kit 51404685 501 Portable Case Replacement Parts Kit 2 in Figure 11 3 Kit 4 in Figure 11 2 51197973 501 51404909 501 VRX150 Video Display Replacement Kit Figure 11 5 51404790 501 MM CPU Board Replacement Kit 7 in Figure 11 6 l 51404790 502 VRX150 CPU Board Replacement kit Kit 7 in Figure 11 6 51197804 501 2 Point Analog Input Module Kit 8 in Figure 11 9 51404568 501 6 Point Analog Input Board Replacement Kit Position 4 in Figure 11 6 51404537 501 12 Point Analog Input Board R
367. tioning of the instrument Functions include calibration off line diagnostic testing and various setups for operation In Maintenance Mode all inputs and outputs are frozen 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 31 Programming and Operating Concepts 3 4 Menu Navigation Moving between the Program Online and Maintenance modes of the instrument is done with the Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow and Enter keys located on the front bezel Refer to Figure 3 1 Honeywell FURNACE 2 34 07 SEG 2 5 Holdf Reset Left Down Arrow Arrow Display 1 Up Arrow Auto Manual Tab Figure 3 1 VPR100 s Front Bezel Buttons Honeywell V Honeywell NBN DEG Display 1 Display 1 Auto Manual Tab Display 2 Tab Figure 3 2 VRX100 s Front Bezel Buttons With Control Figure 3 3 VRX100 s Front Bezel Buttons Without Control 32 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts Left Arrow Tab F2 F1 Honeywell VALUE1 1145 Display Display 1 Auto Manual with no Control option this functions as Display 2 Menu Up Arrow Down Arrow Enter Figure 3 4 VRX150 Front Bezel Buttons A more detailed
368. tions Definition STORE CONFIG TO FILEO1 CYCLEO 1 Specify a filename and number 01 99 for the configuration DISK DRYERO1 PRODO1 Press Enter to store the configuration RECORD01 TANKO1 UNITO1 LOOP01 REACTRO1 CONFIGO1 KILNO1 VESSELO1 CALIBO 1 WCHEM01 PRESSO1 FURNCE01 DEMINO1 CONTRLO1 BATCHO1 FERMTRO1 LEHRO1 LINEO1 STRLZRO1 OVENO1 ZONE01 STORE CALIB TO Same choices as STORE Specify a filename and number 01 99 for the calibration DISK CONFIG TO DISK Press Enter to store the calibration LOAD CONFIG Select a configuration First you must clear the instrument s configuration memory FROM DISK filename Press Enter to clear or Menu to abort and exit the menu Once the memory is clear select a filename from the floppy disk Press Enter to load the configuration into the instrument LOAD CALIB FROM Select a calibration file Select a calibration file and press Enter to load DISK ATTENTION Only function blocks that have been programmed are loaded to the instrument Function blocks in the receiving instrument are not replaced unless the incoming function blocks are programmed differently For example if the instrument has Al1 and Al2 programmed and the configuration being loaded from the floppy contains only then Al1 and AI2 are undisturbed on the instrument and AIS3 is added If the configuration being loaded contains a different Al2 and a new AIS then Al1 is undisturbed Al2 is replaced by the different Al2 and Al3 is added
369. tiple profilers simultaneously The figure below shows how to configure your instrument to hold all profilers when one or more profilers enters the Hold state because of a guaranteed soak Also shown is how to configure it to hold or start all profilers by pressing the F2 HOLD key Note that any profiler can still be put in Hold through the popup profile menu Table 5 14 page 214 doing so will not Hold the other profilers HOLD Profiler SP1 SG HOLD Profilert2 Set all CVx OS SP2 SG Profilers HOLD pl ies 8 LEVEL EDGE rotiler zm rece SP3 SG to LEVEL SP4 SG gt HOLD Profiler 4 Calc Value Logic TOGGLE FF SY1 F2 INPUT CVy OS To hold or start all profiles by pressing F2 Hold key program a Logic TOGGLE FF CV as shown and input it to the Logic OR CV Figure 5 10 Holding multiple profilers simulaneously 194 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Setpoint Profiler Discrete inputs You can program a profiler with discrete inputs that enable you to reset start hold advance shut down or fast forward through the profiler hot start the profiler from a live process variable increment a ramp segment or enable disable guaranteed soak See Table 5 2 Note that some discretes are edge sensitive and some are level sensitive Edge sensitive means that the action is triggered by the discrete s transitio
370. to 12 TC EMF and Pyrometer only _Universal types are EMF mV V mA via shunt Thermocouple RTD and Pyrometer All Types Resolution 15 bits 14 bits plus sign Scan Rate 250 msec for 2 inputs and 2 control loops and 2 Profilers and 12 Calc Values 500 msec for 8 inputs and 4 control loops and 4 Profilers and 32 Calc Values 1 sec for 12 inputs and 4 control loops and 4 Profilers and 32 Calc Values Isolation Fully isolated Normal Mode Rejection 60 dB 1 000 1 Mode Rejection 120 dB 1 000 000 1 100 ohm source Normal Mode Voltage Limit RMS equal to high span limit mains line frequency Input Impedance gt 20 megaohms 1 megaohms when using the following ranges 0 10V 10V 0 20V 20V Accuracy See Table 1 2 and Table 1 3 Temperature Effects See Table 1 3 Ranges Assigned per point based on range table See Table 1 2 and Table 1 3 TC EMF RTD Source Resistance Error 0 3 microvolts per 100 ohms Reference Junction Error TC only 0 3 C 0 5 F Open Input Check Bleeder type upscale downscale off Excitation Current 0 15 mA Switching Common lead Maximum Lead Resistance 5 ohms 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 7 Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Analog Outputs Number Up to 4 current outputs Additional time prop Outputs DAT available Total maximum of 8 analog outputs Type Current o
371. to on and on to off to be stored Default capacity is 100 Shown only if alarms were set up as part of the schedule EVENT SAMPLES 0 1600 Select maximum number of samples of events to be stored Default capacity is 100 Shown only if events were set up as part of the schedule DIAG SAMPLES 0 1600 Select maximum number of samples of diagnostics to be stored Default capacity is 100 Shown only if diagnostics were set up as part of the schedule ATTENTION Alarm Events Diagnostics and Unit Data storage mode is defaulted to OFF Each storage mode must be enabled for storage 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 177 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 75 Capacity of 1 44 Megabyte Floppy Disk Disk Storage Capacity Number of Total Rate Of Storage To All Trend Files Trend Files Number Of Estimated Disk Capacity Pc So CS My 5 10 5 10 30 1 sec sec sec sec min min min min hour 2 19 6 hrs 4days 81days 245days 1 6mos 81 mos 13yrs 40 yrs 80ysts 1 4 ti7hs 24days 49days 147days 294days 49mos 98mos 24ys 48ys 6 86hrs 1 8 36days 108days 21 6days 36mos 72mos 1 7 3 5 yrs 2 i4ihrs 29days 58days 176days 353days 58mos 117mos 29 58 2 6 73hrs 15days 30days 92days 184days 30mos 6 1 mos 15ys 30yrs 51hr 1 0day 21days 63days 127days 21mos
372. to the READY state for one machine cycle clearing the profiler s discrete outputs before proceeding to the RUN state The elapsed time of the profiler will continue due to re cycling For a multi phase profile the profiler must progress to the END state following segment BATCH LAST SEGMENT before cycling back to the BATCH FIRST SEGMENT Once the profiler is ENDed the automatic cycling function will change the profiler to the RUN state The elapsed time of the profiler will continue running during recycling 0 the profile or batch will repeat forever 1 254 the profile or batch will repeat this many times EDIT PROFILE LOOPS LOOP 1 4 FROM SEGMENT 1 63 TO SEGMENT 1 63 REPEAT COUNT 1 999 Define up to 4 loops per profile Note that the repeat count is the number of loop repetitions not the number of loop executions See Loop Segments on page 193 for details JUMP FROM SEGMENT JUMP TO SEGMENT 12 00 0 63 0 63 The profile can be forced to jump from any segment to any other segment A jump within a loop will continue that loop A jump outside a loop will exhaust that loop A jump outside the batch phase will exhaust any auto cycling in effect At the completion of this segment the profiler will jump to the beginning of JUMP TO SEGMENT At the completion of JUMP FROM SEGMENT the profiler will jump to the beginning of this segment VPR amp VRX User Manual 205
373. tom angle bracket to the aluminum case using 4 M4 Hex Head screws amp lockwashers Torque M4 screws to 7 in Ib After unit is installed check to see that unit is held firmly in place If not place a 0 80mny 031 thick shim between the gasket amp panel For panels thickness that are between 3 18mm 125 amp 6 18 mm 250 shim as required VPR amp VRX User Manual 17 Installation gt lt 1 52 12 7 06 500 144 138 5 67 lt Panel x 5 43 Rear of box Mounting Bar slots 144 top amp bottom Panel Panel 138 5 67 L Cutout gt Cutout 5 43 zy eA eo xor Se 4 0 28 4 gt 60 A 2 37 Front bezel dimensions gt 4 42 81 69 s Panel Spacing for adjacent Cutout mounting a 337 4 13 28 gt 294 6 11 60 gt 304 8 12 00 Min NOTE Dimensions in mm inches gt lt q 7 6mm 0 300 NEMA 3 requires Panel Gasket Mounting Bar between unit and panel Notched end of bar Su towards thin panel EN A I y uo Thin panel mounting install bottom bar the same way _ NN Y Notched end of bar away from thick panel Thick panel mounting install bottom bar the same way Gasket between 4 bracket and panel Angle brackets attached with hex head screws and VRX100 Seismic mounting lock washers
374. tored along with the data The batch number may be used for data retrieval and analysis using SDA data analysis software ON COMMAND storage collects a single sample of data whenever the EXTERNAL ENABLE discrete makes an off to on transition If this mode is used then SET UP SCHEDULE is ignored Copies the data point list already set up for a currently active Unit Data display Enter up to 12 points Select ON to continue gathering and storing trend data after the Unit data file becomes full The new data will replace the oldest data on the disk as it is collected No warning will be given Select OFF to stop trend storage when trend space becomes full A DISK FULL message will then appear Data is buffered until a new disk is inserted and initialized EXTERNAL ENABLE OFF discrete parameter 0 1 This discrete parameter will allow Unit data storage when ON 1 and will stop Unit data storage when OFF 0 This enable is independent of the storage mode it does not control batch start stop 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 175 Programming Function Blocks and Features Table 4 73 Unit Data Prompts continued SET UP SCHEDULE START HOUR If no external enable is specified select a starting date and time and an interval for periodic storage Set Interval START MINUTE Days to 31 if you want the timed schedule to repeat on START MONTH the same day each month START DAY This timer schedule will run
375. ts BLOCK TYPE Al AO AL CN CV DI Select the function block type to be copied DO LP TL SP Al Analog Input AO Analog Output AL Alarm CN Constant CV Calculated Value DI Discrete Input DO Discrete Output LP Control Loop SP Setpoint Profile TL Totalizer FROM CHANNEL NUMBER Enter the channel number to be copied TO CHANNEL NUMBER ALL Enter a channel to copy to Select ALL to copy from FROM CHANNEL to each channel greater than FROM CHANNEL COPY BLOCK Select this to do the copy A verification prompt lets you continue or abort the copy 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 151 Programming Function Blocks and Features 4 18 Program Displays You can configure up to 10 primary displays using one or more display formats shown in Figure 4 19 The VRX150 also has the displays shown in Figure 4 20 and assign them to appear in specified order when the Display button is pressed For VRX150 without control the Auto Manual key functions as a Display 2 key that is it accesses the second of the 10 displays
376. ttons continued 152 VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming Function Blocks and Features paces ALARM SUMMARY DATA STORAGE STATUS _ TOTALZERS s LOOP 1 e PROCESS 1 HIGH EMAINING DD HH MM TOTLZR1 123456789 q TEMP 7 CURR 1234 56 REND 1 HI O2 10 15 Y TOTLZR2 123456789 ale 1 011259 Da SE REND 3 ROLL Y TOTLZR3 123456789 EU12 1 AUTO E LARM SAMPLES 20 Y KR PROCESS 1 LOW J TEMP 8 CURR 2345 54 VENT SAMPLES 25 N 01 12 59 04 12 97 IAG SAMPLES ROLL Y 4 Pv 2205 00 ME HAATE DATA SAMP 50 N 4 TEMP 9 CURR 1234 56 MU Yt da YES SP 2000 00 01 12 59 04 12 97 NABLE STORAGE ENABLE A D DISK FULL A 1 HIGH A D DISK FULL OUT 83 596 Alarm Summary Storage Status Totalizer Loop with Bar Graph ALARMSUM STORAGE TOTALIZR LOOP BAR LP1 LP2 LP1 LP2 LP3 LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 SP1 SP2 1000 00 1500 00 1000 00 1500 00 1200 00 1000 00 1500 00 1200 00 2400 00 00 00 1500 00 J 4 0 00 2 0 00 loo lo loo 2500 Joor Jo Loo seas PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 PV 405 00 PV 1054 00 PV 623 00 405 00 1054 00 623 00 1266
377. tuator s position this 4 to 20 mA signal will regulate the gas flow to the furnace zone burner and thereby allow the instrument to control the heat levels measured in the zone TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 RANGE HIGH 1000 TYPE STANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT SP1 IN LOW Li 0 GAIN 0 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 RATE 0 OUT LOW LIMIT OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 19 Interconnections Between Function Blocks VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts 6 Draw the Feedback connection 12 00 To fully complete the function block diagram one final and very important interconnection must be drawn In setting up control loops in this instrument a feedback path must be specified between the loop function block itself and the hardware element that externalizes the loop s output to the real world That is the control loop block needs confirmation from the analog output block connected to it that the percent output levels it calls for have been correctly translated into accurate output signals The feedback path that provides LP1 with this confirmation is established by means of program settings depicted in Figure 3 20 AO1 BC TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE 4 TO 20 mA INPUT TYPE J RANGE LOW 0 a AN a eU ANDARD OUTPUT TYPE CAT BAN TC IN LOW LIMIT 0 RESET 10 IN HIGH LIMIT 100 RATE 0 QUT LOW LIMIT 4 OUT HIGH LIMIT 20 Figure 3 20 Complete
378. tures Diagnostics Data storage for Diagnostics is a complete log of all diagnostic messages It includes the diagnostic code or identifier message and its time and date of occurrence Setup is done with the following parameters STORAGE MODE ROLLOVER EXTERNAL ENABLE SELECT FILENAME DIAG SAMPLES See Table 4 71 and Table 4 74 for descriptions Depending on your selections data collection will begin when the first diagnostic occurs or when the first diagnostic occurs after a batch start occurs When calibration is executed the record is time stamped and stored to the diagnostic file Unit Data Values for up to 12 points analog input calculated value discrete input discrete output totalizer etc can be sampled at user definable intervals and stored on disk The sample interval must be set by a schedule or triggered by a discrete event Prompts are described in Table 4 73 Table 4 73 Unit Data Prompts Prompt STORAGE MODE COPY DISPLAY SETUP ASSIGN POINTS ROLLOVER Range Selections OFF CONTIN BATCH or ON COMMAND OFF or analog parameter or discrete parameter ON OFF Definition Continuous storage becomes active immediately upon initialization Batch storage is controlled by a discrete parameter see BATCH CONTROL page 179 or by start stop batch menu item Batch data may be started and stopped several times in a single file until the file is full Batch start increments a batch number that is s
379. upstream to downstream In some cases like with a control loop s feedback this analogy is not true because the information is flowing in a circle but it is a helpful way to view how function blocks are generally interconnected For example the Analog Input function block is typically upstream of the Control Loop function which is typically upstream of the Analog Output function block Of course if two function blocks are not directly or indirectly connected there is no flow between the two Just remember that every function block has input does a set of operations and produces an output When several function blocks are linked together there is a flow of information VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Programming and Operating Concepts VRX100 Table 3 4 Function Block Types Function block Type VRX150 VPR100 Purpose name Maximum Maximum Maximum available available available Alarm AL 16 16 16 Causes alarms under specified conditions Analog Input Al 12 12 12 Interfaces with measuring input hardware thermocouple RTD mA volts Analog Output AO 8 8 8 Interfaces with analog output hardware current output CAT or voltage output VAT or with output relay hardware time proportion DAT Position Proportion POS PROP Up to 3 current voltage outputs Calculated Value 32 32 32 Performs various calculations on specified parameters Constant 16 16 16 Outputs a
380. uration Ramp Ramp rate is based on the start value of the ramp and the time specified to reach the next soak start value 0 9 999 999 hours minutes or seconds VPR amp VRX User Manual 12 00 Introduction Table 1 1 Specifications continued Setpoint Program Capability continued Soak Guaranteed or non guaranteed Can be applied to ramp or soak segment or across entire profile program Soak time range Program Cycling Startup Shutdown 0 9 999 999 hours minutes or seconds Entire programs or portions of a program can be cycled up to 99 times Loops can be nested up to 4 deep Can be set up to use a predefined startup profile separate from the normal processing programs Shutdown profile can be attached to the end of a profile and can be jumped to for emergency shutdown PV Hot Start Profile Events Batch Programming Can start the profile at the point where the present PV value first intersects the profile 1 to 255 Batch numbers Batch number is assigned by the programmer and is incremented automatically when batch is started Using a keyboard or bar code reader and the front keyboard connector a batch can be labeled with a name of up to 8 characters Up to 16 events can be defined in each segment of a profile Each event s state is activated at the beginning of the segment and is held throughout the segment Analog Inputs Number _Input Types Up to 6 universal up
381. ure 5 3 Value Duration Ramp Ra gea pete gets cuaks tacos Sedans eco eI cites 187 Figure 5 4 Time Ramp Type ooo Getreide uet eI 188 Figure 5 5 Rate Ramp Type z eee redet diee edt eee 189 Figure 5 6 External Ramp Types neuter te peine pte OE RE HERD ERR ERE RR 190 Figure 5 7 Guaranteed Soak and Hysteresis sese 191 Figure 5 8 Activating Events In Mid Segment essere ener nene tentent entren neret enne ens 192 Figure 5 9 Example Of A Segment Loop essere nenne enne tenete 193 Figure 5 10 Holding multiple profilers simulaneously essere ene nennen nere 194 Figure 5 1 Hot Start sue oett eile tiun E E Ug ecc he S RE HU D GE s 197 Figure 5 12 Fast Forward coe Ie ole eI Ge ate ee a t REUS 198 Figure 5 13 Shutdown hte eee wt eee et we ee Rote eae aie 199 Figure 5 14 Allowable and Non Allowable Program Storage sese 203 Figure 5 15 VPR Buttons erepti dle ad repre ee e pepe e tee e nets 208 Figure 6 1 Setpoint Profile Summary Displays esses eene nennen treten tren nein enne ens 221 Figure 6 2 Setpoint Trend Display With Menu sssesseeseeeeeeneenneeneeenen nenne nennen trennen entren tese enne 221 Figure 6 3 Horizontal and Vertical Trend 222 Figure 6 4 Vertical Trend at 2X siste de
382. urrent memory RAM REPLAY means that the data are retrieved from floppy disk data storage Analog Input Value Adjust Located to the right of the data point value This message appears only on the Al Value Adjust display It indicates that a bias has been manually applied to the value of the particular data point The symbol will disappear when the value is set to OFF x Red Low Alarm Setpoint Located above vertical trends right of horizontal trends along side of bar graph These symbols appear automatically if a displayed point is the input to one or more Alarm function blocks The first 4 low type alarm blocks using the displayed points are represented by these symbols i y Red High Alarm Setpoint Located above vertical trends right of horizontal trends or along side of bar graph These symbols appear automatically if a displayed point is the input to one or more Alarm function blocks The first 4 high type alarm blocks using the displayed points are represented by these symbols kkkk kk Flashing between Sameas Bad Input Values Appears in place of the value on all displays and value data point Value is outside the programmed limits Caused by an upstream Al failure Al is open circuit and failsafe or is type linear and outside its programmed range by 10 or more Questionable Input Values Appears in place of the value on all Flashing between value Same as displays Value is clamped at its limit
383. ust tuning parameters and then look at the trend to see the effects it is recommended you select Tune Loop through the Online menu not through a loop display 297 LP1 1987 AUTO SP1 200 00 Figure 7 2 Control Loop Tuning Display 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 249 Online Operation Using Menus Pretune Loop Pretune calculates optimum values for a loop s Proportional Band Gain Reset and Rate by analyzing the reaction of the loop to a step change in setpoint or output After these new tuning values have been calculated you have the option of applying installing or not applying them to a preselected tune set of the loop You can pretune a loop while another loop is pretuning To use pretune your process time constant must be at least 60 seconds The process time constant is defined as the time needed for the PV to change by 63 of a step change in the setpoint For example if the setpoint changes instantaneously by 100 degrees the time constant is the amount of time needed for the PV to change 63 degrees To pretune a loop select PRETUNE from the TUNE LOOP online menu Select a loop to tune Pretune occurs in 4 stages as indicated by the status Each status has its own menu Table 7 10 shows the stages of pretune Table 7 10 Stages Of Pretune Order Status Meaning 1 STOPPED Pretuning not operating waiting to be started by operator See STOPPED menu 2
384. ut menu select ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Consult the Program Analog Output section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely INPUT SOURCE 3 Press Down Arrow button to move the cursor to the menu choice INPUT SOURCE Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for INPUT SOURCE are 5 Press Up Arrow until PARM is displayed If you press too many times and a number is displayed continue pressing Up Arrow until PARM is displayed again If you press Down Arrow while the number is displayed the instrument assumes you want to enter a number not a parameter If you pressed Down Arrow you must press Menu then press Enter then Up Arrow until PARM is displayed 6 Press Enter to select PARM which gives you choices for output codes to connect to Figure 3 13 shows the format for all output codes 7 Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until LP is displayed From Table 3 5 we know LP is the designator for the Control Loop function block type 8 Press Enter to select LP 9 Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until 2 the Control Loop number we want is displayed 10 Press Enter to select 2 11 Press Up Arrow or Down Arrow until OV is displayed From Table 3 5 we know OV is the output code for the Control Loop s output value 12 Press Enter to select OV The cursor moves to the left and the connection from LP2 OV to Analog Output 1 s INPUT SOURCE has been ma
385. utput CAT Voltage output VAT customer selectable with internal switch CAT Current Adjusting Type VAT Voltage Adjusting Type DAT Duration Adjusting Type Time Proportion output DAT Position Proportional PP Direction Impulse Adjusting Type DIAT Current Selectable from 0 to 20 mA Maximum Load 800 ohms maximum per CAT output Isolation Isolated 30 Vdc peak input to ground Resolution 12 bits 0 025 95 Voltage Selectable between 0 and 5 Volts Minimum Load 1000 ohms Isolation Isolated 30 Vdc peak input to ground Resolution 12 bits 0 025 95 Uses any discrete output relay or open collector output Impulse Time 2 1 Resolution 4 0 msec Minimum Off Time Off gt 0 Minimum On Time Off gt 0 Pos Prop Position Proportional Type Up to 4 available 4 Position Proportional outputs requires use of open collector outputs each output requires use of dedicated analog input Slidewire resistance 100 ohms to 1000 ohms Drive unit speeds 10 seconds to 220 seconds DIAT Direction Impulse Adjusting Type Combinations available Inputs Relay Outputs 3 maximum using instrument s discrete output hardware 4 DIAT outputs requires use of external relays Drive unit speeds 10 seconds to 220 seconds Transmitter Power Supply Standard Output 24 Vdc 90 mA max Discrete Inputs Outputs 3 015 4 DOs Relay Outputs 6 DOs Relay Outputs 8 015 8 DOs Open Col
386. vailable by programming a constant s Destination with RS See Program Constants Section 4 16 A value of OFF may be entered to allow proportional only control When turned off the manual reset value determines the loop output at setpoint Bumpless manual to automatic transfer is canceled when proportional only control is selected RATE 1 0 02 10 00 minutes Modifies the loop output based on the rate of change of the process variable The output is modified by a value that assumes the rate of change of the process variable will continue for the time period specified Enter a starting value or OFF at the time of configuration The value may be altered Online for final loop tuning For loops with dual tuning Rate 1 is the rate for the first set of tuning parameters Rate 2 is for the second set Variable Rate1 is available by programming a constant s Destination with RT Program Constants Section 4 16 PROP BAND 2 RESET 2 See GAIN 1 See RESET 1 RATE 2 MANUAL RESET 100 to 100 See RATE 1 This feature functions only when OFF is configured for the loop s RESET parameter Enter a value equal to the desired loop output when the process variable is at setpoint This allows correction of output to account for load changes to bring the process variable up to setpoint SUPPRESS OVERSHOOT PRETUNE SET TIMEBASE 248 YES NO HR 2 HR 4 HR 5 MIN 15 MIN 30 MIN 1 This
387. will be stored to the instrument s memory buffer Upon completing initialization via the USE CURRENT SCHEDULES prompt all buffered data will be written to the new disk and data storage will resume with no lapses of storage between disks During initialization the disk s surface is scanned for bad clusters to ensure its integrity If any cluster is determined to be bad the disk will be rejected and the initialization will fail Disk initialization also allocates sections of the disk to each of the files you have elected to store per the SET UP NEW SCHEDULES menu Once the instrument completes initializing the disk process and diagnostic data recording begins immediately indicated by yellow colored letter S in the lower right hand corner of the instrument screen Data Storage Status The prompt DATA STORAGE STATUS accessed from the Online DATA STORAGE menu displays a calculation of how long a particular floppy disk will last based on the configured data storage schedule Disk capacity is indicated in days hours and minutes remaining on the disk After the instrument has been Online and actively performing Data Storage to floppy a warning message will appear when the disk reaches the default 90 capacity or a user specified capacity Once a disk has reached its programmed capacity a DISK FULL message will be displayed Process and Diagnostic Data Integrity The instrument is equipped with several features to ensure data integrity
388. will not calculate a Rate Suppress Overshoot Set to OFF Pretune may detect changes to the working setpoint and abort Turn this setting back on after pretune is complete After Starting Pretune After starting the pretune do not change adjust the loop mode loop output loop setpoint or operating mode If you do the pretune will abort See Pretune Abort Messages later in this section Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING menus During IDENTIFYING and CALCULATING status a TUNE indicator appears on all primary displays not on menus for the loop being pretuned Table 7 12 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING Prompts Prompt Definition STATUS Status Identifying or Calculating This is a read only prompt PV Current process variable value of the loop being tuned This is a read only prompt Current output value of the loop being tuned This is a read OUTPUT only prompt 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 251 Online Operation Using Menus Table 7 12 Pretune IDENTIFYING amp CALCULATING Prompts continued Prompt Definition SETPOINT Current working set point value of the loop being tuned This is a read only prompt RUN TIME Elapsed time since pretune was started This is a read only prompt ABORT Select to cancel identifying and calculating and return to the stopped status Pretune COMPLETE menu Table 7 13 describes the Pretune COMPLETE prompts Table 7 13 Pr
389. with a discrete parameter amp profiler is in Ready or Hold Segment or End 1 Falling START is not Profiler RESET RUN does not affect a running edge programmed goes to program May be connected to the RESET F3 with a discrete Segment key SY1F3 parameter amp 1 and profiler is at starts to End Run Profiler changes to Ready and goes to If the START discrete input parameter is not programmed with a discrete then switching RESET RUN from OFF to ON resets an Ended Hold or Ready program to the starting value of segment 1 and to the profiles Ready state On a transition from ON to OFF starts an Ended profiler 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 195 Setpoint Profiler Table 5 2 Parameters That Control Profiler Execution continued Parameter name Definition Triggered Conditions by present HOLD HOLD ADVANCE HOT START Profiler is in Run or Hold Holds a profiler at its current position Level ON Profiler s Elapsed Time continues but or Rising Segment Time stops until Profiler is started Edge again depends on setting of profile s To hold profile by pressing HOLD F2 key HOLD LEVEL 1 Set HOLD to SY1F2 EDGE 2 Set HOLD LEVEL EDGE to EDGE prompt To hold or start multiple profiles simultaneously see Holding multiple profilers simultaneously Hold is activated by online operator menu or by a discrete input s level ON or rising edge Level ON P
390. with their function block diagrams The first example is a simple control arrangement in great detail to help you understand function block diagram basics followed by more sophisticated examples Once you understand how to diagram function blocks you will be able to draw a diagram for virtually any control strategy regardless of complexity Understanding the relationship between such diagrams and the instrument s programming menus is key to successfully mastering the instrument s many capabilities and features Programming a Current Driven Heat Treat Element An example of one of the most common and simple control strategies is in Figure 3 15 below INSTRUMENT TYPE J THERMOCOUPLE VALVE FURNACE ZONE ACTUATOR 4 TO 20 mA CAT GAS SUPPLY BURNER Figure 3 15 Control Of Furnace Zone Temperature With 4 20 mA CAT Control Signal 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 59 Programming and Operating Concepts 1 Diagram the function blocks To configure this application using the instrument your task is to build up a simple current control loop Note that this control loop must monitor and control the temperature of the furnace zone to a local set point of 500 F Using a 4 to 20 mA signal applied to a gas valve actuator the furnace zone s temperature will be controlled by regulating the flow of gas to the zone s burner The instrument will measure temperature in a range between 0 and 1000 F by means of a Type J thermocou
391. ws access to a 1 44MB or optional 120MB or Zip disk drive A sliding front door allows access to a connector for a QWERTY keyboard or barcode reader for easy labeling of parameters Twelve panel keys control all functions of the instrument including configuration The instrument will accept thermocouple RTD pyrometer milliamp millivolt and volt inputs Up to eight analog outputs are available for retransmission or control of which up to four are current adjusting or voltage adjusting Data can be directed to various display formats stored on disk or read from an optional serial communications link Analog and discrete data can be displayed in trend or tabular format Viewed data can be either live real time inputs or historical retrieved from disk Flexible modular design and several options make this instrument adaptable to nearly any industrial application Honeywell VALUE1 DEGF 1145 500 00 L 1500 00 ALARM 1 HIGH Figure 1 4 VRX 150 Video Recorder 12 00 VPR amp VRX User Manual 3 Introduction 1 5 Unpacking Examine the shipping container carefully If there are visible signs of damage notify the carrier and Honeywell immediately If there is no visible damage compare the contents with the packing list Notify Honeywell if there is equipment shortage To obtain proper credit and to avoid delays return goods
392. x 12 points max each Unit Data 1 up to 12 points 10 000 records Trend amp Unit Data combined point capacity 30 VPR VRX100 48 VRX150 Alarm History Up to 1600 records Event History Up to 1600 records Diagnostic History Up to 1600 records Setpoint Programs 224 maximum on 3 5 floppy disk Programs must be stored on a separate disk from Data Trend Storage information Storage Rate Range 0 25 to 3600 sec Capacity Automatically calculates storage time based on storage rate Control Loops Number Up to 4 Type PID On Off Cascade Split Output Ratio DIAT Ramping Capability Auto Tune Each loop can be pre tuned automatically to establish acceptable tuning parameters On line fuzzy overshoot suppression Setpoint Program Capability Number of Memory can store 96 programs for a single channel programmer 48 programs for a dual Programs channel programmer 32 programs for a three channel programmer and 24 for a four channel programmer Programs can also be stored to floppy disk Programmer has ability to start a program at a predetermined time Number of 63 segments per profile Segments Ramp X Ramp rate is set by specifying x degrees per second per minute or per hour Ramp T Ramp rate is set by selecting the time to go from previous setpoint to next setpoint in t time Ramp Time Range Ramp E Ramp rate is set to increment by ASP for every pulse of a digital input Value D
393. y or for Output 1 amp 3 A1 amp only or for Output 3 A3 only Re program output limits for Outputs 1 2 amp 3 Bad algorithm code has been given bad algorithm choice Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Re program input limits for Output 1 only Outputs 1 amp 2 or Outputs 1 Program function with at least the minimum number of parameters Output 1 only Outputs 1 amp 2 or Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing Verify programming of affected the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing Verify programming of affected the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file function block Invalid channel has been found Verify programming of affected function block Free form math equation is invalid Check equation Invalid Function Block Request Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Invalid Index code Probably caused by someone incorrectly editing the configuration file or by a corrupt LNC file Verify programming of affected function block Invalid Input Connection Function block is programmed with wrong input type Probably caused by someone incorrectly editin
394. y 95 The following procedure shows how VPR amp VRX User Manual 55 Programming and Operating Concepts Table 3 7 Example Number Selection Procedure Using Front Panel Buttons 1 In the Control Loops menu select LOOP 2 Consult the Program Control Loops section of this manual to learn about the menu item you wish to change namely SETPOINT 2 3 Press Down Arrow button to move the cursor to the menu choice SETPOINT 2 Press Enter to move the cursor to the right side of the display where the choices for SETPOINT 2 are Press Up Arrow until NUMBER is displayed Press Enter The rightmost digit will slowly flash on and off indicating the cursor position Since we want to change the number to 95 00 press the Left Arrow until the ones digit flashes The Left Arrow moves the cursor to the left Press Up Arrow to change the 0 toa 5 8 To change the tens digit press Left Arrow to move the cursor one place to the left 9 To change the 0 to a 9 press Up Arrow nine times 10 At this point 95 00 should be displayed with the 9 flashing Since 95 00 is the value we want press Enter to select it The cursor moves left to the SETPOINT 2 prompt and the value is selected ATTENTION To enter a number with a connected keyboard instead of steps 5 10 simply type in the number 95 and press Enter How to program a discrete input parameter with a number Table 3 7 shows how to connect Setpoin
395. yde Sydney NSW AUSTRALIA 2113 Tel 61 2 353 7000 AUSTRIA HONEYWELL AUSTRIA G m b H Handelskai 388 A1020 VIENNA AUSTRIA Tel 43 1 727 800 BELGIUM HONEYWELL S A 3 Avenue de Bourget B 1140 BRUSSELS BELGIUM Tel 32 2 728 27 11 BRAZIL HONEYWELL DO BRAZIL AND CIA Rua Jose Alves Da Chunha Lima 172 BUTANTA 05360 050 SAO PAULO SP BRAZIL Tel 55 11 819 3755 BULGARIA HONEYWELL EOOD 14 Iskarsko Chausse POB 79 BG 1592 Sofia BULGARIA Tel 359 791512 794027 792198 CANADA HONEYWELL LIMITED THE HONEYWELL CENTRE 529 Mc Nicoll Avenue M2H 2C9 NORTH YORK ONTARIO CANADA Tel 416 502 5200 CZECH REPUBLIC HONEYWELL Spol s r o Budejovicka 1 140 21 Prague 4 Czech Republic Tel 422 6112 3434 DENMARK HONEYWELL A S Automatikvej 1 DK 2860 Soeborg DENMARK Tel 45 39 55 56 58 FINLAND HONEYWELL OY Ruukintie 8 FIN 02320 ESPOO 32 FINLAND Tel 358 0 3480101 FRANCE HONEYWELL S A B timent le Mercury Parc Technologique de St Aubin Route de l Orme CD 128 91190 SAINT AUBIN FRANCE Tel from France 01 60 19 80 00 From other countries 33 1 60 19 80 00 GERMANY HONEYWELL AG Kaiserleistrasse 39 D 63067 OFFENBACH GERMANY Tel 49 69 80 640 HUNGARY HONEYWELL Kft Gogol u 13 H 1133 BUDAPEST HUNGARY Tel 36 1 451 43 00 ICELAND HONEYWELL Hataekni hf Armuli 26 PO Box 8336 128 reykjavik Iceland Tel 354 588 5000 ITALY

VPR100 VRX100 VRX150 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents